Skip to main content

Full text of "An introduction to the mathematical theory of attraction"

See other formats


AN    INTRODUCTION 

TO    THE 

MATHEMATICAL 

THEOKY  OF  ATTRACTION. 


AN    INTRODUCTION 

TO    THE 

MATHEMATICAL 

THEORY    OF    ATTRACTION. 


BY 

FRANCIS  A.  TARLETON,  Sc.D.,  LL.D., 

FELLOW  OF  TRINITY  COLLEGE,  AND 
LATE  PROFESSOR  OF  NATURAL  PHILOSOPHY  IN  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  DUBLIN. 

VOL.    II. 


LONGMANS,    GREEN,    AND    CO., 

39    PATERNOSTER    ROW,    LONDON, 
NEW  YORK,   AND   BOMBAY. 

1913. 


BY  PONSONBY  &  GIBBS. 


SRLF 

UBfi 

Qfi 


PREFACE 


MY  time  for  some  years  was  so  much  occupied  by 
administrative  duties  in  Trinity  College  that  I  was  unable 
to  make  any  attempt  to  carry  out  the  intentions  stated 
above  fourteen  years  ago  in  the  Preface  to  the  first  volume 
of  this  treatise. 

I  have  now  to  some  extent  accomplished  what  I  then 
proposed.  I  came,  however,  to  the  conclusion  that  a 
chapter  on  Conjugate  Functions  was  not  suited  for  such 
a  treatise  as  the  present,  and  that  to  a  student  having  a 
limited  amount  of  time  at  his  disposal  some  account  of 
Maxwell's  Theory  of  Light  would  be  more  interesting  and 
instructive.  This  theory  is  not  of  course  part  of  the 
Theory  of  Attraction,  but  is  so  intimately  connected  with 
the  properties  of  magnetized  bodies,  electric  currents,  and 
dielectrics  treated  of  in  the  present  volume  that  its 
introduction  does  not  seem  unsuitable. 

I  should  recommend  a  student  reading  this  book  for 
the  first  time  to  omit  the  whole  of  Chapter  VIII  after 
Article  146. 


vi  Preface. 

Of  the  more  recent  developments  of  the  electro- 
magnetic theory  of  light  I  have  not  attempted  to  give 
any  account.  So  -far  as  I  can  judge  some  of  these  rest 
on  insecure  foundations.  I  imagine,  however,  that  before 
studying  the  most  recent  investigations  a  preliminary 
knowledge  of  Maxwell's  theory  is  required,  and  I  trust, 
therefore,  that  my  chapter  on  the  subject  will  not  be 
entirely  useless  to  the  student. 

I  have  to  thank  Mr.  S.  B.  Kelleher,  F.T.C.D.,  for  his 
kindness  in  reading  the  proof-sheets  of  this  book,  and 
furnishing  me  with  many  valuable  corrections. 


FRANCIS  A.  TARLETON. 


TRINITY  COLLEGE,  DUBLIN. 
April,  1913. 


TABLE  OF  CONTENTS. 


CHAPTEE  VIII. 

SPHERICAL  AND  ELLIPSOIDAL  HARMONICS. 
SECTION  I. — Spherical  Surfaces, 

Page 

Expansion  of  Potential  in  Series  of  Solid  Harmonics,      ....  1 

Laplace's  and  Legendre's  Coefficients, 2 

Complete  Spherical  Harmonics, 3 

Application  of  Spherical  Harmonics, 7 

Legendre's  Coefficients, 15 

Spherical  Harmonics, 18 

Laplace's  Coefficients, 20 

Reduction  of  a  Function  to  Spherical  Harmonics, 24 

Methods  of  forming  Complete  Solid  Harmonics, 26 

Incomplete  Harmonics, .34 

SECTION  II. — Ellipsoids  of  Revolution. 

Solutions  of  Differential  Equation.     Prolate  Ellipsoid,     ...  39 

Determination  of  the  Function  Qn, 41 

Analogues  of  Tesseral  Harmonics, 47 

Expansions  for  Potential, 50 

Surface  Distribution, 51 

Homceoids  and  Focaloids, 52 

Oblate  Ellipsoids, 54 

Analogues  of  Tesseral  Harmonics, 56 

Expression  for  Potentials, 56 

Surface  Distribution, 57 

Homoeoid  and  Focaloid,          .  58 


^  Contents. 

SECTION  III.— Ellipsoids  in  general. 

Page 
Ellipsoidal  Harmonics,  . 

Ellipsoidal  Harmonics  which  vanish  at  infinity, 

Ellipsoidal  Harmonics  expressed  as  Functions  of  Cartesian  Co-ordinates, 

Surface  Integral  of  Product  of  Harmonics 

Identity  of  Terms  in  equal  Series, 

Surface  Distribution  producing  given  Potential, 

Potential  of  Homceoid, 

Harmonics  of  the  Second  Degree  in  the  Coordinates,       .... 
Reduction  of  Solid  Harmonic  of  the  Second  Degree, 

Potential  of  Focaloid, 

Components  of  Attraction  of  Solid  Ellipsoid, 77 

Potential  of  Solid  Ellipsoid  in  External  Space, 

Potential  of  Solid  Ellipsoid  in  its  Interior, 79 


CHAPTER  IX. 

MAGNETIZED  BODIES. 
SECTION  I. —  Constitution  and  Action  of  Magnets. 

Magnet  of  Finite  Dimensions 81 

Potential  of  Magnetized  Body, 82 

Poisson's  Equation, 83 

Examples  of  Magnetized  Bodies, 83 

Expression  for  Potential  as  Sum  of  Force  Components,   ....  86 

Magnetic  Force  and  Induction, 87 

Energy  due  to  Magnet, 89 

Energy  of  Magnetic  System, 90 

Vector  Potential  of  Magnetic  Induction, 90 

Stokes's  Theorem, 91 

Determination  of  Vector  Potential, 92 

Magnetic  Moment  and  Axis  of  Magnet. 95 

Magnetic  Shell, 97 

Energy  due  to  Magnetic  Shell,       ....  .100 


Contents.  ix 

SECTION  II. — Induced  Magnetism. 

Magnetic  Induction, 102 

Magnetism  due  altogether  to  Induction , 102 

Distribution  of  Induced  Magnetism, .  103 

Body  Magnetically  Anisotropic, 105 

Ellipsoid  in  Field  of  Uniform  Force, 105 

SECTION  III. — Terrestrial  Magnetism. 

Earth's  Magnetic  Potential, 107 

Locality  of  Sources  of  Earth's  Magnetic  Force, 108 

Earth's  Magnetic  Poles, 109 

CHAPTER  X. 

ELECTEIC  CPEKENTS. 

Properties  of  Electric  Currents, 110- 

Solenoids, 112 

Equivalence  of  Electric  Circuit  to  Magnetic  Shell,  .         .         .         .113 

Magnetic  Potential  of  Electric  Current, 114 

Energy  due  to  Electric  Current, 115 

Force  exerted  by  Current  on  Magnet-Pole, 116 

Energy  due  to  Mutual  Action  of  Currents, 118 

Forces  between  Electric  Circuits, 118 

Force  on  Current  Element  in  Magnetic  Field, 121 

Force  exerted  by  Closed  Circuit  on  Element, 122 

CHAPTER  XI. 

DlELECTEICS. 

Influence  of  Medium, 123 

Electric  Displacement, 124 

Energy  due  to  Electric  Displacement,     .         .        .    •     .        .        .        .  1 25 

Conductors  and  Currents, 125 

Distribution  of  Displacement,         .                         125 


x  Contents. 

Page 

127 
Charge  on  Conductor 

Displacement  due  to  Electrified  Sphere 

Energy  due  to  two  small  Electrified  Spheres 1 

Force  between  Electrified  Particles, 

Distribution  of  Electromotive  Intensity 

Distribution  of  Electricity  on  Conductors,       .... 
Conditions  at  Boundary  between  Dielectrics,  . 
Attraction  on  Dielectric, 

Crystalline  Dielectric, 

Differential  Equation  for  Potential ' 

Distribution  of  Electricity  on  Conductors, 
Energy  expressed  as  Surface  Integral,    . 
Energy  due  to  Electrified  Particle, 
System  of  Charged  Conductors, 

Force  on  Electric  Particle, 1 

Potential  due  to  Spherical  Conductor,     . 

Force  due  to  Spherical  Conductor, 

Force  due  to  Spherical  Particle .         .     142 


CHAPTER  XII. 
ELECTROMAGNETIC  THEORY  OF  LIGHT. 

Energy  of  Current  in  Magnetic  Field. .144 

Energy  and  Electromotive  Force, 145 

Maxwell's  Theory  of  Light, 147 

Magnetic  Induction  and  Electromotive  Intensity, 149 

Current  Intensity  and  Magnetic  Force, 149 

Equations  of  the  Electromagnetic  Field, 150 

Solution  of  Equation  of  Propagation, 151 

Direction  of  Displacement  in  Isotropic  Medium 153 

Magnetic  Force  in  Isotropic  Medium, 154 

Crystalline  Medium, 155 

Wave-Surface, 157 

Wave-Surface  for  Crystalline  Medium, 157 

Magnetic  Force, 161 

Electromotive  Intensity, 162 

Conditions  at  a  Boundary 162 


Contents. 


XI 


Page 

Propagation  of  Light, .         .  165 

Keflexion  and  Refraction, 165 

Common  Light  and  Polarized  Light, Igg 

Intensity  of  Light, 168 

Energy  due  to  Electromagnetic  Disturbance, 170 

Quantities  to  be  determined  in  Reflexion  and  Refraction,          .  .172 

Reflexion  and  Refraction.     Isotropic  Media, 172 

Reflexion  and  Refraction.     Crystalline  Medium 176 

Uniradial  Directions, 178 

Uniaxal  Crystals, 178 

Uniaxal  Crystal.     Reflexion  and  Refraction, 180 

Reflexion  and  Refraction  at  Interior  Surface  of  Crystal,  .         .         .184 

Singularities  of  the  Wave- Surf  ace.          ....  187 

Total  Reflexion, '  191 

Absorption  of  Light, 193 

Electrostatic  and  Electromagnetic  Measure, 196 

NOTE  ON  THOMSON  AND  DIKICHLET'S  THEOREM,  .  .     199 


THE 

MATHEMATICAL  THEOKY  OF  ATTRACTION. 

CHAPTER  VIII. 

SPHERICAL    AND    ELLIPSOIDAL    HARMONICS. 

SECTION  I.  —  Spherical  Surfaces. 

137.  Expansion  of  Potential  in  Series  of  Solid 
Harmonics.—  It  was  shown  in  Art.  78  that  the  potential  V 
at  a  point  P,  more  distant  than  any  point  in  the  attracting 
mass  from  the  origin,  can  be  expanded  in  a  series  of 
descending  powers  of  r,  where  r  denotes  the  distance  of  P 
from  the  origin. 

In  this  case,  the  series  for  the  potential  is  of  the  form 


where  M  denotes  the  attracting  mass,  and  P,,  F2,  &c.,  are 
functions  of  0  and  0,  the  angular  coordinates  of  P,  and  of 
constants  depending  on  the  attracting  mass,  but  independent 
of  the  position  of  P. 

Since  V2  V  =  0  for  all  positions  of  P  outside  M,  the 
coefficient  of  each  power  of  r  in  V2  V  must  vanish  separately, 
and  therefore 


Using  for  V2  the  expression  given,  equation  (17),  Art.  48, 
we  obtain 


2  Spherical  and  Ellipsoidal  Harmonics. 

If  Y  be  a  function  of  0,  and  tf>  satisfying  (1),  it  is  easily 
seen  that  Va(r"F)  =  0;  accordingly,  if  Ptt  =  r"Fw,  we  have 
yz  yn  =  o?  aud  ^  is  a  homogeneous  function  of  x,  y,  z  of  the 
degree  n  satisfying  Laplace's  equation.  Such  a  function  is 
called  a  spherical  solid  harmonic  of  the  degree  n. 

It  appears  from  what  has  been  said  that  if  Vn  denote  a 
solid  harmonic  of  the  degree  »,  then  rP"")  Vn  is  also  a  solid 
harmonic  whose  degree  is  -  (»  +1). 

The  function  -£  is  termed  a  spherical  surface  harmonic  of 

the  degree  n,  and  is  what  has  been  denoted  above  by  F,,. 
In  the  present  case,  by  considering  the  expression  from 

TTT 

whose  expansion  -^  was  obtained,  it  is  easy  to  see  that  Vn 

is  a  rational  and  integral  function  of  x,  y,  s.    In  what  follows, 
Vn  will  be  termed  a  solid,  and  Yn  a  spherical  harmonic. 
138.  Laplace's    and    Legendre's    Coefficients.—  If 

the  attracting  muss  be  concentrated  at  a  point  Q  whose  polar 
coordinates  are  /,  0',  <p',  and  whose  distance  from  any  point  P 
is  r,  we  have 


where         X  =  /I/A'  +  A/1  -  ju*  v1  -  /"*"  cos  (tf»  ~  *)• 

In  this  case,  if  P  be  farther  than  Q  from  the  origin, 


and  if  P  be  nearer  the  origin, 


The  coefficients  L\,  L3,  &c.,  in  the  development  of  r"1  are 

called  Laplace's  Coefficients.     They  are  obviously  spheric* " 

harmonics  of  a  particular  kind.     They  may  be  defined  a 

the  coefficients  of  the  successive  poicers  of  h  in  the  expansion  of 

(i-2M  +  A')-i. 

These  coefficients  are  plainly  symmetrical  with  respect 
the  angular  coordinates  of  P  and  Q. 


Properties  of  Complete  Spherical  Harmonics.  3 

If  the  point  Q  be  on  the  axis  from  which  0  is  counted, 
A  =  //,  and  Laplace's  coefficients  become  the  coefficients  of  the 
successive  powers  of  h  in  the  development  of 

(l-2fih  +  //2)-4. 

In  this  case,  these  coefficients  are  functions  of  u  solely 
and  are  called  Legendre's  Coefficients.  They  are  usually 
denoted  by  P1?  P,,  &c. 

It  is  plain  that  Pn  satisfies  the  equation 


In  general,  a  spherical  harmonic  of  the  degree  «,  whicli 
is  a  function  of  ^  solely,  satisfies  (2),  and  is  called  a  zonal 
harmonic. 

139.  Properties  of  Complete  Spherical  Har- 
monics.—A  spherical  harmonic  which  when  expressed  as 
a  function  of  the  coordinates  is  finite  and  single-mined  for  all 
points  of  space,  is  said  to  be  complete.  If  Ym  and  Yn  be 
complete  spherical  harmonics  of  different  degrees, 


CJ> 

This  may  be  proved  as  follows:— It  appears  from  Art. 
Jo7  that 


satisfy  Laplace's  equation  ;  and  by  (5),  Art.  58,  if  we  take 
as  the  neld  of  integration  the  space  outside  a  sphere  S  of 
radius  a  described  round  the  origin  as  centre,  we  have 


Eence 


tnd  therefore,  unless  m  =  n,  equation  (3)  must  hold  good. 

B2 


4  Spherical  and  Ellipsoidal  Harmonics. 

If  Fn  be  a  complete  spherical  harmonic  of  the  degree  «, 
and  Ln  a  Laplacian  coefficient  of  the  same  degree, 


(4) 


To  prove  this,  take  as  the  field  of  integration  the  space 
outside  a  sphere  S  whose  centre  is  at  the  origin,  and  whose 
radius  a  is  less  than  r',  the  distance  of  the  point  Q  from  the 
origin,  and  let  r  denote  the  distance  of  any  point  from  Q  ; 
then  the  function  ^  satisfies  Laplace's  equation,and  therefore 
by  (10),  Art.  59,  we  have 


but 


at  all  points  for  which  r  <  /,  whence  at  the  surface  S  we 
have 


also    <(S  =  a*dnd<j>,    and 


unless  m  =  «».     Hence  we  obtain 

-  4,    =  -  -  ! 


from  which  equation  (4)  follows  by  transposition. 

If  two  series  of  spherical  harmonics  are  equal  for  all 
values  of  /n  and  $>,  each  harmonic  of  one  series  is  equal  to 
the  harmonic  of  the  other  series  whose  degree  is  the  same. 

Here 

Yo  +  Yl  +  Tt  +  &o.  -  Z«  +  Zi  +  Z*  *  &o. 


Properties  of  Complete  Spherical  Harmonics.  5 

If  each  side  of  this  equation  be  multiplied  by  Ln  and 
integrated,  since 

rr 

by  (4)  we  obtain 

4?r  4?r 


and  as  this  equation  holds  good  for  all  values  of  p  and  <?/, 
we  get  Yn  =  Zn. 

Any  function  of  m  and  0  which  is  finite  and  single-valued 
can  be  expanded  in  a  series  of  spherical  harmonics. 

The  method  of  arriving  at  this  result  is  suggested  by 
what  has  been  already  proved.  If  it  be  possible  to  express 
in  the  form  SFn,  we  must  have 


47T/W)  =  4jr2r'M  =  S  (2n  +  1)  f+*  P"  LnTn  d^  d$ 

J-iJo 

f+1  ft* 

/(^)S(2n  +  l)X«^f/0.  (5) 

.'  -iJ  o 


whence,  differentiating  and  multiplying  by  2//,  we  have 
2  (A  A  -  A2) 


then  by  addition  to  the  former  equation  we  get 


Accordingly,  if  the  supposed  expansion  be  possible,  we  must, 
when  h  =  1,  have 


and  conversely,  if  this  equation  be  true,  the  expansion  i 
possible. 


6  Spherical  and  Ellipsoidal  Harmonics. 

That  equation  (ti)  is  (rue  can  be  shown  in  the  following 
manner : — 

Let  Q  be  a  point  outside  a  sphere  S  whose  centre  is  the 
origin  and  whose  radius  is  «,  and  let  r  denote  the  distance  of 
any  point  on  8  from  Q.  Then 


where  r'  denotes  the  distance  of  Q  from  the  origin ;  and  if 

a 
h  =  — ,    we  have 

1  -//'          _  r'  (r/2  -  a') 
(I -2AA +  /*')*"          r3 

As  in  Art.  42,  we  have 

,«-2?r*, 

r 

and  therefore 


CdS  =  2iraf     1  1     \  =        lira2      m 

J  r3         r    \r'  -a      r'  +  a)      »•'(»•"-«')' 


also    dS  =  tfdfjidQ,    and  accordingly 
«    2'         1  -  A' 


The  value  of  the  definite  integral  above  is  therefore 
independent  of  /  ;  but  h  =  1  when  r'  =  a,  and  in  this  case 
each  element  of  the  integral  in  (6)  is  zero,  unless  r  be 
infinitely  small,  in  which  case  /i  =  //,  and  <j>  =  $'.  Hence, 
when  h  =  1,  we  have 


Application  of  Spherical  Harmonics,  7 

140.  Application  of  Spherical  Harmonics.— When 

the  potential  is  due  to  mass  on  one  side  of  a  spherical  surface  8 
and  is  given  at  each  point  of  the  surface  S  itself,  the  potential 
at  any  point  on  the  side  of  S  remote  from  the  mass  can  be 
represented  by  a  series  of  solid  harmonics.  At  the  surface  S 
this  series  becomes  a  series  of  spherical  harmonics  representing 
the  known  value  of  the  potential  at  the  surface.  Hence  by 
Art.  139  each  harmonic  in  this  series  is  determined,  and  con- 
sequently so  also  are  the  corresponding  solid  harmonics 
representing  the  potential  on  one  side  of  8. 

If  the  potential  be  due  to  a  distribution  of  mass  on  the 
surface  S  whose  density  is  given,  the  potential  outside  S  can 
be  represented  by  the  series 


r        *  rn+l 
and  at  any  point  inside  by  the  series 


a** 


At  all  points  of  the  surface  these  two  expressions  must 
be  equal,  whence  by  Art.  139,  Zn  =  FB.  Again,  if  F  and  V 
denote  the  potentials  outside  and  inside  the  surface,  we  have 
by  Art.  46  at  the  surface 


dV     <IV 

—.  ---  -=-  +  4ir(T  =  0, 

dr        dr 


that  is, 
whence 
and 


8  Spherical  and  Ellipsoidal  Harmonics. 

141.   Potential  of  Homogeneous  Spheroid.— If  the 

surface  of  a  solid  differs  but  little  from  a  sphere  whose  centre 
is  at  the  origin,  the  radius  vector  r  is  given  by  an  equation 
of  the  form  r  =  0(1  +  ay),  where  a  denotes  the  radius  of  the 
sphere,  y  a  function  of  the  angular  coordinates  fi  and  0,  and  a 
a  small  constant  whose  square  may  be  neglected. 

The  potential  F  at  any  external  point  is  the  sum  of  the 
potential  due  to  the  sphere  and  of  that  due  to  the  shell  whose 
thickness  at  any  point  is  aay.  Hence  if  p  denote  the  density 
of  the  spheroid,  p,  $'  the  coordinates  of  a  point  on  the  surface 
of  the  sphere,  and  r  the  distance  of  this  point  from  the  point 
r,  /u,  $  in  external  space,  we  have 


4  TT pa3         f, 
3— +  °j 


but  by  Art.  139,  y  =  %YH,  and  therefore  by  Art.  138,  and 
by  (3)  and  (4),  we  get 


(7) 


For  the  potential  at  a  point  inside  the  sphere,  by  Art.  42, 
we  obtain,  in  like  manner, 


142.   Potential    of  Heterogeneous    Spheroid.—  If 

a  spheroid  be  composed  of  homogeneous  layers  comprised 
between  surfaces  given  by  equations  of  the  form 


where   Yn  is  a  spherical  harmonic  which  varies   with  the 
surface,  and  a  is  a  variable  parameter,  we  have,  for  the 


Potential  of  Heterogeneous  Spheroid.  9 

potential    BV  of   a   single   layer   at   a   point    outside,   the 
equation 

pa'da 


and  at  a  point  inside, 

S  V  =  4irpa  da  +  4anp 


Hence  for  the  potential  V  of  a  heterogeneous  spheroid  at 
a  point  outside  it,  if  «t  denote  the  parameter  of  the  external 
surface,  we  obtain  the  equation 


V 


For  the  potential  of  a  heterogeneous  shell  comprised 
between  surfaces  whose  parameters  are  ^  and  «2,  at  an 
internal  point,  we  get 


pa  da  +  4a7r  2 ^~  »*.        ( 

^ 


By  combining  the  expressions  given  by  (9)  and  (10),  we 
find  for  the  potential  of  a  heterogeneous  spheroid,  at  an 
internal  point  lying  on  a  surface  whose  parameter  is  a, 
the  equation 


10  Spherical  and  Ellipsoidal  Harmonics. 

143.   Homogeneous    Mass   of  Revolving   Fluid.  — 

If  a  homogeneous  mass  of  fluid  revolving  with  a  uniform 
angular  velocity  be  in  a  state  of  relative  equilibrium  under 
its   own    attraction,   its  external  surface,    if   it   be   nearly 
spherical,  must  be  an  ellipsoid  of  revolution. 
This  may  be  proved  as  follows:  — 

By  Ex.  5,  Art.  24,  at  the  free  surface  of  a  liquid  in 
relative  equilibrium,  if  V  denote  the  attraction  potential, 
which  in  this  case  is  a  force  function,  and  if  the  axis  of 
rotation  be  taken  as  the  axis  of  s,  we  have 


0; 
whence,  as  in  Art.  81,  we  get 


IT*  ~"'(l  -y)  -  constant.  (12) 


The  last  term  on  the  left-hand  side  of  this  equation  must 
be  small,  as  otherwise  the  surface  of  the  liquid  could  not  be 
approximately  spherical.  In  this  term,  therefore,  we  may 
put  r  =  a,  and  substituting  for  V  from  (7),  we  get 

|irp*(l  -  «2Fn)  +  4airp«*  2  ~i  +  ~  (1  -  /*')  =  constant. 

(13) 

In  order  to  make  use  of  this  equation,  we  must  express 

s2 
/u2  by  means  of  spherical  harmonics.     Since    /u7  =  -j,    it  is 

plain  that  the  solid  harmonic  corresponding  to  the  spherical 
harmonic  of  highest  degree  in  tf  must  be  22  +  Ar2,  where  k  is 
an  undetermined  constant.  To  determine  k,  we  have 

V2{s2  +  k  (a*  +  if  -i-  s2)j  =  0. 

Hence  k  =  -  J,  and  tf  -  \  +  J  is  the  required  expression 
for  i2. 


Figure  of  the  Earth.  11 

By  Art.  139,  the  sum  of  the  spherical  harmonics  of  each 
degree  above  zero  in  (13)  must  vanish  separately.  Hence 
Yn  =  0  if  n  >  2,  and 

8  wV  .. 

•—  airptrYz  =  —  (J  -/r). 

10  xJ 

Putting    -4 —  =  5-,    we  get    n  F2  =  f  ^  (£  -  ^u2). 
Hence  the  equation  of  the  free  surface  is  of  the  form 


which  represents  an  ellipsoid  of  revolution  nearly  spherical 
whose  ellipticity  is  £  q.  See  Art.  81. 

144.  Figure  of  the  Earth.— On  the  hypotheses  that 
the  Earth  is  composed  of  homogeneous  layers  bounded  by 
similar  surfaces  nearly  spherical,  and  that  it  is  covered  with 
liquid  in  relative  equilibrium,  it  is  easy  to  show  that  the 
external  surface  of  the  liquid  must  be  an  oblate  ellipsoid  of 
revolution  whose  axis  is  the  axis  of  rotation. 

The  attraction  potential  V  of  the  Earth  is  given  by  (11)- 
At  the  surface  of  the  liquid,  (12)  must  hold  good.  Hence, 
by  substitution,  we  obtain 


+          G-]u2)  =  constant.     (14) 

Since  the  surfaces  of  equal  density  are  similar,  Yn  does 
not  vary  with  a,  and  as  «i  is  the  greatest  possible  value  for  a 
if  n  be  not  less  than  2,  we  have 


(n  +  3)  tf»* 
(2n  +  !)«,« 


Hence  the  multiplier  of  Yn  in   (14)   cannot  be  zero,  and 
therefore  if  n  >  2,  we  have  YH  =  0. 


12  Spherical  and  Ellipsoidal  Harmonics. 

If  n  =  2,  we  obtain 
4;r 


By  Art.  78,  when  the  centre  of  inertia  is  the  origin,  the 
coefficient  of  -j  in  V  is  zero.  Hence,  in  the  expression  for 

the  potential  of  a  spheroid  given  by  (9),  if  the  surfaces  of 
equal  density  be  similar,  and  if  the  centre  of  inertia  be  the 
origin,  we  must  have  Fi  -  0  ;  and  in  the  present  case  the 
form  of  the  external  surface  is  determined  by  the  equation 
r  =  «t  (1  +  a  Fa),  where  Y2  is  given  by  (15).  The  external  surface 
is  therefore  an  oblate  ellipsoid  of  revolution  having  the  axis 
of  rotation  as  its  axis. 

It  seems  improbable  that  the  hypothesis  made  above  with 
respect  to  the  form  of  the  surfaces  of  equal  density  should  be 
correct.  In  order  that  it  should  be  true,  it  is  necessary  that 
these  surfaces  should  have  been  formed  under  similar  con- 
ditions; but,  unless  the  Earth  were  of  uniform  density,  this 
could  not  have  been  the  case,  since  the  equatorial  centrifugal 
force  due  to  rotation  varies  as  the  distance  from  the  centre, 
whilst  the  attraction  of  the  sphere  having  this  distance  as 
radius  varies  in  a  different  manner  unless  the  density  be 
uniform. 

A  more  probable  hypothesis  is,  that  the  surfaces  of  equal 
density  are  represented  by  equations  of  the  form 

r  =  a  (I  +  a%), 

where  h  is  a  parameter  varying  with  a,  but  constant  for  each 
surface,  and  y  a  function  of  /*  and  <f>,  which  is  the  same  for  all 
the  surfaces. 

145.  t'lairatit  M  Theorem.  —  Whatever  be  the  internal 
constitution  of  the  Earth,  if  it  be  covered  with  liquid  in 
relative  equilibrium  whose  external  surface  is  an  ellipsoid  of 
revolution  nearly  spherical,  the  ellipticity,  e,  the  ratio  of  the 
centrifugal  force  at  the  equator  to  gravity,  q,  and  the  diffe- 
rence between  polar  and  equatorial  gravity  divided  by  the 
latter,  7,  fulfil  the  relation  j  +  e  =  f  q. 


Clairaut's  Theorem.  13 

This  equation  was  proved  in  Art.  81  on  a  particular 
hypothesis  as  to  the  internal  constitution  of  the  Earth. 
Any  hypothesis  of  this  kind  is,  however,  unnecessary,  as 
was  first  pointed  out  by  Sir  Gr.  Stokes. 

At  the  external  surface  of  the  liquid,  the  Earth's  poten- 
tial F"must  satisfy  (12);  but  as  this  surface  is  nearly  spherical 
and  the  term  in  (12)  due  to  rotation  is  small,  the  variable 
terms  in  F  must  be  small.  Hence,  if  M  denote  the  mass  of 
the  Earth,  we  may  assume 


where  a  is  a  small  constant.     Again,  by  Art.  81,  the  form  of 
the  external  surface  is  represented  by  the  equation 


Substituting  in  (12),  we  get 

—  (1  +  e  O8  -  £))  +  a  2  —  +  IT  «2  (J  -  /*')  =  constant. 
a  a.        & 


Hence   Yn  =  0,  unless  w  =  2.     If  w  =  2,  we  have 

r 


v2 
where 


Accordingly, 


and 


dV     M     _    «T2 
—  =  —  -  +  da  —  —  • 
dr       rz  IA 


14  Spherical  and  Ellipsoidal  Harmonics. 

Hence  if  Q  denote  the  acceleration  due  to  gravity  at  any 
point  on  the  Earth's  surface,  in  the  same  manner  as  m 
Art.  81,  we  find 


thati8'    *- 

Hence 

7 
and  therefore 


146.  Tangential  Component  of  Attraction.—  If  P 

denote  the  component  of  the  Earth's  attraction  perpendicular 
to  the  radius  at  any  point  on  its  surface,  by  (16),  we  have 


where  A  denotes  the  latitude  of  the  place. 

If  we  compare  (16)  with  (2),  Art.  78,  we  get 

Ma-^t  -  q)  Gu*  -  i)  =  -57  -  (A  4  J5  +  C). 

Hence  C  -  ^  =  ^(2e-  y).  (19) 

o 

The  equations  proved  above  were  arrived  at  before  in 
Art.  81  by  means  of  a  special  hypothesis  with  respect  to  the 
internal  constitution  of  the  Earth.  The  facility  with  which 
these  results  have  been  obtained  in  the  present  and  preceding 
Articles  without  any  such  hypothesis  illustrates  the  power  of 
the  Laplacian  method. 


Legendre's  Coefficients.  15 

147.  tegendre's  Coefficients.— The  definition  of  these 
coefficients  given  in  Art.  138  enables  us  to  see  that  they  are 
rational  and  integral  functions  of  fi.  A  general  expression 
for  these  coefficients  cannot  be  readily  obtained  by  the  usual 
methods  of  expansion.  If  we  put 

^_(h_ 
~~dx* 

we  can,  by  integration,  get  rid  of  the  negative  index ;  and 
thus  we  obtain 

(l-2yx  +  y2)* 
z  =  - —  +  constant. 

y 

If  we  take  -  for  the  constant,  we  get 

(>/z  -  I)2  =  1  -  2yx  +  y*  • 
whence  we  obtain          _        y_    ,  _ 

We  have  now  an  expression  for  z  suitable  for  the  applica- 
tion of  Lagrange's  theorem  (Williamson,  Differential  Calculus, 
Art.  125)  by  which  we  obtain 


whence 


Hence,  if  (1  -  Zph  +  A2)~i  =  1  +  2PWA", 

««*        f.-^g1  ,,.2,.,$(M'-ir.        (2D 

The  development  of  Pn  in  powers  of  n  is  most  easily 
effected  by  means  of  the  differential  equation  satisfied  by 
zonal  harmonics. 


16  Spherical  and  Ellipsoidal  Harmonics. 

If  Sn  denote  a  zonal  harmonic  of  the  degree  n,  we  may 

assume 

Sn  =  atfjL*  +  fl,.!//"1  +  &o., 

where  s,  &c.,  must  be  positive  in  order  that  Sn  should  be 
finite  at  every  point  of  space,  and  Sn  must  satisfy  the 
equation 

Hence  we  get 

+  H(n+l){atfif  +  &o.}  =0. 
Here  the  coefficient  of  p*  is 

{n(n  +  l)  -  *(*  +  !)!«,, 
and  that  of  p**  is 

&(s  -  l)ff,  +  (n(n  +  1)  -  (.$•  -  2)(.s  -  1)}  «^2 ; 

accordingly,  as  each  coefficient  must  vanish  separately,  we 
obtain 


From  the  first  of  these  we  get    s  =  «,    or    «  =  -  (n  4-  1)  : 
and  as  the  negative  value  for  s  is  here  inadmissible,  we  have 

-w(n-l)  -(«-2)(n-3) 

-"'    ""-  2(2^1)-  fl«     «--       4(2-8)       ^' 

and  in  general 


2.4...2?.(2n-l)(2w-3)...(2n-2g  +  l) 

(23) 


Legendre's  Coefficients.  17 

It  is  plain  that  the  terms  in  (22)  resulting  from 

tf,_iyus-1  +  <V3/i*"3  +  &c., 

must  vanish  independently  of  those  arising  from  the  series 
already  considered,  and  that  we  get  for  the  first  term  the 
equation 

(s  -  n  -  1)  (s  +  n)  rt,_i  =  0. 

Hence  fl«-i,  as-3,  &c.,  must  each  be  zero,  and  we  obtain 


„        , 

3)"     '  &C| 
(24) 

Hence,  zonal  harmonics  of  the  same  order  can  differ  only 
in  the  constant  factor,  and  we  may  write 

Sn  =  aPn,  (25) 

where  a  is  an  undetermined  constant. 

It  is  easy  to  see  that  the  coefficient  of  nn  in  (21)  is 

2n(2n  -  1)  (2n  -  2)  ...(»  +  1)          2"  .  f  n  .  1  .  3  .  5  .  .  .  (2n  -  1) 
_  _  _    or          *-~  _ 

2n   n  2"  .    w  .    w  ' 


and  therefore 


2(2w-l)' 


&c. 


(26) 


It  follows  from  the  definition  of  PM  that  when  /x  =  1  the 
value  of  Pn  is  unity. 

c 


18  Spherical  and  Ellipsoidal  Harmonics. 

148.  Spherical  Harmonics. — Since  the  expansion  of 

H^^'^r 

contains  only  rational  and  integral  functions  of  x,  yt  and  z, 
the  coefficients  Llt  L2,  &c.,  must  be  rational  and  integral 
functions  of  sin  0  and  cos  0,  in  which  each  power  of  sin  0 
and  cos0  is  multiplied  by  the  same  power  of 
Hence,  as 

_4rr_ 

2n  + 1 

the  spherical  harmonic  Yn  must  be  a  rational  and  integral 
function  of  sin  0  and  cos  0  of  the  nth  degree  in  which  each 
power  of  sin  0  and  cos  0  is  multiplied  by  the  same  power  of 
•v/(l  -  j*2).  If  each  power  of  sin  0  and  cos  0  be  expanded  in 
a  series  of  sines  and  cosines  of  multiples  of  0,  we  see  that 
finally  Yn  is  reducible  to  the  form 

2  (AsMt  cos  «0  +  B,NS  sin 

where  As  and  Bt  are  undetermined  constants,  and  M,  and  N, 
functions  of  /u. 

If  we  put  —  =  D,  and  /**  -  I  =  w,  equation  (1)  becomes 
DuDY  +!^_  r  - 

Since  the  coefficient  of  the  sine  or  cosine  of  each  multiple 
of  0  must  vanish  separately  in  (27),  we  have 


DuDM,-    -  +  »(»  + 1)]  Jf,-0,  (28) 

[U  ) 

Again,  since  cos  s<f>  and  sin  s0  can  result  only  from 
(cos0)s,    (sin0)*,    (cos0)4+2,    (sin0)m,   &c., 

X 

Mt  must  contain  t«2  as  a  factor ;  and  the  other  factor  must  be 


Spherical  Harmonics.  19 

a  rational  and  integral  function  of  ^     Accordingly,  we  may 
Ms  =  tfiv, 

where   v  denotes   a   rational   and    integral   function   of   u 

From  (28),  we  have  then 


v  +  su*  v  +  (2s  +  2)  u-fjiDv  4  w2     D*v 

--.  1 

-  s2?r     t;  -  n  (n  +  1)  u*  v  =  0.         (29) 

Since  M  =  M*  -  1,  equation  (29)  is  divisible  by  J,  and  we 
get 

n&v  +  (s  +  1)  Du  Dv  +  ^±11  t>D»rt  -  n  (n  +  1)  t>  =  0.      (30) 

If  we  assume  *  =  /)•«.,  equation  (30)  becomes 

Ds»  (uDw)  -  n(n  +  1)D>W  =  0.  (31) 

Since  v  is  a  rational  and  integral  function  of  «,  it  is  plain 
that,  with  the  exception  of  a  constant  factor,  it  is  completely 
determined  by  (30)  Hence  any  rational  and  integral  function 
pt  p  winch  satisfies  (30)  or  (31)  must  represent  v.  Equation  (31) 
is  satisfied  if  w  satisfy 

DuDw  -  n(n  +  \)w  =  0; 

but  this  equation  is  the  same  as  (22). 

Hence  we  may  put  w  =  Pw,  and  we  have 


It  is  plain  that  the  equations  by  which  XT,  is  determined  are 
tne  same  as  those  for  Ms.  Accordingly,  these  two  functions 
can  differ  only  by  a  constant  factor,  and  we  obtain 


cos  6-0  +  Ba  sin  ty)  i 

C2 


20  Spherical  and  Ellipsoidal  Hat-monies. 

The  part  of  Yn  depending  upon  s<j>,  that  is, 
(As  cos  s0  +  Bs  sin  s0)  i?J?Pn, 

is  termed  a  tesseral  harmonic  of  degree  n  and  order  «,  and  we 
may  write 

Yn  =  2  Tns  (A.  cos  s0  +  B,  sin  80).  (33) 

If  we  substitute  for  Pn  its  value  given  by  (26),  since  A, 
and  Bs  are  undetermined  constants,  we  have 


-&c..      (34) 

149.  L,aplace's  Coefficients.  —  Laplace's  coefficients 
are,  as  we  have  seen  in  Art.  138,  a  particular  kind  of 
spherical  harmonic;  and  as  they  are  functions  of  <f>  and  <j>' 
through  being  functions  of  cos  (<ft  -  ^'),  and  are  symmetrical 
in  fi  and  ju',  we  must  have 


Ln  =  2fl,  cos  a  (0  -  ^  ')  «  VlD*P,,  Z)''^,          (36) 

where  cr,  is  a  definite  function  of  w  and  s,  which  may  be 
determined  in  the  following  manner:  — 

By  (4)  we  have 


f+lf2* 
I     I 


^A,  COSS0  +  ^Ssms0) 
dndd>  = ^(As  cos«d>'  -r  B.  sin  s<t>'}n'riD>isP'n. 

S.D  -4-  I         v  •  r   / 


Laplace's  Coefficients.  21 

It  is  plain  that  the  only  part  of  the  multiplier  of  cos  s<f>' 
in  the  left-hand  member  of  this  equation  which  does  not 
vanish  after  integration  is 


[+*  f 


Hence,  if  s  be  not  zero,  we  get 


and  if  s  =  0,  we  have 

"I!!  *••"'"  s£ 


The  first  term  in  Ln  is  aQPnP'nj  and  when  /A'  =  1,  all  the 
other  terms  vanish,  and  P"«  =  l.  Hence,  in  this  case, 
Ln  =  a0Pn  ;  but  Ln  becomes  Pn  when  yt  =  1,  and  therefore 
r/0  =  1.  The  remaining  coefficients  can  now  be  found  by 
means  of  (36)  and  (37). 


Let 

then 

also  by  (2),  we  have 

>>(» 
whence 


A!  +  n(»+  1)A0  =  f1  {PnD(uDPn}  +  nDPnDP 


since  z<  vanishes  at  each  limit  of  the  integral. 


22  Spherical  and  Ellipsoidal  Harmonics. 

It  is  now  easy  to  see  that  an  equation  similar  to  that 
obtained  above  holds  good  for  any  two  successive  integrals 
of  the  series.  In  fact,  by  (2),  we  have 

&"(uDPn}  -  n(n  +  l)D°Pn  =  0  ; 

whence,  remembering  that  D*u  =  2,  D3u  =  0,  by  Leibnitz's 
theorem,  we  have 


**Pn  +  8(8  + 

and  therefore 

(n  -«)(»  +  *  +  !)  usD>Pn  =  D(ttsn  D°*Pn]  .        (38) 
Hence  we  have 
A,+i  +  (n-s)  (»  +  «+!)  A, 


=  J  '  D(n^D°Pn  l)^Pn]  dp  =  0.  (39) 

Accordingly,       A,+1  -  -  (n  -«)(«  +  «  +  1)  A,  ;  (40) 

and  therefore,  by  (36),  if  s  be  not  zero,  we  have 


and,  by  (37),  we  get 


Hence,  as  a0  =  1,  we  obtain 
-  2 


and 


(44) 


Complete  Harmonics.  23 

150.  Complete  Harmonics.  —  The  definition  of  solid 
and  spherical  harmonics  in  general  lias  been  given  in 
Art.  137  ;  but  the  properties  of  spherical  harmonics  proved 
in  Art.  139  have  been  obtained  on  the  hypothesis  that  these 
functions  are  finite  and  single-  valued  for  every  point  of 
space,  and  in  that  Art.  m  and  n  denote  integers. 

If  YI  denote  a  function  of  /u  and  0  satisfying  the  equation 

*     (45) 


where  *  denotes  any  real  numerical  quantity,  corresponding 
to  Yi,  there  are  two  solid  harmonics,  viz.  J*X\  and  r~^Y{. 

As  i  is  real,  one  of  the  quantities  i  and  -(?'  +  !)  is 
negative. 

Hence,  selecting  the  two  solid  harmonics  of  negative 
degree  which  correspond  to  YI  and  Yj,  we  see  that  when  Y{ 
and  Yj  are  finite  and  single-  valued,  equation  (3)  holds  good, 
unless  i=J,  or  «  =  -(/+!).  Again,  if  Yt  be  finite  and 
single-valued,  by  a  process  similar  to  that  employed  in 
proving  (4),  Art.  139,  we  have 


rr 

J-iJo 


5-)    ,    (46) 


if  t  be  positive,  the  coefficient  of  LH  being  n  -  i  if  i  be 

fr'\i 

negative,  and  that  of  Y'i  being    47r(  —  I  • 

Accordingly,  by  (3),  Y't  =  0,  unless  «'=«,  or  t  =  -(w+l). 
In  either  case  YI  is  a  rational  and  integral  function  of  /u, 

v/1  -  fj."  cos  0,    and    ^/l  -  fS  sin  $ 

of  the  degree  n. 

Hence  we  conclude  that  the  degree  of  a  complete  spherical 
harmonic  must  be  a  positive  integer,  and  that  the  correspond- 
ing solid  harmonic  of  positive  degree  must  be  a  rational  and 
integral  function  of  x,  y,  and  2. 

This  last  result  is  usually  expressed  by  saying  that  every 
complete  solid  harmonic  is  a  rational  and  integral  function 
of  x,  y,  and  2,  or  can  be  made  so  by  multiplying  by  a  suitable 
power  of  r. 


24  Spherical  and  Ellipsoidal  Harmonics. 

151.  Reduction  of  a  Function  to  Spherical 
Harmonics. — It  was  shown  in  Art.  139  that  a  finite  and 
single-valued  function  of  p  and  0  can  always  be  expressed 
by  a  series  of  complete  spherical  harmonics.  If  this  series 
be  finite,  so  that 


=  F0  +  Pi . . .  +  FB, 
we  have 

rnf=  Vn  +  fVn-i  +  &o.  +  r  {  Fw-i  +  r'F«_3  +  &c.j . 

Hence  rw/  =  fH  +  rf^  where  /„  and  /n_i  denote  rational, 
integral,  homogeneous  functions  of  the  coordinates ;  and  it 
appears  that  if  a  function  of  p  and  0  can  be  expressed  by 
a  finite  series  of  spherical  harmonics,  the  corresponding 
function  of  the  coordinates  must  consist  of  a  rational, 
integral,  homogeneous  function,  together  with  another  such 
function  multiplied  by  r.  Accordingly,  the  problem  to 
express  a  given  function  of  /u  and  <]>  in  a  finite  series  of 
spherical  harmonics,  when  soluble,  is  reduced  to  that  of 
expressing  /„,  a  rational,  integral,  homogeneous  function  of 
the  coordinates  in  a  series  of  the  form  Fn  +  r*  Fn_a  +  &c. 

This  is  effected  most  easily  by  means  of  Laplace's 
operator. 

In  fact,  by  Leibnitz's  theorem, 


~J~  +  T  —j     +  -r  — r^  )  +  'lpV2F,n,      (47) 
w       dy   dij       dz    c1-    ' 


but 


and    W=p(p +  !)»*-*;    also,    V2Fm  =  0,    and 
ffdVm  ^    dVm   t  ^rfF,, 

Accordingly, 

rm  =  {p(p+l)  +  2pm}>*-*rm.  (48) 


Reduction  of  a  Function  to  Spherical  Harmonics.         25 

From  (48),  we  get 

V%  =  a2  Fn_2  +  as*  F«-4  +  &c.,     V4/B  =  64  FM.4  +  b^  Fn_6  +  &c., 
&e.,  &c., 

where  a2,  ait  &c.,  &4,  &c.,  are  known  numerical  coefficients. 
If  this  process  be  repeated  sufficiently  often,  we  find 
ultimately 


according  as    n  =  2q,  or  n  =  2q  +  1,    the  coefficients  A  and  k 
being  known  numbers.     In  fact, 

li  -  \ji  +  1,    and    k  =  —  —  -  \ji. 

By  the  equations  previously  obtained,  we  can  then  determine 
the  other  solid  harmonics. 
As  a  simple  example,  let 


/=  Ax*  +  Bif  +  Cz~  +  2F//Z 
then  /=  F2  +  r2F0,  and  V2/=  AF0,   where   A  =  3.2.  1  =  6  ; 
but     V*f=2(A  +  B+C)',     hence     F0  =  H^  +  B  +  G\ 
F2  =  A&  +  Bif  +  Cz*  +  IFyz  +  2Gzx  + 


and 

/  =  i  {  2^  -  B  -  C}x*  +  (2B  -  C  -  A}f  +  (2(7  -  A  - 

+  2Fyz  +  2Gzx  +  2Hxy  +  %(A  +  B  +  C]  r\ 
Again,  let          /  -  x3  +  y3  +  tfy  +  ifx, 

then  ./  =  F3  +  i*  F,,  and  V2/  =  k  Fi,  where  k  =  |  .  3  .  2  =  10  ; 

accordingly,     10  Ft  =  8(.r  +  y),     hence     Fi  =  f(«!  +  y),     and 

F3  =  i  (*3  +  ?/3  +  *y  +  ifx)  -  i  z\x  +  y). 


The  method  originally  given  by  Laplace  for  reducing  to 
a  series  of  spherical  harmonics  a  function  of  p  and  ^  corre- 
sponding to  a  rational  and  integral  function  of  the  coordinates, 
differs  somewhat  from  that  iven  above. 


26  Spherical  and  Ellipsoidal  Hat-monies. 

A   rational   and   integral   function    of    the   coordinates 
corresponds  to  a  rational  and  integral  function  of 


If  the  various  powers  of  cos  <j>  and  sin  0  be  developed  in  sines 
and  cosines  of  multiples  of  0,  the  series  multiplying 

L 
(1  -  jU2)2  COSS0 

will  contain  all  the  powers  of  p  not  exceeding  n  -  9,  where  n 
is  the  degree  of  the  given  function  of  the  coordinates. 

If  we  collect  together  the  terms  containing  the  highest 
power  of  n  in  each  series,  we  obtain  an  expression  of  the 
form 


the  function  Tn  may  then  be  determined  by  taking  its  2»  +  1 
arbitrary  constants,  so  that  the  terms  of  the  above  form  may 
be  equal  to  those  in  the  expression  given  above.  If  we 
subtract  Yn  thus  determined  from  /,  we  get  a  function, 
f  -  Tn  of  the  degree  n  -  1  in 

/*,    \/l-  n*  cos^>,    and    \/l  -  /u2  sin  0. 

The  harmonic  Tn-\  can  then  be  determined  in  a  way  similar 
to  that  employed  in  finding  Yn,  and  so  on. 

When  the  original  function  of  the  coordinates  is  trans- 
formed into  a  function  of  r,  /u,  and  0,  the  various  powers  of  r 
are  in  /  regarded  as  constants. 

It  is  plain  that  the  total  number  of  terms  or  of  independent 
constants  in  /  is  1  +  3  +  5  .  .  .  +  2n  +  1,  that  is,  (n  +  I)2. 

This  is  also  the  number  of  arbitrary  constants  in  the  series 


152.  Methods  of  forming  Complete  Solid  Har- 
monics. —  A  complete  solid  harmonic  of  positive  degree  is, 
as  we  have  seen,  Art.  150,  a  rational  and  integral  function 
of  the  coordinates.  A  solid  harmonic  of  the  degree  «,  since 

it  is  homogeneous,  contains,  therefore,    '  -    terms. 


Methods  of  Forming  Complete  Sotid  Harmonics.          27 

The  coefficients  of  these  terms  are,  however,  not  all  inde- 
pendent ;  for,  if  Vn  denote  the  harmonic,  V2  Vn  must  vanish 

for  all  values  of  the  coordinates,  and  therefore    -  — 

equations  must  be  satisfied  by  the  coefficients  of  Vn. 

Accordingly,   F»  contains  2n  +  1  independent  arbitrary 
constants. 

Since    Wl-0,    we  Have        ''     <Y    <\V  1  _  0. 


where  «,  y,  /<;  denote  any  integers. 

Hence  v>  (  *Y  (£Y  (  ')*  I  _  0, 

Vfo/  vw  vfe/  >* 

and  therefore 


(d_  V  /rf  V  /  d_  \*  1 

w  WJ  w  >~ 


is  a  solid  harmonic  of  the  degree  -(i+j  +  k  +  l).  If 
i  +J+  k  =  n,  the  number  of  different  combinations  of  the 
type 

lYf-YY-Y 

U'/y  U; 

which  can  be  formed  is    -  -  -±-.  -  1  .    but  aii  the  different 

1 
functions  which  result  by  the  use  of  these  operators  on  - 

are  not  independent.     In  fact, 

(P       c^      _tP_\  fd_  y  fd_V  fd\k'  1  _  0 
dz*  +  dif  +  d?)  \djcj    \d~y)    \d»)    r       ' 

where    *'  +/  +  //  =  n  -  2.     Tliere  are   ^  ~9  ^M  equations  of 

this  form  which  must  be  satisfied  identically  by  functions 
of  the  form 


\<tej  \dy)  V 


28  Spherical  and  Ellipsoidal  Harmonics. 

where  i+J  +  k  =  n.  Consequently,  of  these  latter  functions 
there  are  only  2n  +  1  independent.  Hence,  every  complete 
solid  harmonic  Vn  of  the  degree  n  is  given  by  the  equation 

Vn  =  '•2nt 

where  » +J  +  k  =  n,  and  where  there  are  2n  +  1  independent 
functions,  and  consequently  2»  +  1  independent  arbitrary 
constants. 

Another  method  of  forming  complete  solid  harmonics 
depends  on  the  consideration  that,  if  ai,  /3i,  71  be  the 
direction  cosines  of  any  line, 

(L  +  3   *_  +       *\\ 

satisfies  Laplace's  equations,  and  more  generally  that  this 
equation  is  satisfied  by 

d\ 


rf     ,  <*        rf\  1 

3~  +  P«  3-  +  7,,  3-     - 

dx          dy      '   dzj  r 
It  follows  from  this  that  the  function 


satisfies  Laplace's  equation  ;  and  as  it  is  a  rational,  integral, 
homogeneous  function  of  the  nth  degree,  containing  2n  +  1 
independent  arbitrary  const  ants,  every  complete  solid  harmonic 
of  the  nth  degree  can  be  expressed  in  this  form. 

It  is  not,  however,  obvious  that  a  set  of  real  values  of  the 
coefficients  01,  /3i,  71,  &c.,  corresponding  to  any  given  com- 
plete solid  harmonic  always  exists,  and  that  in  general  there 
is  only  one  such  set. 


Methods  of  forming  Complete  Solid  Harmonics.          29 

This  proposition,  which  is  necessary  to  complete  Maxwell's 
method  of  representing  solid  harmonics,  was  proved  by 
Sylvester  (Phil.  Mag.,  October,  1876),  in  the  following 
manner : — 

It  has  been  shown  above,  that  by  the  solution  of  linear 
equations  for  determining  the  coefficients,  we  can  reduce  any 
complete  solid  harmonic  to  the  form  given  by  (49). 

We  have  now  to  show  that  any  rational  homogeneous 
function  of  the  nth  degree  of  the  symbols  of  differentiation 

operating  on  -  can  be  reduced  to  the  product  of  n  real  linear 


r 

factors  of  the  form 


d          d 


Since  the  symbols  of  differentiation  obey  the  same  laws  as 
quantities,  and  since 


dx*     dy~ 

the  theorem  just  stated  is  equivalent  to  asserting  that  any 
ternary  quantic  (x,  y,  z)n,  whose  variables  are  subject  to  the 
condition  <r2  +  yl  +  £  =  0,  can  be  reduced  to  the  product  of  n 
real  linear  factors,  and  that  this  reduction  can  be  effected  in 
only  one  way. 

The  equations  (x,  y,  z)H  =  0,  ar2  -f  if  +  zz  =  0  may  be 
regarded  as  representing  plane  curves  having  2»  points  of 
intersection.  If  these  points  be  joined  in  pairs,  we  obtain 
n  straight  lines,  the  coordinates  of  whose  points  of  determi- 
nation are  obtained  by  solving  for  x:y:z  the  simultaneous 
equations  (x,  y,  z)H  =  0,  and  a2  +  yz  +  zz  =  0. 

If  -  be  real,  the  corresponding  value  of  -  given  by  the 
latter  equation  must  be  imaginary,  and  so  also,  therefore, 
that  of  -  •  Hence  of  the  three  ratios,  x  :  y  :  z,  two  at  least 
are  imaginary. 


30  Spherical  and  Ellipsoidal  Harmonics. 

The  equation   of  the  straight  line  joining   the   points 
of,  i/,  z',  and  x" ',  y",  s"  is 

x(y'z" -  zy")  +  !/ (sV -  x'z")  +  z  (x'y"  -  i/'x")  =  0. 
If  we  suppose  ^—  and  X—  to  be  each  imaginary,  and  select  for 

"  A/'  2  Z 

^7  and  —  the  conjugate  imaginaries,  each  term  in  the  equa- 
tion of  the  straight  line  contains  </-  1  as  a  factor,  and  the 
line  is  therefore  real.  f/ 

If  the  equation  of  the  degree  2n  for  determining  '-  have 

2m  imaginary  roots,  there  are  2m  imaginary  values  of  either 
-  or  -  corresponding,  and  therefore  m  real  straight  lines. 


9 


Corresponding  to  the  2  (n  -  m)  real  values  of  -,  there  must 
be  2(n-w)  imaginary  values  of  -  and  -,  and  therefore 

(n  -  m)  additional  real  straight  lines.  Hence  in  all  there 
are  n  real  straight  lines  passing  through  the  points  of 
intersection  of  (x,  y,  z)n  =  0  and  a?2  +  y*  +  sa  =  0. 

There  are  no  more.    For  if  we  seek  the  values  of  -  which 

2 

satisfy  the  equation  of  a  real  straight  line,  and  the  equation 
#2  +  y*  +  s2  =  0,  these  values  must  be  real,  or  else  conjugate 

imaginaries ;  and  in  the  former  case,  the  values  of  '-  must  be 
conjugate  imaginaries,  and  also  those  of  -  •  Hence,  to  obtain 
a  real  straight  line,  each  imaginary  value  of  one  of  the  ratios 
-,  &c.,  satisfying  (JT,  y,  z)n  =  0  and  x*  +  yz  +  s2  =  0,  must  be 

combined  with  its  conjugate ;  consequently  there  are  only 
n  such  lines. 

Let  L  =  0  denote  the  equation  of  n  straight  lines  passing 
through  the  2n  points  of  intersection  of  (.r,  y,  z)n  =  0,  and 
#8  +  y2  +  s2  =  0;  then,  whenever  (x,y,z)"  and  #2  +  y*  +  sa  both 
vanish,  so  must  L,  and  therefore 

L  =  X  (x,  y,  z)n  +  Y  (x*  +  y*  +  s2) .  (50) 


Methods  of  forming  Complete  Solid  Harmonics.          31 

From  the  degree  of  the  various  functions  in  this  equation 
we  see  that  X  is  constant,  and  Y  of  the  degree  n  -  2.  Since, 
in  general,  a  ternary  quantic  of  the  nth  degree  contains 

-  -^  -  —  constants,  and  the  equation  of  n  straight  lines 

A 

contains  In  +  1  constants  ;  and  since 

(»«  +  !)(*  +  2)  ,(»*-!)»» 

9  -  9  -  ' 

it  is  plain  that  the        9        constants  of  F  can  be  so  deter- 

mined that  the  right-hand  side  of  (50)  shall  represent  n 
straight  lines.  It  has  been  proved  above  that  for  one  of 
these  determinations  the  n  straight  lines  are  real.  If 
ai#  +  j3i#  -f  yiS  =  0,  &c.,  represent  these  real  lines,  then 

(ai#  +  fry  +  y,s)  .  .  .  (anx  +  finy  +  yns) 

=  A  0,  y,  z)n  +  Y(o-  +if  +  22). 

Applying  the  theorem  which  has  been  proved  for  the 
quantities  x,  y,  z  to  the  symbols  of  differentiation,  by  (49), 
we  get 


f  d\i  /  <i\f  fd\*'  ftf     ,r-     ip\)i 

+  tz^)  WJ  (T*)      +  *  +  » 

+  ft*  +  „ 

rfa?         ay 


where  Fn  denotes  any  solid  harmonic  of  degree  »,  ^4,  ^4^, 
and  ii>T  constants,  and  01,  j3i,  71,  &c.,  the  direction  cosines 
of  straight  lines,  and  where 

i  +j  +  k  =  n,     i'  +f  +  k'  =  n  -  2. 


32  Spherical  and  Ellipsoidal  Harmonics. 

If  lines  be  drawn  from  the  origin,  each  in  one  direction, 
having  a,,  j3i,  71,  &o.,  as  their  direction  cosines,  these  lines 
meet  a  sphere,  having  the  origin  for  centre,  in  «  points 
which  are  called  the  poles  of  the  corresponding  spherical 
harmonic. 

The  mode  now  described  of  forming  spherical  harmonics 
was  given  by  Clerk  Maxwell  in  his  treatise  on  Electricity  and 
Magnetism. 

Maxwell's  method  of  representing  spherical  and  solid 
harmonics  admits  of  an  interesting  physical  interpretation. 

If  hj.  denote  a  line  whose  direction  cosines  are  aM  /3i,  7, 
drawn  through  the  point  x,  y,  a,  and  h\  the  parallel  line 
through  the  origin, 

d  d  d  \  1       d    1  d     1 


and  r._^>  ._.  (52) 

dhi  dhv.         dhn   r 

Again,  ™  expresses  the  potential  of  a   mass  m  at  the 

origin,  and  ...    d     1 

-  mdh\  —-.  — 

dh\  r 

expresses  the  potential  produced  by  superimposing  on  this 
mass  another  negative  mass  of  equal  magnitude,  situated  at 
a  point  at  a  distance  from  the  origin  infinitely  small  in  the 
direction  h\.  If  this  system  be  displaced  through  the 
distance  dh\,  reversed,  and  superimposed  on  the  former, 
the  potential  becomes 

„,    „,     d      d    1 
tn  ah  \  (in  a  -77^  —r  -  ,     and  so  on. 
dn\  dh  2  r 

The  repetition   of    this  process   n  times   leads   to   the 
potential  Un,  where 


..- 

an  i  an  2         an  n  r 

=  M—  A.      A 

dh*   d/i,  '  '  '  dh~n 
provided  A  =  mdhi  dht  .  .  .  dhn  =  M. 


Method*  of  forming  Complete  Solid  Harmonics.  33 

If  A  be  a  finite  constant,  m  must  be  an  infinitely  great 
quantity  of  the  nth  order. 

As  an  easy  example,  illustrating  the  foregoing  theory, 
we  may  consider  the  question  to  express  in  Maxwell's  form 
a  solid  harmonic  of  the  second  degree  containing  only  the 
squares  of  the  variables. 

Here,  by  Art.  151,  the  solid  harmonic 

F2  =  ay?  +  fof  -(a  +  b)  z\ 

<P       <f          c? 
Again,  a.      _  +  _  =  --,     we  have 


~ 

d  i 

+  3/i//2  -  (X  +  //)  >'2  =  (2A  - 


and  therefore  Vt  =  ;•*  (  X  —  -  +  u  ~ 

dx-         d  i      r 


Hence,  comparing  with  the  former  expression  for  F,,  we 
have    2X  -  ju  =  «,    2/i  -  X  =  i  ;    whence 


To  reduce    (  A  —i  +  u  -r-n  }  -    to  Maxwell's  form,  we  must 
V    <lxz     ^  dtp]  r 

consider  the  relative  values  of  X  and  //. 

If  X  and  ju  have  different  algebraic  signs,  and  n  =  -  f.i  ,  then 


F2  = 
If  X  and  fi  have  the  same  sign  and  X  be  the  greater, 


-dl 


34  Spherical  and  Ellipsoidal  Harmonics. 

The  most  general  solid  harmonic  of  the  second  degree  is 
reducible  to  the  form  considered  above  by  a  transformation 
of  the  axes  of  coordinates. 

In  general,  for  the  second  degree,  the  reduction  of  a  solid 
harmonic  to  Maxwell's  form  is  mathematically  the  same 
problem  as  the  determination  of  the  planes  of  circular 
section  of  a  quadric  surface. 

153.  Incomplete  Harmonics. — We  have  seen,  Art. 
150,  that  if  Ti  be  a  complete  spherical  harmonic  whose  degree 
is  real,  i  must  be  a  positive  integer,  and  Y{  a  rational  and 
integral  function  of  /u,  v/(l  -  /**)  cos  0,  and  </  (1  -  /tt2)  sin  $. 

If  i  be  a  negative  integer,  -(*'+  1)  is  zero  or  a  positive 
integer. 

If  i  be  real  but  not  an  integer,  it  is  easy  to  obtain  expres- 
sions for  Yi  which  satisfy  the  differential  equation  (45)  ;  but 
these  expressions  become  infinite  at  certain  points  on  a  sphere 
surrounding  the  origin,  or  alter  in  value  after  having  passed 
continuously  through  a  complete  circuit  surrounding  the  axis 
of  z.  In  the  latter  case,  accordingly,  they  are  not  single- 
valued. 

If  we  assume    pt  =  a0  +  a^  +  a4W4  +  &o., 

qt  =  fli/i  +  a3n3  +  a+p?  +  &c., 
and  substitute;^  in  the  equation 

l(l-rt*  +  f(f  +  l),-0,  (53) 

in  order  that  each  power  of  /i  should  vanish,  we  find  that 

(i  -  n)(i  +  n  +  1) 
"""••    (»+l)(.  +  2j  '-  (M) 

Equation  (54)  is  fulfilled  also  by  two  successive  coefficients 
in  the  series  denoted  by  qit  provided  q,  satisfies  (53).  Hence, 
if  we  assume 


. 
' 


2.3  ~       2.:*.  4.  6 


16-&C.V 


(55) 


Incomplete  Harmonics.  35 

each  of  the  series^  and  qi  satisfies  the  differential  equation  for 
a  spherical  harmonic  of  the  degree  i,  whatever  be  the  value  of  i. 

If  *  be  an  integer,  one  of  these  series  terminates :  the  other 
contains  an  infinite  number  of  terms. 

If  i  be  not  an  integer,  both  series  contain  an  infinite 
number  of  terms. 

The  sum  of  each  series  is  finite  so  long  as  /u  <  1 ;  but  if 
fji  =  1,  either  series,  if  it  contains  an  infinite  number  of  terms, 
becomes  infinite.  In  fact,  (54)  may  be  written 


and,  accordingly,  as  n  increases  without  limit,  all  the  terms 
become  of  the  same  algebraical  sign,  and  the  value  of  — 

tends  to   become   unity.     Hence    (Williamson,  Differential 
Calculus,  Art.  73),  if  /u  <  1,  the  series  is  convergent. 

In  the  case  of  the  more  general  spherical  harmonic  F,, 
whatever  be  the  value  of  i,  we  may  assume 


Yi  =  S  (A,  cos  s$  +  Bg  sin 

then,  as  in  Art.  148,  equation  (30),  we  find  that  pi,  must 
satisfy  the  equation 

(/£»-  l)D*p  +  2n(s+l)Dp  -  (i-s)(i  +  s  +  l)p  =  0.     (56) 
This  equation  is  satisfied  by  the  series 
aQ  +  azfj.z  +  din*  +  &c., 
and  by  the  series     «•]/*  +  «3/i3  +  «8ju5  +  &c., 
provided  that  in  each  series 


LiW-r«  /  -I  \  /  o\  '*#• 

(n  +  !)(»  +  2) 
Hence,  if  we  assume 


q*  =  «i 


D2 


36  Spherical  and  Ellipsoidal  Hai-niotiicn. 

Yi  =  S  (A.  cos  8$  +  2?,  sin  80)  (1  -  /i')'0>«  4  #,),     (59) 

where  i  and  «  have  any  values  whatever,  Fj  will  be  a  spherical 
harmonic  of  the  degree  i. 

If  /  -  s  be  a  positive  integer  or  i  +  8  a  negative  integer, 
one  of  the  series  pis  and  q^  terminates,  and  the  other  contains 
an  infinite  number  of  terms. 

In  any  other  case,  botli  series  contain  an  infinite  number 
of  terms. 

When  the  number  of  terms  is  infinite, 

(l-M')'jfc     and     (1-rfqt. 

are  each  finite  if  /A  <  1  ;  but  if  fi  =  1,  each  of  these  expressions 
becomes  infinite. 

In  order  to  prove  this,  we  observe  that  (57)  may  be 
written 


n«  5  -  -. 

»'  +  6n  +  2 

When  n  becomes  very  great,  the  ratio  of  «*«  to  «„  tends 
towards   l  +  !ii^. 


n 


Again,  if  we  put   (1  -/u2)'*  =  1  +  62u2  +  biui  +  &c.,    we  find 
that 


* 


As  n  becomes  very  great,  the  ratio  of  AW+J  to  bn  tends  towards 


Hence,  as  ^  approaches  1,  the  functions  pu  and  ^  tend 
to  become  quantities  of  the  same  order  as  (l-/ul)-»;  and 
therefore,  if  s  be  positive, 


and     (l 
are  finite  so  long  as  ^  <  1  ;  but  if  ^  =  1,  they  become  infinite. 


Incomplete  Harmonics.  37 

The  same  thing  is  true  if  s  be  negative.  In  this  case, 
(l-^)7  becomes  infinite  when  M  =  1,  and  the  products 

(*  -  ^)>»     and     (1  -  ^yqis 
become  infinite  as  before. 

When   i  =  s,  we  have  pia  =  «0  ;    and  when  *  =  s  +  1,  the 
series   qis  =  alf*. 

It  appears  from  what  has  been  said  that  if  we  assume 

(- 
Ft  =  (A  cos  /0  +  B  sin  fy)  (1  -  ^)*, 

where  /  is  positive,  Y>  is  always  finite;  but  if  i  be  not  an 
integer,  Yt  is  not  single-valued,  for  when  0  increases  by 
Zir  the  functions  cos  fy  and  sin  i<p  do  not  return  to  their 
original  values. 


If 


and  i  =  ns,  where  »  is  any  integer,  and  s  =  -,  the  function  T 

satisfies  Laplace's  equation,  vanishes  at  infinity,  and  is  zero 
at  the  planes  for  which  0  =  0  and  0  =  «.  At  the  surface  of 
a  sphere  of  radius  a  we  have 


Thus  on  this  sphere  Fis  a  function  of  ^u  and  0,  which  vanishes 
at  each  of  two  great  circles,  and  is  finite  and  single-  valued 
tor  the  intercepted  portion  of  the  surface.  By  bringing  in  a 
sufficient  number  of  terms,  and  properly  determining  the 
arbitrary  constants,  it  may  be  possible  to  make  this  function 
equal  at  least  approximately,  to  an  assigned  function  having 
the  characteristics  above. 

/?  iS£me  cases>  a  function  satisfying  Laplace's  equation, 
fulfilling  certain  boundary  conditions,  can  be  found  by 


38  Spherical  and  Ellipsoidal  Harmonics. 

means  of  spherical  harmonics  of  imaginary  degrees.     We 
have  seen  already  that  whatever  be  t  and  *, 


S  (A,  cos  s<t>  +  Bt  sin  $9)  (1  -  /u2)  '(>,•,  -f  ?,,) 

is  a  possible  form  of  a  spherical  harmonic  of  the  degree  *. 
If  i  be  imaginary  in  order  that  ptt  and  j,,  should  be  real,  it 
is  necessary  only  that  1(1+  i)  should  be  real.  If  we  put 

f  (*'  +  1)  =/,       we  get     i  =  -  |  ±  ^/(f+  i)  ;       whence, 


if  i  be  imaginary,  /  must  be  negative  and  greater  than 
£  in  absolute  magnitude.  Accordingly,  putting  /  =  -  kt 
we  obtain 


then,  since  Ti  depends  only  on  the  value  of  *'(»'+  I),  we  have 
Yi  =  Ti',  and  both  these  functions  are  real. 
If  we  now  assume 


tlie  function  V  satisfies  Laplace's  equation,  and  we  have 

Y-  9V 

' 


If  we  assume  v/-  1  V  =  r*  Yt  -  r*'  Fi- ,  we  get  in  like  manner 

2  T7*- 
V'  =  ~/f,B™  x'     wnere     X  =  */(k  ~  i)  log r.     In  order  that 

V  or  F'  should  vanish  at  a  sphere  of  radius  a,  we  have  only 
to  assume 


Ellipsoids  of  Revolution.  39 

In  the  first  case,  we  have 


and,  in  the  last, 

*  =  d— 
Vlog, 

Incomplete  splierical  harmonics  are  here  briefly  described 
in  order  to  give  the  student  an  idea  of  their  nature  and  of 
the  kind  of  conditions  which  they  can  be  made  to  satisfy. 
They  are  useful  in  some  departments  of  mathematical  physics. 


SECTION  II. — Ellipsoids  of  Revolution. 

154.   Solutions    of  Differential   Equation.— When 

the  surfaces  with  which  we  have  to  do  are  not  approximately 
spherical,  the  expansions  for  the  potential  which  have  been 
investigated  are  of  little  use.  In  the  case  of  ellipsoids  of 
revolution,  equations  (35)  and  (41),  Art.  98,  enable  us,  by 
an  extension  of  the  theory  of  spherical  harmonics,  to  arrive 
at  suitable  forms  for  the  potential. 

Equation   (41),  Art.  98,    if    we   write  $  instead  of  x> 
becomes  by  transposition 


(i) 


If  such  a  form  be  assigned  to  F  as  to  make  each  member 
of  this  equation  equal  to  the  same  quantity,  the  equation  is 
satisfied  ;  but,  by  Art.  148,  if  Pn  satisfy  equation  (22),  Art. 
147,  then 


cos  «0  +  B  sin  *0) 
satisfies  equation  (27),  Art.  148,  if  substituted  for  YH. 


40  Spherical  and  Ellipsoidal  Harmonics. 

Hence 

'  B  sin 


must  satisfy  (1),  aud  if  V  satisfy  Laplace's  equation  through- 
out the  region  inside  a  prolate  ellipsoid  of  revolution,  we  may 
put 

V  =  STATUS)  (A.  ooss^  +  B,  sin  «0).         (2) 


The  value  of  F  given  by  (2)  becomes  infinite  along  witli  £ 
at  points  at  an  infinite  distance  from  the  centre  of  the 
ellipsoid.  Accordingly,  (2)  does  not  give  a  suitable  form 
for  F  in  the  space  outside  the  ellipsoid. 

It  appears,  however,  from  Art.  147  that  there  are  two 
solutions  of  equation  (22)  of  that  Article.  One  of  these 
is  Pn;  the  other,  which  may  be  denoted  by  Qn,  contains 
only  negative  powers  of  p.  Accordingly,  when  £  becomes 
infinite,  Qn(£)  becomes  zero. 

Hence,  if  we  put 


(3) 

and  V=  S2Jn,  (4),  we  see  that  this  form  of  F  satisfies 
Laplace's  equation  throughout  the  space  outside  the  ellipsoid 
and  is  zero  at  infinity. 

If  we  denote  by  Unt  the  function  corresponding  to  Tnl 
in  equation  (33),  Art.  148,  we  have 


and 

tW  (A,  cos*0  +  li.  sin  «0).        (6) 


At  the  surface  of   the  ellipsoid,   where   £   is   constant, 
becomes  a  spherical  harmonic  Fw. 


Determination  of  the  Function  Qn.  41 

155.    Determination    of  tbe    Function    Qn.  —  The 

differential  equation  (<J2),  Art.  147,  being  of  the  second 
order,  has  two  particular  integrals;  one  of  these  is  Pny  the 
other  Qn.  Putting  £  instead  of  /u,  by  Art.  147,  we  have 


(7) 
By  Art.  147,  if  ff,  be  the  coefficient  of  £*  in  this  series, 


Hence,  as  -  «  increases,  the  ratio  a,_2  :  r^  tends  to  become 
unity,  and  if  £  >  1,  the  series  is  convergent;  but  if  £  =  J,  it 
is  divergent.  Hence,  in  the  space  inside  the  ellipsoid  of 
revolution,  2),,  is  not  a  suitable  form  for  the  potential. 

156.  Determination  of  Qn  as  au  Integral.  —  If  we 

write  y  for  Sn  and  x  for  /*,  equation  (22),  Art.  147,  becomes 

cfy         2x     di,      H(H  +  I-      _ 

*  +  *  y"°' 


which  is  of  the  form 


If  we  put  y  =  vi/i,  equation  (10)  becomes 


If  ^  be  a  solution  of  (10),  we  get 


d-\ 

(12) 


42  Spherical  and  Ellipsoidal  Harmonics. 

whence,  by  integration, 


and  if  v  =  0  when  x  =  ar0,  we  have 
v-C, 


y? 

In  the  present  case, 

X\  =  -^ — r,     and    6' 
also,  y,  -  P«.     Accordingly, 


By  putting   x  =  -,    expanding  the  expression  under  the 

integral  sign  in  ascending  powers  of  s,  and  integrating,  it  is 
easy  to  see  that  when  x  =  oo,  or  z  =  0,  we  have  v  =  0.    Hence 


If  we  choose  -  1  for  the  value  of  dt  we  make  Qn  perfectly 
definite,  and  we  obtain 


157.    Expression    of   Qn    by    means    of    a     Finite 

Series.  —  In  order  to  express  Qn  as  a  finite  series,  it  is 
necessary  first  to  prove  some  relations  which  exist  between 
successive  coefficients  of  Legendre  and  the  functions  obtained 
from  them  by  differentiation. 


Expression  of  Qn.  43 


. 

Du  =  2*,     D*u  =  2,     .D»«  =  0  ; 


If  we  put    #2  -  1  =  «,    —  =  Z),    we  have 
dx 


and  we  get 


Substituting  for  DMlun  by  a  formula  similar  to  that  just 
obtained,  we  get 


=  (n  +  1)  (Du  DMl  un  +  (»+!)  V-u  D"  «") 
=  2(w  +  l)#Dn+1  wn  4-  2(w  +  l)2Z>we<n. 


D»+2w'<+i  =  2(n 
but  by  (21),  Art.  147,  we  have 

and  tlierefore,  dividing  by     2n+1  1^(«  +  1),     we  get 

DPM  =  tfDP^  +  nxPn^  +  (n  +  l)Pn, 
and  subtracting  DPn.i,  we  have 

DPn,,  -  DPn_,  =  uDPn_i  +  nxPH-i  +  (n  +  l)Pn.     (16) 

The  right-hand  side  of  (16)  can  be  expressed  in  terms  of 
Pn,  for  we  have 

Dnttn  =  D"u  nn~l  =  wD"^-1  +  2nxD"-1  un-1  +  2"(^~1)  D"-2^-1  ; 

also, 

Z^wn  =  E*-lDun  =  ZP-hi  un~lDu  =  2nxDn-1tin-1  +  2n(n  -l)!*"-*^-1. 

Comparing  the  two  expressions  for  Z>"wn,  we  find 

uB"  un~l  =  n  (n  -  I  )  D*"1  un~l  .  (17) 

Equation  (17)  shows  that  IPu"  satisfies  (22),  Art.  147, 
a  result  which  has  been  already  proved  in  Art.  147.     If  we 


Spherical  and  Ellipsoidal  Harmonics. 


now  substitute    uD»nn-1    for    «(n-  OD"-^"-1    in  the  first  of 
the  expressions  for  Z^M"  given  above,  we  get 


D»un  =  '2uDnu^1  +  2nzDw-lwn-1,  (18) 

and  dividing  by  2n  |_n  ,  we  have 

JV-it*ZHV,  +  «rfV»,  (19) 

n 

whence  uDPn.\  +  nxPn.\  -  wP». 

Substituting  in  (16),  we  obtain 


(20) 
From  (20),  we  get  immediately 

DPn  -  (2n  -  l)Pn-i  +  (2n  -  5)Pn_3  .  .  .  +  (2»  -  4s  +  3)  Pn.,,+1  +  &o. 

(21) 

We  can  now  express  Qn  as  a  finite  series  by  treating  the 
equation 


in  a  manner  somewhat  different  from  that  previously 
employed.  If  we  put  y  =  vy\-w,  and  substitute  in  (22), 
we  get 


Expression  of  Qn.  45 

If  we  next  suppose  y\   to   be  a  solution  of   (22),    and 
determine  v  in  such  a  manner  as  to  satisfy 

^d-vg-O,  (23) 

«(»+l)|«.2(*.-l)^'.  (24) 

From  (23),  by  integration,  we  obtain 

(l-#2)^  =  constant. 
'  dx 

If  we  choose  1  as  the  value  of  this  constant,   we  get,   by 
integration, 


and  (24)  becomes 

£„_„£.„<„*!>,._„£.      (26) 

If  we  assume 

w  =  4,Pn.i  -f-  AzPn-z  .  .  .  f  Ati-iP^M  +  &c., 

and  make   yl  =  Pn,    by  (21)  of  the  present  Article,  and  (2), 
Art.  138,  we  get 

2  (2n  -  4s  +  3) 

=  Aw  [n(n  +  1)  -  (n  -  Vs  +  !)(«  -  2*  +  2)} 

*  AM  {«'  +  w  -  [w2  -  (4s  -  3)  w  +  2  (*  -  1)  (2s  -  1)]  } 


whence  ^  2.  -  4.  +  3 

(2s  -  !)(«  -  s  +  1) 


(28) 


46  Spherical  and  Ellipsoidal  Harmonics. 

Thus  we  obtain 

i  .  ^'IA  i  kir'^J  - 

where  w  is  giveu  by  (^8). 

We  have  now  arrived  at  three  expressions  for  Qn  of  which 
one  is  perfectly  definite,  and  the  other  two  contain  constants 
which  can  be  determined  by  comparison  with  (15). 

From  (29)  and  (15)  we  get 


whence,  by  division  and  differentiation,  we  get 

C 
that  is, 


P         -«• 

1  '  *  dx  dx 


but  when    x  =  1    we  have    Pn  =  1,    and  therefore    C  =  1. 
In  order  to  find  ^  in  (7)  we  put  x  =  -  ,  and  identify  the 

coefficients  of  the  lowest  powers  of  2  in  the  expressions  for 
Qn(#)  given  by  (7)  and  (15). 
By  Art.  147,  we  have 


-  Art1  {1  +  ascending  series  in  z\  ,  where  ^  =  —  5---(2n-1)  . 

w 
therefore, 


,« 
(1  +  &c.)       s2»(  I  -  s1)-1 


Analogue*  of  'federal  Harmonics.  47 


Here  the  lowest  power  of  a  after  integration  is  plainly  sn+1, 
its 
that  is, 


and  its  coefficient  is  '  accordinS1y> 


K  = 


1.3.5  .  .  .  (til  T  1) 

For  Q(£)  we  have,  then,  three  expressions  given  by  the 
equations 

Li 


(33) 
158.  —  Analogues  of  Tessera!  Harmonics.  —  We  saw 

in  Art.  148  that  the  multiplier  of  M^COSS^  in  the  spherical 
harmonic  Yn  must  satisfy  equation  (30)  of  that  Article.  This 
equation  has  two  particular  integrals,  DsPn  and  -D*QM;  but, 
by  means  of  (30),  Art.  148,  the  latter  can  be  expressed  in 
terms  of  the  former.  In  fact,  (30),  Art.  148,  may  be  written 


0-  (34) 

If  we  compare  this  with  (10),  Art.  156,  we  see  that 


and  consequently 


48  Spherical  and  Ellipsoidal  Harmonics. 

Accordingly,  if  yt  be  a  particular  integral  of  (34),  the  other 
particular  integral  i/z  is  given  by  the  equation 


and  therefore,  adopting  the  notation  of  Art.  154,  if  we  put 
Tnt  =  u^y^  we  have 


(35) 


We  may  regard   Ung  as  defined  by  (5),  Art.   154,  and 
consider  Tni  as  given  by  the  equation 


It  is  now  easy  to  show  that  in  (35)  the  value  of  C  is 


For 


and  if  we  put 


1.8.5...  (&,-!)  1 

— in_8 —    ~  =  A7,     and     -  =  2, 


we  get      Tnt  =  Nx"(l  +  Z\      where  Z  denotes  a  series  i 


Analogues  of  Tesseral  Harmonics.  49 

ascending  powers  of  s,  then 

dz 


flr 

.(-^V 


(l  +  Z)         (l  - 


but  I  n 

Qn  =  -  !=  -  (ar(«*i)  +  &c.) 
V 

and 


(36) 


n  +  s 

-  2"+l  +  &c. 


.  „  , 

1.3.0  .  .  . 


Hence,  equating  the  coefficients  of  the  lowest  powers  of  z  in 
the  two  expressions  for  Unt,  we  get 

C  \  n  +  s 

--' 


(2n+l)N  '  1.3.5  .  .  .  (2n  +1)' 

whence 


and  as    s0  =  0,    and  therefore    XQ  =  co  ,    we  have 


It  is  to  be  observed  that,  in  order  to  avoid  the  introduc- 
tion of  imaginary  quantities,  Tnt  (x)  is  regarded  as  having  a 
somewhat  different  signification  according  as  x  <  1,  or  x  >  1. 


50  Spherical  and  Ellipsoidal  Harmonics. 

In  fact,  in  Art.  148, 


and,  in  the  present  Article, 

)',  (38) 


but  TM  (0  =  (V  -  I)'  &  Pn  (£).  (39) 

It  is  obvious  that,  whichever  signification  be  attributed 
to  Ttu(x),  it  satisfies  the  same  linear  differential  equation. 

159.  Expansions  for  External  and  for  Internal 
Potential.  —  We  can  now  write  down  the  series  express- 
ing the  potential,  inside  and  outside  a  prolate  ellipsoid  of 
revolution,  due  to  a  distribution  of  mass  on  its  surface. 

Let  V  denote  the  potential  inside,  and  V  that  outside, 
the  ellipsoid  whose  semi-axis  major  is  #£0  ;  then  we  may  put 


,  cos  sty  +  Bnt  sin  z\ 
and  (40) 


(41) 

At  the  surface,  where  ^  =  £0,  these  two  expressions  become 
the  "same  series  of  spherical  harmonics  which  can  be  made 
equal  to  any  assigned  function  of  £  and  d>  which  is  finite 
and  single-valued. 


Surface  Distribution  corresponding  to  Potential.          51 

160.  Surface  Distribution  corresponding  to 
Potential.  —  If  the  internal  and  external  potentials,  V 
and  F"',  due  to  a  surface  distribution  whose  density  is  a, 
be  given  by  the  equations 


<r  can  be  found  from   the  equation  at  the  surface  of  the 
ellipsoid  £0. 

If  dsi  be  an  element,  drawn  outwards,  of  the  normal  to 
the  surface,  equation  (12),  Art.  46,  becomes 

dV     dV 

3  ---  j  —  =  4?r(T  J 
dsl        dsi 

but  by  Ex.  2,  Art.  75,    ttsi  =  -  '•  —  ,     and  therefore  we  have 


dTT       dt,  _i 

-+     ^'- 


;      wlience 




=  ^r0(^-i)^o  ,- 

(42) 

When  the  density  of  the  surface  distribution  is  given, 
the  expressions   for   the   potential   inside   and   outside   the 

ellipsoid  may  be  determined  by  expanding  -,  expressed  as 

a  function  of  !;  and  ^>  in  a  series  of  spherical  harmonics, 
and  determining  each  of  the  functions  T(£)  and  the  corre- 
sponding constants  by  means  of  (42).  The  potentials  V 
and  V  are  then  given  by  (40)  and  (41). 

E2 


52  Spherical  and  Ellipsoidal  Harmonics. 

161.  Potentials   of  Homoeoid    and    Focaloid.—  If 

the  surface  distribution  be  homceoidal,  the  density  varies 
as  p,  and  the  multiplier  of  p  on  the  right-hand  side  of  (42) 
must  be  constant.  Hence,  V  =  constant, 


(43) 

•mr 

When  £  becomes  very  great,    V'  tends  to  become  —  , 

M  *' 

that  is  j-y,  where  M  denotes  the  total  mass  of  the  homceoid. 

K(+ 

Hence    C  '  =      ,   and 


For  a  focaloidal  distribution  the  density  varies  inversely 
as  jo,  and  -  varies  as  —  ,  that  is,  as  ?0  -  £*.  Accordingly,  - 
is  of  the  form  AP0  +  BP2  (£),  and 


It  is  easily  seen  that 


and  that 

1  r    1 


£  +  1 

Hence,  by  integration,  we  have 

£• 

2 


V>  '      lo + 


(45) 


Potentials  of  Homceoid  and  Focaloid.  53 

By  a  method  similar  to  that  employed  in  the  case  of  the 
homoaoid,  we  find  that    AQ  =  —  ,     where  M  is  the  mass  of 

the  focaloid. 

It  follows  from  (42)  that  the  coefficients  of  P0  and  (£2  -  £) 

in  47r&2£0(£02  -  1)  -  are  A0  and  -^^  ;  but  -  varies  as  £02-  £2, 

P  £o  ~  $          P 

that  is,  as     £02  -  J  -  (%*  -  |),     and  therefore  we  must  have 
At  =  -  A.     Hence 


(46) 

By  Art.  83,  the  potential  of  a  focaloid  in  external  space 
is  the  same  as  that  of  the  solid  ellipsoid  of  equal  mass  of 
which  it  is  the  boundary.  Hence  (46)  may  be  verified  by 
comparing  it  with  (2),  Art.  78.  This  verification  is  readily 
effected  by  taking  a  point  on  the  axis  of  revolution.  Here 

£  =  1,    and    r  =  k%  ;    then  putting    -z  =  s,   from  (46)  we  get 


M(          n      3/1      li  M 


(47) 

Again  in  (2),  Art.  78,  for  points  on  the  axis  of  revolution, 
7  =  A  ;  and,  since  C  =  B,  we  have 

A  +  B  +  C  -  37  _  Mk* 

~2~  =" 

Hence,  putting  kZ,  for  r,  we  get 

r=^  +  5#T3' 

which  agrees  with  (47). 


54  Spherical  and  Ellipsoidal  Harmonics. 

162.  Oblate    Ellipsoid    of  Revolution.—  When   we 

have  to  do  with  oblate  ellipsoids  of  revolution,  Laplace's 
equation  takes  the  form  given  by  (35),  Art.  98.  If  we  put 
£  =  -  Z'v/^Tl  in  this  equation,  and  write  0  instead  of  x» 
we  get  an  equation  in  £',  £,  and  $,  which  is  the  same  as  (1). 
Hence,  in  the  case  of  the  oblate  ellipsoid,  we  may  put  for  V 
and  V  the  expressions  given  by  (2)  and  (4),  or  by  (40)  and 
(41),  provided  we  put  £'  instead  of  £.  In  order  to  determine 
completely^  these  expressions  for  Fand  V',  we  have  then  to 
put  £v/~  1  f°r  £'»  and  accordingly  we  have  to  find  what  P(£')> 
Q(O,  r(O»  and  *7"(O  become  when  £v/^l  is  substituted 
for  £'. 


163.  Determination    of  jo  (£)    and  y  ($).     If  we  put 
-l     instead  of  ^  in  the  expression   for    Pn  (£),    given 
by  (26),  Art.  147,  we  get 


and  we  may  put 


(48) 
Also,  putting    </-  1  =  {,    we  have 

-P.  00  =  tnpn(?).  (49) 

In  like  manner,  from  (31)  and  (32),  we  have 


(50) 


Oblate  Ellipsoid  of  Revolution.  55 

It  is  plain  that  the  right-hand  members  of  (50)  and  (51) 
can  differ  only  by  a  factor  which  is  some  power  of  t  from  the 
expressions  for  Q(/£),  given  by  (31)  and  (32);  and,  as  the 

term  involving  the  lowest  power  of  j  is  the  same  in  the  two 
forms  of  qn(Z),  they  are  consistent. 
From  (31),  we  see  that 

Qn(£)  =  cWqn(S).  (52) 

In  order  to  find  a  third  expression  for  gn(Z),  we  must 
consider  what  log  ^  —  -  becomes  when  £  is  changed  into  t£. 

If  we  put    j  =  z  =  tan  6,     we  have 

.      i£  +  1      .      1  -  iz      .      cos  0  -  t  sin  0 
log  -J  —  -  =  log  -  -  =  log  -  —      —  -  =  -  2i9. 
0  £  -  1        °  1  +  iz        °  cos  0  +  i  sm  0 

Hence, 

and 

iP»(i?)  log 

also, 

PwC 

Accordingly,  by  (33), 


but     £„(£)  =  tn+1QM(t^),     and     i2n+4  =  (-  1)M  ;     and  therefore 

-  &c 
(53) 


an-    -          p^  (?)  +  }  P(IJ(?)  -  &c.  . 


56  Spherical  and  Ellipsoidal  Harmonics. 

164.  Analogues    of  Tesseral    Harmonics.  —  When 
we  put  t%  for  £  in   Tnl(K),  we  get 


and  we  may  write 

tns(Z)  =  (?  + 
Also,  we  may  write 

^-(P  +  lfD-fcK);  (55) 

whence  VM(&)  =  r^i^f?).  (56) 

Another  form  of  un»(Z)  is  obtained  from  (37)  from  which, 
by  means  of  (56J,  we  have 


whence 


_ 

(57) 

165.  Expression  for  Potentials.—  If  Fand  V  denote 
the  potentials  inside  and  outside  an  oblate  ellipsoid  of  revolu- 
tion, due  to  a  distribution  of  mass  on  its  surface,  we  may 
write 


(58) 


(59) 


Surface  Distribution  corresponding  to  Potential          57 

It  is  plain  from  what  precedes  that  Fand  V  satisfy  each 
Laplace's  equation,  that  Fis  finite  when  £  =  0,  and  V  is  zero 
when  £  =  oo  ,  and  that  V  and  V  are  identical  at  the  surface 
of  the  ellipsoid.  Hence  they  satisfy  all  the  conditions 
required. 

166.  Surface  Distribution  corresponding  to 
Potential. — Here  we  may  proceed  as  in  Art.  160.  If  the 
internal  and  external  potentials  V  and  V  be  given  by  the 
equations 


(60) 


and  dsi  be  an  element  of  the  normal  to  the  ellipsoid, 

\d\ 
**-—'• 

but  in  this  case,  by  Art.  98,  we  have     X2  =  A-3(£2  +  1),     and 
therefore 


P 

Accordingly,  as  in  Art.  160,  we  get 


and 

Ap 


- 


(61) 


"\yhen  the  density  of  the  surface  distribution  is  given, 
the  potentials  may  be  determined  in  a  manner  similar  to 
that  described  in  Art.  160. 


58  Spherical  and  Ellipsoidal  Harmonics. 

167.   Potentials    of    Homoeoid    and     Focaloid.  — 

These  may  be  obtained  from  (60)  and  (61)  iu  a  manner 
similar  to  that  employed  in  Art.  161  ;  but  if  the  expressions 
given  by  (44)  and  (46)  are  already  known,  we  can  get  from 
them  the  corresponding  expressions  for  an  oblate  ellipsoid. 

Putting  i£  for  £  in  (44),  we  get 


Hence  we  may  conclude  that  P"',  the  potential  of  an  oblate 
homceoid  of  revolution,  is  given  by  the  equation 

F/=fta'rl£'  (62) 

It  is  easy  to  see  that  this  expression  for  V  must   be 
correct,  since  it  satisfies  Laplace's  equation,  vanishes  at  oo  , 

is  constant  at  the  surface,  and  tends  towards  the  value  —  ; 

at  points  very  distant   from  the   centre  when  r  tends  to 
become  equal  to  k£. 

To  get  the  potential  of  a  focaloid  in  external  space,  we 
may  put  t£  for  £  in  (46),  and  we  get 


since    i  =  t4,    and    t2  =  -  1,    this  may  be  written 


Hence  we  may  put 


(63) 


Potentials  of  Homwoid  and  Focaloid.  59 

This  expression  for  V  satisfies  Laplace's  equation,  vanishes 
at  infinity,  and  at  points  very  distant  from  the  centre  tends 

towards  the  value  — ;  but  to  prove  that  it  satisfies  all  the  con- 
ditions of  the  question,  we  must  show  that  the  corresponding 

distribution  of  mass  varies  as    -  • 

P 

If  the  external  potential  Vf  be  given  by  (63),  the  internal 
potential  F",  due  to  the  surface-distribution  producing  V, 
is  given  by  the  equation 


(64) 

since  this  expression  for  V  satisfies  Laplace's  equation, 
remains  finite  inside  the  ellipsoid,  and  is  equal  to  V  at  the 
surface.  We  have,  then, 


_dV  _ dT 


(65) 
Differentiating  and  reducing,  it  is  easy  to  see  that 


Hence, 
' 


60  Spherical  and  Ellipsoidal  Harmonics. 

and  at  the  surface  we  have 

dV     dV     M        £a  +  g2 


p~ 


where  (7  denotes  a  constant. 

C1      1 

Accordingly   a  =   .  ^  .,  -,    and  therefore  the  distribution 
47T&  C0  ;? 

of  mass  producing  the  potential  is  fooaloidal. 


SECTION  III.  —  Ellipsoids  in  General. 

168.  Ellipsoidal  Harmonics.—  When  the  surface,  at 
which  the  potential  or  mass-distribution  is  given,  is  an 
ellipsoid  not  of  revolution,  the  preceding  methods  are  inap- 
plicable. The  most  general  method  of  determining  solutions 
of  Laplace's  equation  which  can  be  made  use  of  in  questions 
of  this  kind  depends  on  the  employment  of  functions  called 
ellipsoidal  harmonics. 

We  have  seen,  Art.  92,  that  if  X,  /«,  v  be  the  primary 
semi-axes  of  the  three  confocal  quadrics  passing  through  a 
point,  Laplace's  equation  may  be  written  in  the  form 

o*-*S?  +  <v-oy+e»-*>J£-*  a) 

where  a,  j3,  y  are  given  by  (17),  Art.  92.  If  a,  b,  c  denote 
the  semi-axes  of  an  ellipsoid  of  the  confocal  system,  we  may 
change  the  variables  by  assuming 


If  we  put      X  =  (a2  +  £)*  (ft2  +  £)*  (<*  +  £)*,     by  (17),  Art,  92, 
we  have 

d_=d\d%    d__<&  d_ 
da      da  d\  dt,       k   d£' 


Ellipsoidal  Harmonics.  61 

If  we  assume 

D  =  («'  +  n)*  (&2  +  ,)*  (c2  +  i,)*       3  =  («*  +  0*  (&*  +  £)*  ('*  +  0*, 
in  like  manner  we  get 

rf  2§)y/ri    rf  rf_=23^ 

rf/3  A        rfi,'       dy      /r   ^' 

and  Laplace's  equation  becomes 


(4) 

Following  the  analogy  suggested  by  the  methods  em- 
ployed in  the  case  of  ellipsoids  of  revolution,  we  may 
suppose  V  to  be  the  product  of  E,  a  function  of  £,  and  of 
H  a  function  of  r\  and  H'  a  function  of  £.  If  these  functions 
be  such  that 


and  H'-KH-^J?',  (5) 


where  m  and  y  are  disposable  constants  ;  we  may  put 
V  =  CEHH',  where  C  is  an  arbitrary  constant,  and  we 
have 


rr-  A  f(i-Q(« 

where  A  denotes  the  other  factor  of  V2  F",  since  the  expression 
inside  the  bracket  vanishes  identically. 

We  have  now  to  find  forms  of  the  functions  E,  H,  and 
H  which  will  satisfy  (5). 

If  we  suppose  E  to  be  a  rational  and  integral  function 
of  £,  we  may  put 

E  -  |»  +    l$«-i  +  ....+  p.. 


62  Spherical  and  Ellipsoidal  Harmonics. 

Operating  on  £n,  we  get 


g)  +  (fr+  £)(*  +  0  +  (c*  +  £)(«' 


+  «  (n  -  |)(W  +  6V  +  cV) 


gn 


Hence,  in  order  that 


we  must  have  the  series  of   «  +  2    equations 

n  (n  +  J)  =  m,       (n  -  1)  (n  -  £)  />i  +  n2  (a2  +  i2  +  c2)  =/  i-  »np,, 


w  («  -  i)  (a'J2  +  6V  +  cV)  +  (M  -  I)2  (a2  +  62  + 

+  («  -  2)  (w  -  1);;,  -  jpl  +  mp9,     &c., 


The  first  of  these  determines  m,  the  second  pi  as  a  linear 
function  of/.  By  substituting  this  value  of  pi  in  the  third, 
p-t  is  determined  as  a  quadratic  function  of  /,  and  so  on. 
Thus,  finally,  an  equation  of  the  degree  n  +  I  is  obtained 
to  determine/.  Each  root  of  this  equation  corresponds  to  u 
set  of  values  of  pl}  ;>2,  &c.,  which  furnishes  a  function  of  the 
required  form  for  E.  There  are  thus  n  +  1  functions  of  the 
degree  n  in  £  which  are  of  the  required  form.  It  is  plain 
that  £  is  of  the  second  degree  in  the  coordinates  x,  y,  2. 
Hence  the  forms  of  V  corresponding  to  those  found  for  E 
must  be  of  even  degree  in  each  of  the  coordinates  x,  y,  z. 
To  determine  forms  of  odd  degree  in  these  coordinates,  we 
are  guided  by  the  formulae  for  expressing  the  Cartesian  in 
terms  of  the  elliptic  coordinates  of  a  point. 


Ellipsoidal  Harmonics. 
In  fact  (Salmon's  Geometry  of  Three  Dimensions], 

.r2 


(6) 


If  we  consider  only  the  factor  containing  £,  we  see  that  x 
corresponds  to 


v/V  +  £,     y  to  v62  +  £,      and     %  to 
and  we  are  thus  led  to  consider  whether 


and 


where  fij  is  a  rational  and  integral  function  of  £,  are  possible 
forms  of  E. 

Operating  on     v/«2  +  £  fw,     we  get 


'    (7) 


[nV  +  (n  +  ^)2  (62  +  c2)]|n  +  [»  (M  -  |)  a2 
N  (»  +  i)  6V]  C"-1  +  n(w  -  l)«2iV5n-8} 


Hence,  we  see  that  if     E  =  -y/V  +  ^  Sn,     where  Kn  is  a 
rational  and  integral  function  of  £  of  the  degree  n,  we  have 


and  therefore,  that  by  properly  determining  m,y,  and  the 
coefficients  in  !En,  we  can  make 


64  Spherical  and  Ellipsoidal  Harmonics. 

It  is  easy  to  see  that  the  final  equation  for  determining  j 
is  of  the  degree    n  +  1. 

If  we  operate  on  the  functions 


we  find  that 

~Yj{(«'+ 

+  [(« 

+  n  (n  +  J)  («2  +  &2K]  I"'1  +  w  (n  - 


(8) 
and  that 


(9) 


x  (n  + 

Hence  we  conclude  that 


and  that 


and,  accordingly,  that   */{(a*+  ^)(62+  |)!^n    and  3Efi»  are 
possible  forms  of  E. 

If  J£  be  of  the  degree  v  in  ^,  and  v  be  an  integer,  the 
forms  we  have  found  for  E  are 


We  have  found  also  that  there  are  v  +  1  different  functions 
of  the  first  type,  and  v  of  each  of  the  others  ;  so  that  there 
are  4v  +  1  in  all. 


Ellipsoidal  Harmonics  which  vanish  at  Infinity.          65 

If     v  =  n  +  |,     where  n  is  an  integer,  the  forms  found 
for  E  are 


Also,  there  are  n  +  1  functions  of  each  of  the  first  three 
types,  and  n  of  the  fourth,  so  that  there  are  4n  +  3  ;  that  is, 
4v  +  1,  in  all. 

Hence,  in  any  case,  there  are  4v  +  1  determinable  func- 
tions of  £  of  the  degree  v,  any  one  of  which  may  be  taken 
for  E  in  order  to  satisfy  (5). 

It  is  plain  that  if  H  be  the  same  function  of  rj,  and  Hf 
of  £,  as  E  is  of  £,  the  product  CEHH',  where  C  is  an 
arbitrary  constant,  will  then  satisfy  Laplace's  equation. 

169.  Ellipsoidal  Harmonics  which  vanish  at 
Infinity.  —  The  functions  considered  in  the  preceding 
Article  do  not  vanish  at  infinity,  and  are  therefore  unfit  to 
represent  the  potential  of  a  finite  mass  in  space  outside  itself. 
The  form  of  the  differential  equation  for  E  enables  us, 
however,  to  obtain  another  function  which  will  fulfil  this 
condition. 

In  fact,  if 


we  have 


y  = 


but,  as  was  shown  in  Art.  156,  by  assuming    y  =  3/1  w,    if  y^ 
be  a  solution  of  the  equation 

d?y  dy      ,. 

—  *-  +  Zi  -/-  +  X2y  =  0, 

dxz  dx 

then 

is  also  a  solution. 


66  Spherical  and  Ellipsoidal  Harmonics. 

In  the  present  case,    fXidat**  log  £ ;    and,  therefore,  if  E 
be  a  solution  of  (10),  so  also  is 

CE 


If  now  we  take  for  E  one  of  the  forms  found  in  the  last 
Article,  by  writing  E  as  the  product  of  £"  and  a  series  of 
descending  powers  of  £,  it  is  plain  that 


vanishes  when  f  is  infinite. 

Hence  we  see  that,  if  V  denote  the  potential  inside  an 
ellipsoid,  whose  semi-axes  are  a,  b,  c,  of  a  distribution  of  mass 
on  its  surface,  and  V  the  potential  of  the  same  distribution  in 
external  space,  and  if  V  =  CEHH',  then 


V  =  C'EHH 

where 

C" 


,r  * 

Jl  *tf" 

r  #    c 

J.CT    a 


170.  Ellipsoidal  Harmonics  expressed  as  func- 
tions of  Cartesian  Coordinates. — If  Bn  be  a  rational 
and  integral  function  of  £  whose  factors  are  £  -  alt  £  -  a2, 
£  -  an,  and  E  =  £„,  then 


GEEK-  («'+  ai)(&'+  ai) (c»+  ai)f 


Z      -1 


*'     -1 


+  as      c*  -I-  a, 


(11) 


Functions  of  Cartesian  Coordinates.  67 

For  the  expression 


vanishes  when  u  =  £,  or  u  =  rj,  or  u  =  £,  where  £,  ij,  £ 
are  the  elliptic  coordinates  of  the  point  whose  Cartesian 
coordinates  are  x,  y,  z. 

Hence,  whatever  be  u,  we  have 


-JT,  (5  -«)(,-«)({:-«), 

and  therefore, 


-JT.CS-aOdi-  «,)(£-  a,), 

where   JTi    and   ^2   denote   quantities   independent    of   the 
coordinates. 

Hence,    if   we   denote   the   right-hand   member   of   the 
equation  (11)  by  &,  we  have 


x  (£-a,)(£-a2)...  (£-«„) 

By  using  the  expressions  for  x,  //,  and  s  given  by  (6)  we 
find,  in  like  manner,  that  when 

~       It* -*»(*#  I'     (12) 

=  V/K«2  +  £)^2+E)}#n  | 

>,    (13) 
(14) 


(a2  -  bt 

We  have  seen  that  there  are  4v  +  1  ellipsoidal  har- 
monics of  degree  v  in  £,  that  is,  of  degree  2v  in  Cartesian 
coordinates. 

F2 


68  Spherical  and  Ellipsoidal  Harmonics. 

A  rational  and  integral  function  of  x,  y,  2,  of  the 
degree  i,  contains 

(i  +  1)  (i  +  2)  (*'  f  3) 

i  -  '  v         /v  -  -  constants  ; 

D 

but  if  it  satisfies  Laplace's  equation,  these  constants  must 
satisfy 

(t-l)i(*+l) 

-*-^~     -'equations, 

and  therefore  such  a  function  contains  only  («  +  I)2  indepen- 
dent constants.  Now,  if  we  take  all  the  different  ellipsoidal 
harmonics  from  the  degree  0  up  to  the  degree  i  in  x,  y,  2, 
or  \i  in  £,  we  have  1  +  3  +  5  .  .  .  .  +  2i  +  1  in  all  ;  the  sum 
of  this  series  is  (t  +  I)2. 

Hence,  as  each  harmonic  may  be  multiplied  by  an 
arbitrary  constant,  we  can  express  any  rational  and  integral 
function  of  z,  y,  2  of  the  degree  *,  which  satisfies  Laplace's 
equation,  by  a  series  of  ellipsoidal  harmonics,  whose  degrees 
in  x,  y,  2  range  from  i  to  0. 

At  the  surface  of  an  ellipsoid  of  the  confocal  system  any 
rational  and  integral  function  of  x,  y,  z  can  be  expressed  as 
a  series  of  ellipsoidal  harmonics. 

For,  if  a,  b,  c  be  the  semi-axes  of  the  ellipsoid,  at  its 
surface 


and  therefore,  by  multiplication,  the  degree  of  any  function 
of  x,  yt  2  can  be  increased  by  2  without  altering  its  value. 
Hence  a  rational  and  integral  function  of  the  degree  i  can 
be  reduced  to  two  homogeneous  functions  of  the  degrees  i 

and  i  -  1.     Of  these,  the  first  contains     (J.+  1K*'+2)     inde_ 

2 

pendent  constants,  and  the  second  *  (*  *  ^  .      Hence  the  two 

together  contain  (t  +  I)2  independent  constants,  and  can 
therefore  be  expressed  as  a  series  of  ellipsoidal  harmonics. 


Surface  Integral  of  Product  of  Harmonics.  69 

171.  Surface  Integral  of  Product  of  Harmonics. — 

If  K:  =  E.H.H',,  and  F2  =  E,H,H\,  and  8  and  S' 
denote  two  confocal  ellipsoids  of  the  system,  whose  normals 
drawn  into  the  space  between  them  are  v  and  v',  by  Green's 
theorem,  we  have 


also     dv  =  £- ,     where  p  is  the  central  perpendicular  on  the 
tangent  plane  to  S,  and     dv  =  -    -?,      and  therefore 


that  is, 


At  corresponding  points  on  the  surfaces  S  and  S'  the 
coordinates  TJ  and  £  are  the  same,  and  therefore,  so  also  are 
the  values  of  Hly  H\,  Hz,  H\.  Also,  by  Ex.  7,  Art.  90, 
the  volume  elements  pd8  and  p'dS'  are  proportional  to  the 
products  of  the  semi-axes  of  S  and  $',  that  is,  to  X  and  £'. 

7  Tjl 

Hence,  as  E  and  -&-  are  constant  over  the  surface  S,  we  have 
at, 


If  we  equate  to  zero  the  first  factor  of  the  left-hand  side 
of  this  equation,  we  get 


70  Spherical  and  Ellipsoidal  Harmonics. 

Since  one  surface  may  be  taken  as  fixed  and  the  other  as 
variable,  this  equation  is  equivalent  to 

£#i2  -=  ( -jr  )  =  constant  =  C, 

whence  E*  =  CEl  j^-2  +  C'E,. 

Accordingly,  either  Ez  and  E^  differ  only  by  a  constant 
factor,  or  E*  is  the  external  harmonic  corresponding  to  the 
internal  JSi.  In  either  case  Hi  is  the  same  as  H2,  and  H\ 
as  -Z7'2.  If  we  reject  the  alternatives  considered  above,  we 
must  have 

and  therefore, 

\V\VzpdS  =  0. 

Hence  we  conclude  that  the  surface  integral  of  the  pro- 
duct of  two  ellipsoidal  harmonics  and  the  central  perpendicular 
on  the  tangent  plane,  taken  over  an  ellipsoid  of  the  confocal 
system,  is  zero,  unless  the  two  harmonics  have  a  constant  ratio 
to  each  other,  or  be  a  corresponding  pair  of  harmonics,  one 
internal  and  the  other  external. 

172.  Identity   of  Terms   in   equal   Series.—//*  two 

series  of  internal  or  of  external  harmonics  be  equal  to  each 

other,  each  harmonic   of  one  series  must  be  identical  with  a 

corresponding  harmonic  of  the  other. 

To  prove  this,  let  the  series 

Fo  +  F,  +  F2 .  .  .  Vn  =  U0  +  ZTi  .  .  .  +  Un ; 

multiply  each  side  of  this  equation  by  7mpdS,  and  integrate 
over  the  surface  S,  then  all  the  integrals  on  the  left-hand 
side  vanish  except  J  Vm2pdS,  and  on  the  right-hand  side 
they  all  vanish,  unless  Um  =  CVm,  in  which  case  we  have 

\UmVmPdS=  C\Vn*pdS. 

Hence  0=1,  and  a  harmonic  of  the  right-hand  series  is 
identical  with  F. 


Density  of  Surface  Distribution.  71 

If  two  series  of  harmonics  be  equal  throughout  the  whole 
of  the  space  inside  or  outside  an  ellipsoid,  both  series  must 
be  composed  of  harmonics  of  the  same  kind,  either  internal 
or  external,  since  an  internal  harmonic  becomes  infinite  in 
external  space  at  an  infinite  distance  from  the  centre,  and 
the  differential  coefficient  of  an  external  harmonic  becomes 
infinite  at  the  focal  ellipse  in  the  plane  of  xy. 

It  is  easy  to  show  by  multiplication  and  integration  over 
the  surface  8  that,  if  two  series  of  harmonics  be  equal  at  the 
surface  of  the  ellipsoid  S  whose  semi-axes  are  a,  b,  c,  and  one 
series  be  composed  of  internal  harmonics,  the  other  of  external ; 
then,  if  a  term  Vm  of  the  first  series  be  given  by  the  equation 

Vm  =  EmHmH'm, 
there  must  be  a  term  Um  in  the  second  such  that 


Um  = 
where 


•r 


3EA 


173.  Density  of  Surface  Distribution  producing 
given  Potential.  —  If  V  denote  the  potential  inside  the 
ellipsoid  a,  b,  c  of  a  distribution  of  mass  on  its  surface,  and 
V  the  potential  in  external  space  of  the  same  distribution, 
and  if 


we  have  seen,  Art.  169,  that 


In  this  case,  if  a  denote  the  density  of  the  distribution. 
we  have 

dV     dV 

—  +  -  —  r  +  47r<7  =  0  ; 
dv       dv 

but  dv'  =       y     dv  =  ~' 


72  Spherical  and  Ellipsoidal  Harmonics. 

whence 

2™  =  dv  _  d_r 


that  is, 


If  the  potential  due  to  the  surface  distribution  whose 
density  is  a-  be  the  sum  of  a  number  of  harmonics  F0,  Fi,  F2, 
&c.,  it  may  be  shown  in  a  similar  manner  that 


?-.  -  0.  +        .  JJT,  +         -  JTJT.  +  &o.,     (16) 

^  (A  i)0  (/i»)0 

where 

"  "  &c. 


When  o-  is  assigned,  (16)  enables  us  to  determine  the 
functions  £Tj,  H\y  &c.,  and  from  thence  Fi,  &c. 

174.  Potential  of  Homoeold.  —  As  an  example  of  the 
mode  of  procedure  described  in  the  preceding  article,  we 
may  find  the  potential  of  a  homoaoid.  Here  u  varies  as  p, 


and  -  is  constant,  whence 
P 


To  determine  C0  we  have 

—  =  2 )  —  =  -  ^— ° 
dv'  d%  3E0 

Hence,  — — -  $pdS  =  fNdS 

where  M  is  the  total  mass  of  the  homcaoid,  but   fpdS  =  4ir«bc, 


Ellipsoidal  Harmonics  of  the  Second  Degree.  73 

and  therefore  2(70=  M\  accordingly,  F',  the  potential  of  the 
homceoid  in  external  space,  is  given  by  the  equation* 


This  agrees  with  the  result  found  in  Ex.  3,  Art.  75. 

175.  Ellipsoidal  Harmonics  of  the  Second  Degree 
in  the  Coordinates.  —  The  forms  of  E  which  correspond  to 
functions  of  the  second  degree  in  the  coordinates  are 


and  ((•  -  a). 

There  are  two  functions  of  the  last  form,    f  -  a\,    and 
£  -  a2.     We  proceed  to  determine  the  values  of  eti  and  a2. 
By  (5),  Art.  168,  we  have 


=  |  f  +  (a2  +  b*  +  c2)  ^  +  i-  («8 
whence 


n  =  -|,    j  -  ma  =  a?  +  b~  +  c2,     -  ja  =  |  (a2b*  +  bzcz  +  c2a2). 

Eliminating  m  and/,  \ve  obtain 

3a2  +  2(a2  +  bz  +  c2)a  +  a262  +  62c2  +  c2^  =  0.       (17) 
Hence, 

(a^+c)+v("T  }  i 


74 


Spherical  and  Ellipsoidal  Harmonics. 


176.  Reduction  of  Solid  Harmonic  of  the  Second 
Degree  to  Ellipsoidal  Harmonics. — The  general  form 
of  a  solid  harmonic  of  the  second  degree  is 


rhere 


0. 


As  regards  the  terms  containing  products  of  the  coordi- 
nates, we  have  only  to  substitute  for  each  product  its  value 
in  terms  of  f,  »»,  and  £.  Thus,  2f\yz  becomes 


and  the  remaining  two  products  are  reduced  to  expressions  of 
a  similar  kind. 

We  may  next  assume 


where  a±  and  at  have  the  values  given  by  (18).     Jn  this 
manner  we  get 

«!«•  +  drf  +  a3s2  =  C8  +  Ci  (a2  +  a,)(68  +  a,)(c2  +  a 


«2  4  a, 


i    '   Cs  +  a,          ) 
2  4  o,) 

«- 


Hence  we  have 


CM&2  -fa,)  (c2  +«,)+  (73(62 

4-  ai)(rt2  +  a,)  +  Ca(c*  4-  a,)(a»  +  o,). 


(19) 


Reduction  of  Solid  Harmonics.  75 

In  virtue  of  equation  (18),  which  determines  a:  and  a2, 
and  of  the  relation  between  «i,  «2,  and  a3,  the  values  of  <7i 
and  (72,  found  from  (19),  satisfy  the  equation 

«3  =  Ci  (a2  +  01)  (b*  +  ai)  +  C2(a2  +  03)  (b2  +  a2). 
From  the  last  two  equations  (19),  we  find 

„      (iiaz-chbz  +  (a\  -  fl2)a2       ~      di*  -      *          - 

I  =     2z  '         Z  = 


(20) 

At  the  surface  of  the  ellipsoid  a,  b,  c,  the  quadratic 
function  a\x*  +  (hy2  +  a3zz  can  be  reduced  to  ellipsoidal 
harmonics,  whatever  be  the  values  of  a\,  aZy  and  a3.  For, 
in  this  case,  we  have 


and  therefore  we  may  substitute  for  the  given  function  the 
expression 


We  can  then  determine  e  so  as  to  satisfy  the  equation 


and  putting    al  +  —    for  «i ,  and    «z  +  n     for  tf2,  proceed  in 

the  same  manner  as  before.  In  this  case,  the  right-hand 
side  of  the  first  of  the  equations  (19)  is  not  zero  but  -  e, 
so  that 

C0  =  <?,  («2  +  ai)(~j*  +  ai)(6-2  +  o,)  +  C7,(a*  +  a8)(6s  4  a2)(c2  +  02)  -  e. 


76  Spherical  and  Ellipsoidal  Harmonics. 

177.  Potential  of  a  Focalold.— We  have  seen, 
Art.  83,  that,  for  a  focaloid  distribution  of  mass,  the  surface 
density  a  is  given  by  the  equation 

2K 

47HT    =    , 

P 

where 


the  density  of  the  solid  ellipsoid  of  equal  mass  being  denoted 
by  p.  By  Art.  173,  the  potential  £7 of  the  focaloid  in  internal 
space  is  given  then  by  a  series  of  the  form 

°J0   *  J0  Eft  Jo  E& 

provided  that 


2irabc     _  Kobe      K 
~~  " 


It  is  plain  that  an  expression  of  the  form 

A0  +  A^ri  -  o,)(^  -  o.)  +  Ai(*i  -  a»)(£  -  a2) 


TS~ 

can  be  made  identical  with    —  ij£    by  suitably  determining 

the  constants  A0,  A\>  and  At.  To  determine  these  constants 
is  unnecessary  for  our  present  purpose  ;  but  if  we  proceed  to 
do  so,  we  shall  find 


Components  of  Attraction  of  Focaloid.  77 

By  substituting  the  equivalent  expressions  in  #,  y,  and  z 
for  the  functions 

(S-aOOt-o.XS-aO      and     (g  -  «,)(,  -  „,)  (£  -  «,), 
the  potential  Z7  becomes  of  the  form 


where  a0,  &o.,  are  constants. 

178.  Components  of  Attraction  of  Focaloid  and 
Homogeneous  Ellipsoid.  —  From  the  form  of  £7  it  follows 
that  the  components  of  force  in  internal  space  due  to  a 
focaloid  are  - 


At  the  outside  of  the  surface  the  components  of  force 
become  px 

-   2«i  #  +  47TCT  —  ,    &C. 

Hence,  if  X,  T,  Z  denote  the  components  of  force  at  the 
outside  surface  of  the  focaloid, 


(21) 
By  Art.  83,  the  attraction  of  a  solid  homogeneous  ellipsoid 

in  external  space  is  the  same  as  that  of  a  focaloid  of  equal 

mass  on  its  surface. 

Hence,  if  X,  Y,  Z  denote  the  components  of  force  due 

to  a  solid  ellipsoid,  by  (21),  we  have  at  its  surface 

X-M,     Y-hy,    Z=b*z, 

where  ix,  b2,  and  b$  are  constants. 

Since  X  satisfies  Laplace's  equation   in  external  space, 
and  is  equal  to 


at  the  surface  of  the  ellipsoid,  we  must  have  at  any  point  in 
external  space 

X  =  ax\     „—•  —  TT  ,     where     a       ^-r-,  —  =r  =  bi  . 
Ji  *(«'  +  £)'  J0  £(«'  +  £) 


78  Spherical  and  Ellipsoidal  Harmonics. 

In  like  manner, 


Z  = 


At  a  great  distance  r  from  the  centre, 
towards  the  values 

MM  ,     M 

-x,     -y,     and     -«, 


,  and  Z  tend 


where  J/  denotes  the  mass  of  the  ellipsoid. 

If  we  expand  in  descending  powers  of  £  the  functions 
under  the  integral  sign  in  the  expressions  for  X,  F,  and  Z, 
and  integrate,  we  find  that  X  tends  towards  |  «#£"§,  and 
that  P  tends  towards  f/3y£~t,  and  Z  towards  f7z£-f. 

Hence  we  have    a  =  /3  =  7  =  fJ/,    and  we  get 


r  = 


Z-fJf.l     - 


(22) 


179.  Potential  of  Ellipsoid  in  External  Space.— 

If  V  denote  the  potential  of  the  ellipsoid  in  external  space, 

V  =  -  J  (Xdx  +  Tdy  +  Zdz)  +  constant. 
Integrating  by  parts,  we  find 


f dxx  r  —~- -  r  d^    {** 


where  in  the  second  integral  x  is  to  be  regarded  as  a  function 
of  £,  y,  and  s  ;  and  y  and  z  are  to  be  looked  upon  as  constant 
in  the  integration. 


Potential  of  Ellipsoid  in  its  Interior.  79 

Similar  results  hold  good  for  the  functions  contained  in  T 
and  Z.     Hence  we  have 


_  No  constant  is  to  be  added,  since  the  right-hand  side  of 
this  equation  vanishes  at  infinity.  The  three  integrations 
involved  in  the  last  integral  on  the  right-hand  side  afe  to  be 
performed  on  three  different  hypotheses;  but,  as 


we  have,  finally, 


(23) 

fUf  'eeflhf  this.r.esult  a£rees  with  (11),  Art.  87,  remembering 
t  that  equation  *,  y,  ,  are  not  regarded  as  functions  of  u. 

180.  Potential  of  Ellipsoid  in  its  Interior.— The 

-f  force  due  to  a  focaloid  at  i\ 


that  is,  if  we  put 


they  are  Ax,  By,  and  Gz. 


80  Spherical  and  Ellipsoidal  Harmonics. 

Hence,  at  any  point  inside  the  focaloid,  if  these  component^ 
be  denoted  by  X,  Y,  and  Z,  we  have 


For  these  expressions  satisfy  Laplace's  equation  throughout 
the  interior  of  the  focaloid,  and  take  the  proper  values  at  i$ 
inner  surface. 

Hence  the  potential   U  of  the  focaloid  is  given  by  the    1 
equation 

U=  - 

where  ^40  denotes  an  undetermined  constant. 

By  Art.  83,  if  F  denote  the  potential  of  the  ellipsoid 
inside  itself, 


Hence, 

V  =  K+  A,  -  \(Ax*  +  By* 


At  the  surface  of  the  ellipsoid,   V  =  V,  and  therefore, 
by  (23),  we  have 


accordingly, 

^  ^r  ^     2r  ^     .r_^_ 

-n-^^-^J.(l?Tp-'J.5r^ 

(24) 


Magnet  of  Finite  Dimensions.  81 


CHAPTER  IX. 


MAGNETIZKD    BODIES. 

SECTION  I. — Constitution  and  Action  of  Magnets. 

181.  Magnet  of  Finite  Dimensions. — A  magnetized 
body  is  composed  of  elements  each  of  which  is  a  magnetic 
particle  (Art.  17).  When  such  a  body  is  placed  in  a 
uniform  field  of  magnetic  force,  each  particle  is  acted  on 
by  a  couple,  and  the  resultant  of  all  these  couples  tends  to 
bring  the  body  into  a  position  in  which  a  certain  line  in  the 
body  is  in  the  direction  of  the  uniform  force.  When  the 
body  is  in  the  position  in  which  this  couple  is  the  greatest 
possible,  its  ratio  to  the  force  is  the  magnetic  moment  of  the 
body. 

If  a  body  be  composed  of  a  number  of  infinitely  thin 
parallel  bars,  magnetized  at  their  extremities  so  that  the 
pole  strength  of  each  bar  is  proportional  to  its  orthogonal 
section,  it  is  plain  that  the  magnetic  moment  of  the  body 
is  proportional  to  the  sum  of  the  products  obtained  by 
multiplying  the  length  of  each  bar  by  the  area  of  its 
orthogonal  section  —  in  other  words,  to  the  volume  of  the 
body.  Hence  we  may  assume  that  the  magnetic  moment 
of  an  element  of  a  magnetized  body  is  proportional  to  the 
volume  of  the  element,  and  we  may  denote  this  magnetic 
moment  by  the  expression  Id<&,  where  d<&  denotes  the 
volume  of  the  element,  and  /  the  intensity  of  magnetization. 
This  latter  is  defined  as  the  ratio  of  the  magnetic  moment  of 
the  element  to  its  volume.  Magnetization  is  a  directed  quantity, 
and  its  direction  is  that  of  the  parallel  bar  magnets  which 
are  regarded  as  composing  the  element  whose  magnetic  axis 
is  a  line  in  this  direction. 


82  Magnetized  Bodies. 

182.    Potential    of   Magnetized     Body.— By    (28), 
Art.  54,  the  potential  of  one  element  of  the  body  is 


If  s,  y,  2  denote  the  coordinates  of  the  element  ;  f  ,  TJ,  £  those 
of  the  point  at  which  the  potential  is  required  ;  A,  /u,  v  the 
direction-cosines  of  the  magnetic  axis  of  </@,  we  have 


/,  dr         dr         dr\ 

=  -(\-r  +  u-r  +  v—} 

\    dx     ^  dy        dz) 


The  quantities  7X,  7/u,  and  Iv  are  termed  the  components  of 
magnetization,  and  may  be  denoted  by  A,  £,  and  G.  If  V 
denote  the  potential  of  the  magnetized  body,  we  have,  then, 

.    (1) 

If  I,  mt  n  denote  the  direction-cosines  of  the  normal  to 
the  surface  S,  which  is  the  boundary  of  the  body,  we  get,  by 
integration, 

ff//  m^s       \\\(<*A      dB      <tC\d® 

V  -  \\(IA  +  mB  +  nC)  --        \-r  +  -5-  +  ^r)  —  • 
JJ  r        /  /  /  \  dm      dy       dz  J    r 

(2) 

Hence  the  potential  of  a  magnetized  body  is  equivalent 
to  that  of  a  volume-distribution,  throughout  the  space  occupied 
by  the  body,  of  mass  whose  density  is 


dx       dy 

together  with  a  distribution  on  the  surface  bounding  the 
body  whose  density  is 

IA  +  mB  +  nC. 


Poisson's  Equation.  83 

183.  Poisson's  Equation. — From  the  expression  for 
the  potential  given  by  (2)  we  have 


(3) 
dy       dz 


at  any  point  inside  the  body. 

In  space  outside  the  body  Laplace's  equation  obviously 
holds  good. 

184.  Examples    of   Magnetized    Bodies.  —  As   an 

example  of  a  magnetized  body,  we  may  take  a  sphere 
magnetized  in  a  uniform  direction  so  that  the  magneti- 
zation at  any  point  is  a  function  of  its  distance  from  the 
centre.  Here,  if  r'  denote  the  distance  from  the  centre  of 
any  point  of  the  sphere  whose  coordinates  are  x,  y,  z'  ; 
V  the  magnetic  potential  of  the  sphere  at  an  external  point 
whose  coordinates  are  x,  y,  z  ;  and  r  the  distance  between  the 
points  xyz  and  x'y'z',  we  have,  the  direction  of  magnetization 
being  parallel  to  x, 


where  X  denotes  the  component  of  force  due  to  a  sphere 
whose  density  at  any  point  is  /(/)     Hence 


where  «  denotes  the  radius  of  the  sphere,  and  therefore  the 
magnetic  action  of  the  sphere  at  an  external  point  is  the 
same  as  that  of  a  small  magnet  at  the  centre  whose  magnetic 
moment  is  expressed  by 

4ir 

If  the  magnetization  be  of  uniform  intensity  /,  the  magnetic 
moment  becomes 

47T/ 


G2 


84  Magnetized  Bodies. 

If  an  ellipsoid  be  uniformly  magnetized  in  the  direction 
of  its  longest  axis,  the  potential  F,  at  an  external  point  xyz, 
is  given  by  the  equation 


'(!)«„./'  [2-  jj 

ei\rj  dx]    r 


de 

where  X  denotes  the  component  of  force  of  a  solid  homo- 
geneous ellipsoid  whose  density  is  /.  Hence  by  (12),  Art.  87, 
we  have 


V  =  2irlabcx 


du 

\i  /  •       a»         (4) 


where  g  is  the  greatest  root  of  the  equation 


(See  Ex.  1,  Art.  52.) 

If  the  integral  in  (4)  be  denoted  by  £,  and  the  corre- 
sponding integrals  for  the  other  two  axes  by  §J  and  3»  it  is 
easy  to  see  that  the  potential  V  of  an  ellipsoid,  uniformly 
magnetized  in  a  direction  inclined  to  the  axes  at  angles 
whose  cosines  are  A,  /u,  v,  is  given  by  the  equation 

V  =  2;r  labc  (A.r£  +  py®  +  v*3)-  (5) 

From  (5)  we  can  obtain  the  components  of  the  magnetic 
force  exerted  by  the  ellipsoid  at  an  external  point.  By 
differentiation  we  have 


d»        -v       "*dp  W^TW^;' 

but 

^  _  1  rfy 

^  " 


Examples  of  Magnetized  Bodies.  85 

If  we  denote  the  semi-axes  of  the  ellipsoid  passing  through 
the  point  xyz  and  conf  ocal  with  the  given  ellipsoid  by  a',  b',  c', 
we  have 


Hence,  Up'  denote  the  central  perpendicular  on  the  tangent 
plane  to  the  ellipsoid  ab'c'  at  the  point  xyz,  we  have 


due 

Hence  ^ 

rfa? 

In  like  manner, 


rf#  rt3    3  c        flfo  ft 

accordingly,  by  substitution,  we  obtain 


a'b'c'      «'2  V  «*          b"        t 

If  TOJ,  w2,  t73,  and  5r  denote  the  angles  which  the  normal 
to  the  ellipsoid  a'b'c'  at  the  point  xyz  makes  with  the  axes, 
and  with  the  direction  of  magnetization,  we  have 

p'x  _ 

—ft  =  cos  OTU  &c. ; 
a 

and  cos  S  =  X  cos  OTJ  4-  n  cos  t<r2  +  v  cos  w3. 

Hence  we  obtain 

dV  4-trIfibc 

—  =  Zirlabc\£ -^rrr-  cos  S  cos  -ssl ; 

dx  ab  c 


86  Magnetized  Bodies. 

and,  since  the  components  of  magnetic  force  a,  /3,  y  are 

f?V 
expressed  by  --T»  &c->  we  have 


. ,  ,     COS  S  COS  OTi  - 

abc 


cos  3 


4irlabc         _,  o    r  j.     i' 

•v  =  —  777-7-  cos.31  cos  TOS  -  Zirlabc  1/3  . 
'          a  o  c 


(6) 


From  equations  (6)  it  appears  that  the  force  exerted  by 
the  magnetized  ellipsoid  abc  at  an  external  point  P  is  the 
resultant  of  two  forces  of  which  one  is  in  the  direction  of  the 
normal  at  P  to  the  ellipsoid  «'6Y,  and  is  expressed  by 


the  other  is  the  force  due  to  a  homogeneous  solid  ellipsoid, 
coinciding  with  abc,  at  the  point  Q  in  which  a  line  drawn 
from  the  centre  in  the  direction  of  the  magnetization  meets 
the  surface  of  the  ellipsoid  a'b'c',  the  density  of  the  solid 

ellipsoid,  supposed  attractive,  being  -^7,  where  M  denotes  the 
distance  of  Q  from  the  centre. 

185.  Potential  of  Magnetized  Body  expressed  as 
Sum  of  Force  Components.  —  Adopting  the  notation  of 
Art.  182,  we  have,  by  (1), 


V  =  -  —  (  ——  -  — 

~~~~"" 


Hence,  if  we  suppose  three  bodies  geometrically  identical 
with  the  magnetized  body,  and  having  for  densities  A,  B, 
and  (7,  the  magnetic  potential  is  equal  to  the  sum  of  the 
force  components  exercised  by  the  first  body  parallel  to  the 
axis  of  x,  by  the  second  parallel  to  the  axis  of  y,  and  by  the 
third  parallel  to  the  axis  of  z. 


Magnetic  Force.  87 

186.  Magnetic  Force.  —  The  differential  coefficients  of 
the  potential  with  their  signs  changed  are  termed  the  com- 
ponents of  magnetic  force.     Outside  the  magnetized  body 
these  are  the  actual  components  of  the  force  which  the  body 
would  exert  on  a  north  magnetic  pole  of  unit  intensity. 

Inside  the  body  the  actual  force  due  to  the  body  is 
indeterminate.  In  order  to  imagine  that  such  a  force  should 
act,  we  must  suppose  a  small  cavity  inside  the  body,  and,  in 
the  case  of  a  magnetized  body,  the  force  depends  on  the 
shape  of  this  cavity. 

The  components  of  the  magnetic  force  are  usually  denoted 
by  the  letters  a,  /3,  7. 

It  is  easy  to  see  that  the  normal  component  of  the 
magnetic  force  as  defined  above  is  not  continuous  when  we 
pass  from  the  outside  to  the  inside  of  the  magnetized  body. 
This  follows  from  the  consideration  that  the  normal  compo- 
nent of  that  part  of  the  force  due  to  the  surface  distribution 
I  A  +  mB  +  nC  is  diminished  by  4ir(lA  +  mB  +  nC). 

187.  Magnetic   Induction.  —  We  can  obtain  a  vector 
quantity  whose  components  satisfy  the  solenoidal  condition, 
and  whose  normal  component  at  the  boundary  of  the  magnet 
is  continuous,  by  adding  to  each  component  of  magnetic  force 
the  corresponding  component  of  magnetization  multiplied  by 
47r.     This  vector  quantity  is  termed  the  magnetic  induction, 
and  its  components  are  usually  denoted  by  the  letters  «,  b,  c. 
We  have,  then, 

(8) 


Outside  the  magnet   a  =  a,    b  =  |3,    c  =  y  ;    and 


Inside  the  magnet 

da      db      dc  .    fdA      dB      dC 

_++_  =  _  V2F+  4ir(-r-  +  -r-  + 
d%      dri      dZ,  \dx       dy 

and,  by  (3),  the  right-hand  member  of  this  equation  is  zero  ; 
accordingly,  a,  b,  and  c  always  fulfil  the  solenoidal  condition. 


88  Magnetized  Bodies. 

At  the  surface  bounding  the  magnet,  in  passing  from  a 
point  outside  to  a  point  inside,  la  +  m/3  +  ny  is  diminished 
by  4?r  (IA  +  tnJB  +  w<7)  ;  but  outside  the  surface  la  +  mb  +  nc 
is  the  same  as  la  +  m/3  +  My,  and  inside  the  former  exceeds 
the  latter  by  4*  (I  A  +  mB  +  nC). 

Hence,  in  passing  through  the  surface,  the  value  of 
la  +  mb  +  nc  is  unaltered. 

It  is  now  easy  to  see  that  the  surface  integral 

(fa  +  mb  +  nc)  dS 

taken  over  any  closed  surface  is  zero. 

If  the  surface  be  altogether  outside  or  altogether  inside 
the  magnetic  body,  this  follows  from  taking  the  volume 
integral  of 

da      db      dc 


If  the  surface  S  be  partly  outside  and  partly  inside  the 
magnet,  the  enclosed  volume  is  divided  into  two  parts  by 
the  intercepted  portion  of  the  surface  of  the  magnet.  Through 
each  of  these  parts  the  integration  may  be  effected,  and  in 
consequence  of  the  continuity  of  the  normal  component  of 
magnetic  induction,  the  two  surface  integrals  which  are  taken 
over  the  portion  of  the  magnet  surface  are  equal  in  magnitude 
and  opposite  in  algebraical  sign,  and  therefore  the  surface 
integral  of  induction  over  the  closed  surface  S  is  zero. 

188.  Magnetic  Force  and  Magnetic  Induction 
regarded  as  Forces.  —  If  we  imagine  a  small  cylindrical 
cavity  whose  axis  is  in  the  direction  of  magnetization,  and  a 
north  magnetic  pole  of  unit  intensity  placed  at  the  middle 
point  of  this  axis,  the  actual  force  acting  on  this  pole  is  the 
magnetic  force  when  the  cylinder  is  long  and  narrow,  and 
the  magnetic  induction  when  the  cylinder  is  short  and  broad. 

As  the  cavity  is  supposed  to  be  small,  the  removal  of  the 
volume  distribution  with  which  it  was  occupied  produces  no 
sensible  change  in  the  force  acting  on  the  magnet-pole,  and 
this  force  is  therefore  due  to  the  volume  distribution  through- 
out the  magnet,  the  surface  distribution  on  its  boundary,  and 
to  the  surface  distribution  on  the  surface  bounding  the  cavity. 


Energy  due  to  Magnet.  89 

In  the  case  of  a  cylinder  parallel  to  the  magnetization  axis, 
I  A  -f  mB  +  nC  is  zero  except  at  the  plane  ends,  where  it  is  -  / 
at  the  positive  end,  and  +  /  at  the  negative.  By  (3),  Art.  (14), 
the  force  due  to  the  surface-distribution  is,  therefore, 

<_rfi  c         \ 


in  the  direction  of  magnetization,  where  c  denotes  the  semi- 
axis  of  the  cylinder,  and  a  its  radius. 

When  c  is  large  compared  with  a,  this  expression  becomes 
zero  ;  and  when  a  is  large  compared  with  c  it  becomes  4-Tr/. 
Hence,  in  the  first  case,  the  components  of  the  total  force 
acting  on  the  magnet-pole  are  a,  /3,  y  ;  and  in  the  second 
/3  +  4irB,  y 


189.  Energy  due  to  Jlagnet.  —  When  a  magnet  is 
placed  in  an  independent  field  of  force,  if  V  denote  the 
potential  of  the  field  at  any  point  where  there  is  a  south 
pole  of  strength  2ft,  the  energy  due  to  the  presence  of  this 
pole  is  -WIV,  and  that  due  to  the  corresponding  north 
pole  is 


where  dh  is  the  axis  of  the  particle  whose  poles  are  9ft  and 
-  2ft.     Hence  the  energy  due  to  the  particle  is 


If  A,  n,  v  be  the  direction-cosines  of  dh,  we  have 
dV        dV        dV        dV 


also,    sffldh  =  Id&,    and  therefore 


^ 

dh  \      dx          dy 


90  Magnetized  Bodies. 

Consequently,  if  W  denote  the  energy  due  to  the  presence 
of  a  magnet  in  an  independent  field  of  force, 

where  A,  £,  C  denote  the  components  of  magnetization  of  the 
magnet  at  any  point  where  the  potential  of  the  field  is  V. 

190.  Energy  of  Magnetic  System.— When  the  field 
of  force  is  due  to  the  magnets  which  are  present,  it  is  plain 
that  if  the  magnetization  be  everywhere  increased  in  the 
same  ratio,  the  potential  is  likewise  increased  in  this  ratio. 
Hence,  by  reasoning  similar  to  that  employed  in  Art.  50,  we 
see  that,  if  JFdenote  the  energy  of  a  magnetic  system,  and  V 
its  potential  at  any  point,  we  have 


If  we  integrate  by  parts  the  expression  for   W  given 
by  (10),  we  get 


where  the  last  two  integrals  are  taken  throughout  the  whole 
of  space. 

191.    Vector    Potential  of  Magnetic   Induction.— 

"We  have  seen,  Art.  187,  that  a,  b,  c,  the  components  of  mag- 
netic induction,  fulfil  the  solenoidal  condition  throughout  the 
whole  of  space,  and  that  the  surface  integral  of  induction 
over  any  closed  surface  is  zero.  From  hence  it  follows  that 
this  surface  integral  has  the  same  value  for  any  two  surface 
sheets  having  a  common  boundary. 


Stokes' 8  Theorem.  91 

Hence  the  integral  of  induction  taken  over  a  surface- 
sheet  8  must  be  expressible  as  a  line  integral  taken  round 
the  curve  s  which  is  the  boundary  of  S.  We  have,  therefore, 
an  equation  of  the  form 


(la  +  mb  +  nc]  d8=\(F-  +  G^L+H- 
j\     ds          ds          ds 

The  directed  magnitude  of  which  F,  O,  H  are  the  components 
is  called  the  vector  potential  of  magnetic  induction. 

192.  Stokes's  Theorem. — If  u,  v,  w  denote  three  func- 
tions of  the  coordinates,  Stokes's  theorem  is  expressed  by  the 
equation 


ds         ds         ds 

where  S  is  a  surface-sheet,  and  s  the  curve  which  forms  its 
boundary. 

To  prove  this,  we  observe  that  the  terms  in  the  surface 
integral  which  contain  w  may  be  written 

(((dw      m  dw\  77CY  (((dw      m  dtv^ 

\\(Ty--<r*r8'  or  IK*"* 

In  this  double  integral  x  is  regarded  as  a  function  of  y  and  z 
given  by  the  equation  of  the  surface  S. 

If  -7-  w  denote  the  differential  coefficient  of  w  taken  on 
dy 

this  hypothesis,  we  have 

d          die      div  dx 
dy         dy      dx   dy ' 

but  the  differential  equation  of  the  surface  may  be  written 
Idx  +  m  dy  +  n  dz  =  0, 

j  ,,        „  dx         m 

and  therefore  —  =  -  —  • 

dy          I 


92  Magnetized  Bodies. 

d         dw     m  die 
Hence  -r-  M '  =  3 r  ~r-  > 

and  (  / ?w  -r- }  dS  =  \\  ~T~  w  dy  < 

If  the  terms  containing  u  and  v  in  the  double  integral  be 
treated  in  a  similar  manner,  we  obtain  the  right-hand  member 
of  (12).  If  the  axes  be  drawn  in  the  usual  manner  so  that 
counter-clockwise  rotations  round  x,  y,  and  z  bring  //  to  s, 
2  to  x,  and  x  to  y,  equation  (12)  shows  that  the  direction  of 
integration  round  s  is  counter-clockwise  as  viewed  from  the 
positive  end  of  the  normal  to  S. 

If  the  surface-sheet  S  be  contained  between  two  curves, 
the  surface  integral  is  equal  to  the  difference  between  two 
line  integrals. 

193.  Determination  of  Vector  Potential.— It  follows 
from  Stokes's  theorem  that  as  a  consequence  of  (12)  we  may 
assume 

dH     dG 


dF     dff 

=         --' 


_  dG     dF 
~       ~ 


(13) 


where  f,  i»,  £  denote  the  current  coordinates.  If  FI,  <?„  Hi 
be  three  functions  of  £,  »j,  £  satisfying  these  equations,  it  is 
plain  that  they  will  be  satisfied  also  by 


where  $  is  any  function  of  the  coordinates. 

We  see,  then,  that  equations  (13)  are  not  sufficient  to 
determine  F,  6,  and  H,  and  we  may  assume 

dF     dG     dH 


Determination  of  Vector  Potential. 


93 


From  (13)  we  have 
db      da       d*F       d2 


whence 


=  ^(^  +  ~  -f^l-V'tfj 
(15) 


Equation  (15)  is  similar  in  form  to  that  for  determining 
the  potential  of  an  attracting  mass.  Hence  apparently  we 
have 

H  =       ( V  --r]—> 

JJJ  \dj-       dy  J     r 

the  integral  being  taken  through  the  whole  of  the  magnetized 
body.  This  integral  is,  however,  indeterminate,  as  at  the 
surface  A,  B,  and  C  are  discontinuous,  and  their  differential 
coefficients  in  the  direction  of  the  normal  infinite. 

If  we  integrate  by  parts  inside  the  boundary  of  the 
magnet,  we  get  for  H  the  expression 


j( 


lB-mA}dS+\(A^-B^V- 
J  J  V     dy 


We  may  therefore  assume 


F  = 


G 


dz 


(16) 


provided  these  forms  satisfy  the  differential  equations  (13) 
and  (14). 


94  Magnetized  Bodies. 

It  is  easy  to  see  that  this  is  the  case,  for  since 
<fr         dr 


and  A,  B,  C  are  not  functions  of  £,  »j,  £,  we  have 
dH  'dQ 


5|J\     rfa?         ^          rfz/  r  J  r 

(17) 

but,  by  (1),  the  first  term  in  the  right-hand  member  of  (17) 
is  a,  and  in  space  outside  the  magnet  the  remaining  term  is 
zero,  and  inside  the  magnet,  when  £»}£  coincides  with  ,*y/s,  its 
value  is  4irA.  Hence  we  obtain 

dH     dG 

—  ---  ^  =  a  +  4irA  =  a.  (18) 

rfi!       rt£ 

»  J7I 

We  may  write   —    in  the  form 


d2    (C  7,         r/2    f^  M 
75J-    -  rf@  -  -77-^  —  a&8 ; 
/^rfnj  r  ^5J  r 


.       rfG'        ,   ^J3"  . 

and  expressing  —   and  —  r   in   a  similar  manner,  we  see 
Ctrl  f/t, 

that 

dF      dG       dH 


vanishes  identically. 


Vector  Potential  of  Magnetic  Particle.  95 

194.  Vector  Potential   of  Magnetic  Particle.  —  In 

the  case  of  a  magnetic  particle  equations  (16)  become 


where  20?  denotes  the  magnetic  moment  of  the  particle,  and 
\,  ju,  v  the  direction-cosines  of  its  axis. 

If  01}  Bz,  03  denote  the  direction-cosines  of  r,  we  have 

d_  1  =  g-g  =  03 

dz  r         r3        r2' 

whence 


but  ju6/3  -  vOz  =  siri  e  cos  &!, 

where  Si  denotes  the  angle  wliich  a  perpendicular  to  r  and 
the  magnetic  axis  makes  with  the  axis  of  z,  and  €  the  angle 
between  r  and  the  magnetic  axis.  Hence 

•          SO?  sin  £  9tt  sin  £  $?  sin  e 

.F  =  -  -  —  cos  $•,,     Gr  =  -  -2  —  cos  S-o,     //  =  --  -  —  cos  $3. 

Accordingly,  the  magnitude  of  the  vector  potential  of  a 
magnetic  particle  at  any  point  is  -  -  —  ,  and  its  direction 

is  perpendicular  to  the  axis  of  the  magnet  and  the  line  join- 
ing its  centre  to  the  point. 

If  rotations  from  x  to  ?/,  from  y  to  z,  and  from  z  to  x, 
be  counter-clockwise,  the  rotation  from  the  magnetic  axis  to 
radius  vector  is  counter-clockwise  as  viewed  from  the  positive 
end  of  the  vector  potential.  The  vector  potential  of  a  magnet 
of  finite  size  is  the  resultant  of  the  vector  potentials  of  the 
magnetic  particles  of  which  it  is  composed. 

195.  Magnetic  Moment  and  Axis  of  Magnet.  — 
The  potential  energy  of  a  magnet  plaoed  in  a  uniform  field 
of  force  is  determined  from  (9)  by  regarding  a,  /3,  7,  the 
components  of  force  in  the  field,  as  constants  ;  we  have  then 

(19) 


96  Magnetized  Bodies. 

If  we  assume 
J  Ad<&  =  Kl,    J  B<«5  =  Km,    J  CM®  =  7T«,     /*  +  m2  +  ««  =  1, 

then  /,  m,  n  are  the  direction-cosines  of  a  line,  and  we  have 
W  =  -  KH  cos  0,  (20) 

where  H  denotes  the  resultant  uniform  force,  and  6  the  angle 
between  its  direction  and  that  specified  by  /,  m,  n.  This 
latter  direction  is  fixed  in  the  magnet,  and  the  direction  of  H 
is  fixed  in  space.  Hence  the  magnet  is  acted  on  by  a  couple 

expressed  by  -  -^-,   that  is,  -  KH  sin  0,  which  tends   to 

diminish  0  and  make  the  line  I,  m,  n  coincide  with  the 
direction  of  H. 

Accordingly,  the  magnetic  moment  of  the  body,  Art.  181, 
is  expressed  by  K,  and  /,  m,  n  are  the  direction-cosines  of 
the  magnetic  axis. 

If  the  potential  of  a  magnet  be  expanded  in  a  series  of 
harmonics  so  that  at  an  external  point  P,  we  have 


where  r  denotes  the  distance  of  P  from  the  origin,  the  first 
term  ~  vanishes,  since  the  total  magnetic  mass  is  zero,  and 

Y. 

in  the  second  term,  —  ,  the  spherical  harmonic  Yl  is  -  Kco&  0. 

This  is  easily  seen  if  we  consider  the  expression  for  the 
potential  energy  W  due  to  the  presence  of  a  mass  at  the 
point  P.  In  this  case  W  is  given  by  the  equation 


If  we  now  suppose  ;•  to  become  infinite,  but  ^  to  be  finite 

and  equal  to  H,  we  have  W  =  H  F,,  but  as  the  energy  is 
that  due  to  the  presence  of  the  magnet  in  a  uniform  field 
of  force  whose  intensity  is  H,  we  have  W  =  -  HK  cos  8. 

Hence  Y,  =  -  K  cos  8. 


Magnetic  Shell.  97 

196.  Magnetic  Shell.— A  magnetic  shell  may  be  defined 
as  a  surface  magnetized  at  each  point  in  the  direction  of  the  normal. 

In  this  case,  the  expression  for  the  magnetic  moment  of 
an  element  of  the  body  is  of  the  form  I dv  dS,  where  dS 
denotes  an  element  of  the  surface,  and  dv  an  element  of  it  s 
normal.  The  total  magnetic  moment  of  such  a  body  is  in 
general  infinitely  small ;  but  if  we  suppose  Idv  finite,  this 
moment  becomes  finite.  The  quantity  Idv  is  termed  the 
strength  of  the  magnetic  shell,  and  may  be  defined  as  the  ratio 
of  the  magnetic  moment  of  an  element  of  the  surface  to  its 
area.  If  we  put  Idv  =  J,  then  J  denotes  the  strength  of  the 
magnetic  shell. 

When  the  strength  of  a  magnetic  shell  is  the  same  at  all 
its  points,  J  is  constant,  and  the  shell  is  said  to  be  uniform. 

197.  Potential  of  Uniform  magnetic  Shell.— If  r 

denote  the  distance  of  an  external  point  P  from  any  point  Q 
of  the  shell,  by  (28),  Art.  54,  the  potential  at  P  of  the 

element  of  the  shell  at  Q  is  — —  cos  e,  where  €  denotes  the 

angle  between  r  and  the  normal  at  Q. 

But  if  dQ,  denotes  the  solid  angle  which  dS  subtends 
at  P,  we  have  r*dQ,  =  dS  cos  e.  Hence 


and  the  potential  Fof  the  shell  at  P  is  given  by  the  equation 
V  =  <7Q,  (21) 

where  Q  denotes  the  solid  angle  subtended  by  the  shell  at  P. 

This  potential  differs  in  character  from  those  with  which 
we  have  hitherto  been  concerned,  as  it  is  discontinuous  at  the 
surface  of  the  shell. 

If  we  regard  as  positive  the  side  of  the  shell  at  which  the 
north  poles  of  the  elements  are  situated,  or  towards  which 
they  point,  the  potential  at  the  positive  side  exceeds  that  at 
the  negative  by  4iirJ. 


98  Magnetized  Bodies. 

The  solid  angle  subtended  at  P  by  the  shell  is  in  general 
the  same  as  that  subtended  by  its  bounding  curve,  but  the 
two  solid  angles  differ  in  some  important  respects. 

The  solid  angle  subtended  by  the  curve  is  continuous 
except  at  the  curve  itself,  and  in  a  circuit  embracing  the 
curve,  by  passing  through  its  interior,  is  cyclic.  Each  time 
the  circuit  is  completed  the  value  of  the  solid  angle  is 
increased  by  4ir. 

These  characteristics  of  the  two  solid  angles  we  shall  now 
consider. 

The  solid  angle  subtended  by  the  shell  at  P  with  its  sign 
reversed  is  the  same  as  Gauss's  integral  of  the  normal  com- 
ponent of  force  emanating  from  a  unit  mass  at  P.  The  sign 
is  reversed,  because  in  Gauss's  integral  the  positive  direction 
of  r  is  from  P  towards  the  surface ;  but,  in  the  present  case, 
the  positive  direction  is  from  the  surface  towards  P. 

If  P  be  on  the  positive  side  of  the  shell,  the  lines  from  P 
to  the  shell  which  fall  inside  the  cone  standing  on  the 
bounding  curve  meet  the  shell  once  externally,  and  possibly 
an  even  number  of  times  afterwards.  Those  which  fall  out- 
side this  cone  meet  the  shell  twice,  or  some  other  even  number 
of  times :  first,  externally,  and  then  internally,  and  therefore 
contribute  nothing  to  the  integral  representing  the  solid  angle. 
Accordingly,  the  two  solid  angles  are  the  same  when  P  is  on 
the  positive  side  of  the  shell,  and  when  P  is  infinitely  near 
the  shell  on  this  side,  each  may  be  denoted  by  d. 

When  P  moves  across  the  surface  of  the  shell  from  the 
positive  to  the  negative  side,  the  solid  angle  subtended  by 
the  bounding  curve  remains  unaltered,  but  that  subtended 
by  the  shell  becomes  Qi  -  47r.  To  see  the  truth  of  this  we 
have  only  to  suppose  the  closed  surface  completed  of  which 
the  shell  is  part.  Then,  by  Art.  26,  the  solid  angle  which 
the  entire  closed  surface  subtends  at  P  is  -  4jr ;  and  it  is  plain 
that  Qi  denotes  the  absolute  magnitude  of  that  part  of  this 
angle  which  is  subtended  by  the  portion  of  this  surface  which 
has  been  added  to  the  shell.  Hence  the  solid  angle  subtended 
by  the  shell  is  -  (4?r  -  d). 

The  solid  angle  subtended  at  P  by  the  curve  bounding 
the  shell  is  everywhere  continuous  unless  P  be  infinitely  near 
the  curve.  As  P  moves  about,  the  variations  of  the  two  solid 


Potential  of  Uniform  Magnetic  Shell.  99 

angles  are  the  same  except  wlieii  P  is  passing  through  the 
surface  of  the  shell.  Hence  we  may  take  for  the  potential 
of  the  shell  at  P  the  expression  JQ,  where  Q  denotes  the 
solid  angle  subtended  at  P  by  the  curve  bounding  the  shell, 
with  the  proviso  that  when  P  passes  through  the  shell  from 
the  positive  to  the  negative  side,  4Jir  must  be  subtracted 
from  the  foregoing  expression. 

If  i//  be  a  function  of  the  coordinates  of  a  point,  and  if 

-j-  ds  taken  round  a  closed  circuit  be  zero  for  every  possible 

closed  circuit,  \L  is  acyclic,  but,  if  for  some  circuits  f  —^  ds 

jets 

taken  round  the  circuit  be  not  zero,  i//  is  cyclic.  If  a  closed 
circuit  s  be  such  that  we  can  draw  a  surface  S,  of  which  s  is 
the  boundary,  so  that  at  every  point  of  S  the  function  ^  has 
differential  coefficients  u,v,  ic  which  are  finite  and  continuous, 
then  by  Stokes'  Theorem,  Art.  192,  the  function  ^  must  be 
acyclic  for  the  circuit  s.  Again,  if  a  surface  fulfilling  the 
conditions  stated  above  be  bounded  by  two  curves,  SL  and  s2, 

the  value  of      -^  ds  taken  round  the  circuit  is  the  same  for 

J  ds 

one  of  these  curves  as  for  the  other.  It  is  now  easy  to  see 
that  Q,  the  solid  angle  subtended  at  P  by  the  curve  * 
bounding  the  shell,  is  acyclic  for  every  circuit  which  does 
not  embrace  this  curve,  passing  through  its  interior.  For 
since  the  differential  coefficients  of  Q  are  finite  and  continuous 
for  all  positions  of  P  not  infinitely  near  the  curve  s,  this 
follows  immediately  from  what  has  been  said  above. 

If  we  suppose  P  to  start  from  a  point  at  an  infinite 
distance  on  the  positive  side  of  the  shell  and  to  move  in  a 
straight  line  to  a  point  at  an  infinite  distance  on  the  negative 
side,  passing  in  its  course  through  the  interior  of  the  curve  s, 
the  solid  angle  Q  passes  from  0  to  4?r.  For  if  a  unit  sphere 
be  described  round  P  as  centre,  the  edges  of  the  cone  having 
its  vertex  at  P  and  standing  on  s  initially  converge  to  a 
point.  As  P  approaches  to  s  the  cone  opens  out,  and  the 
area  swept  out  on  the  sphere  by  the  edges  of  the  cone 
increases.  After  P  passes  through  the  interior  of  s,  this 
area  becomes  greater  than  a  hemisphere,  and  finally  when  P 
H  2 


100  Mayneti&ed  Bodies. 

reaches  au  infinite  distance  on  the  negative  side  of  the  shell, 
the  edges  of  the  cone  again  converge  to  a  point  on  the  sphere 
which  is  now  opposite  to  that  to  which  they  originally  con- 
verged. These  edges  have  then  swept  out  the  entire  sphere 
or  4rr. 

We  may  now  suppose  P  to  return  to  its  original  position 
along  a  path  on  the  outside  of  s,  and  such  that  all  its  points 
are  infinitely  distant  from  s.  At  all  these  points  the  diffe- 
rential coefficients  of  Q  are  zero  ;  and  hence  the  value  of  Q,  is 
4?r,  when  P  returns  to  its  original  position.  It  is  now  easy  to 
see,  from  Stokes's  theorem,  that  for  any  circuit  passing 
through  the  interior  of  the  curve  and  embracing  it  once 

—  ds    must  be     4ir. 
J  ds 

Hence  we  conclude  that  the  potential  of  a  magnetic 
shell  is  expressed  by  a  cyclic  function,  but  that  at  the  surface 
of  the  shell  discontinuity  occurs  in  the  potential  though  not 
in  the  function.  In  consequence  of  this  discontinuity  the 
principle  of  the  conservation  of  energy  is  maintained. 

In  fact,  if  P  start  from  a  point  0  on  the  surface  of  the 
shell,  at  the  negative  side,  and  travel  round  the  edge  of  the 
shell  till  it  reaches  the  point  Of  on  the  positive  side  of  the 
shell,  opposite  and  infinitely  near  to  0,  the  function  il  in- 
creases by  47T,  but  in  passing  through  the  shell  from  0'  to  0 
the  potential  of  the  shell  is  diminished  by  4;r.  Hence  the 
value  of  the  potential  at  0  is  unchanged  by  the  motion  of  P 
round  the  complete  circuit,  but  the  value  of  Q  is  increased 
by  47T. 

198.  Energy  due  to  Magnetic  Shell.—  The  energy 
due  to  a  magnetic  shell  placed  in  au  independent  magnetic 
field  is  given  by  (9).  If  /,  m,  n  denote  the  direction-cosines 
of  the  normal  to  the  element  dSof  the  shell,  and  Jits  strength, 
we  have 

Ad®  =  JldS,     Bd&  =  JmdS,     Cd&  =  JndS, 


and  if  a',  /3',  7'  denote  the  components  of  magnetic  force 
due  to  the  field  (9)  becomes 

r)  dS.  (22) 


Energy  due  to  T\co  Magnetic  Shells.  101 

199.  Energy  due  to  Two  Magnetic  Shells.— If  the 

magnetic  field  be  due  to  a  second  shell  8'  whose  components 
of  force  are  «'/3'/,  the  energy  W  given  by  (22)  represents 
the  result  of  the  mutual  action  of  the  two  shells. 

Since  the  one  shell  is  outside  the  other,  we  may  in  (22) 
substitute  the  components  of  induction  for  those  of  force  and 
for  the  components  of  induction  we  may  put  the  expressions 
given  by  (13),  Art.  193.  Thus  (22)  becomes 


p  y     \  tf.£    </# 

(23) 

where  s  is  the  curve  bounding  the  first  shell. 

The  values  of  F't  G' ',  H',  the  components  of  the  vector 
potential  of  the  second  shell,  are  given  by  (16)  Art   193 
In  this  case 

d 


but  B'd&  =  J'm'dS',     CV3'  =  J'n'dS', 

and  hence   F  -  J>  \\nt  *(1)  -  n>   *  (1   }  dym 
J  (      dz  \r/         dy'\rj) 

In  Stokes's  theorem  (12),  Art.  192,  if  we  make 
«=-,  v  =  0,  w  =  0,     we  get     F'  = 


where  a'  denotes  the  curve  bounding  the  second  shell.     In 
a  similar  manner  we  have 

0'-J'\W\d*'>    H'-J'\%\d«>          W 

Substituting  in  (23)  the  values  obtained  for  F'  G'  and  H' 
we  get 

u/  T  r'  f  (Y^'r  dx       dy  (ft/ 

YV  —  —  t/ 1/     111  —  ~f~  —  — * 

--^'JJ^*^,      (25) 
where  £  denotes  the  angle  between  the  curve  elements  ds  andtfs'. 


102  Magnetized  Bodies. 

SECTION  I. — Induced  Magnetism. 

200.  magnetic  Induction. — When  a  body  is  placed  in 
a  field  of  magnetic  force,  in  general  its  magnetism  is  altered. 
The   magnetism   produced   by  the   force   is   called   induced 
magnetism.     When  the  magnetizing  force  is  small,  the  in- 
duced magnetization  is,  in  general,  proportional  to  and  co- 
directional  with  the  total  magnetic  force  acting  at  the  point, 
so  that  if  A2  denote  a  component  of  induced  magnetization, 
and  a  the  corresponding  component  of  the  total  magnetic 
force,     At  =  KU,     where  K  is  a  coefficient  depending  on  the 
nature  of  the  body,  and  is  called  the  coefficient  of  induced 
magnetization. 

It  is  easy  to  see  that  At  and  a  are  quantities  of  the  same 
order,  so  that  K  is  a  numerical,  magnitude,  which  is  positive 
in  the  case  of  paramagnetic  bodies,  and  negative  in  the  case 
of  diamagnetic. 

If  AI  denote  the  component  of  that  part  of  the  magneti- 
zation which  is  independent  of  induction,  we  have 

A  =  Al  +  Ka,     B  =  BI  +  Kj3,      C  =  Ci  +  icy.          (1) 

201.  Magnetism    due    altogether   to   Induction.— 

If  there  be  no  magnetism  in  the  body  independent  of  the 
induction  due  to  the  field  of  force,  AI  =  BI  =  C\  =  0,  and 

A  =  Ka,    B  =  Kfi,     C=Ky.  (2) 

In  this  case,  by  (3),  Art.  183,  we  have 
dA     dB     dC       (da     dp     dy\  fdA 


dB    dC\ 
dy^dnf 


whence  ^+*?  +  *?_0.  (3) 

dx       dy      dz 

When  the  components  of  magnetization  fulfil  this  con- 
dition, the  distribution  of  magnetism  is  said  to  be  solenoidal, 
and  the  potential  corresponding  may  be  regarded  as  due  to  a 
surface  distribution  of  mass  whose  density  is 

I  A  +  mB  +  nC. 


Components  of  Induction.  103 

202.  Components  of  Induction. — When  a  body  has 
no  magnetism  independent  of  that  induced  by  the  acting 
force,  the  components  of  induction  are  given  by  the  equations 


a  =  (1  +  47rK)a,     b  =  ( L  +  4™)  j3,     o  -  (1  +  4™)?.    (4) 

If  we  put  1  +  47r/c  =  •&,  the  quantity  ra  is  called  by 
Maxwell  the  specific  magnetic  inductive  capacity,  and  by 
Thomson  the  magnetic  permeability,  and  in  the  case  of  a 
body  magnetically  isotropic,  having  no  permanent  magnetism 
independent  of  induction,  we  have,  then, 

a  =  Tza,     b  =  tcrjS,     c  =  zsy.  (5) 

203.  Distribution  of  Induced  magnetism.— Let  U 

denote  the  total  magnetic  potential,  inside  the  body  in  which 
the  distribution  of  induced  magnetism  is  to  be  determined, 
U'  the  total  potential  in  the  external  medium ;  then,  as  the 
distribution  of  induced  magnetism  is  solenoidal,  and  there  is 
no  other  magnetism  inside  the  field  in  which  U  and  U'  are 
to  be  determined,  we  have 

V2£7=0,     V2Z7'=0, 

also  U  =  Uf  at  the  surface  bounding  the  magnetized  body, 
and  since,  Art.  187,  the  normal  component  of  induction  is 
continuous, 

dU      ,dU'  fl 

W—  +  W-7^=0,  (6) 

(tv  ctv 

where  zs  and  OT'  denote  the  coefficients  of  permeability  of  the 
body  and  the  external  medium,  and,  v  and  v  the  normals 
drawn  into  them  at  the  separating  surface. 

If  U'  be  assigned  at  the  surface  bounding  the  field  exter- 
nally, U  and  Uf  can  be  determined  in  only  one  way  so  as  to 
satisfy  the  given  conditions.  Let  us  suppose  that  the  equations 
could  be  satisfied  by  two  pairs  of  functions  Z7i,  U'i  and  U2,  U't, 
and  let 


104  Magnetized  Bodies. 

then,  if  &  be  the  surface  bounding  the  field  externally,  we 
have 


If  we  multiply  the  first  of  these  equations  by  OT,  the 
second  by  in',  and  add,  observing  that  at  the  surface  S'  we 
must  have  $  =  0,  and  that  0  =  $'  at  S,  we  get 


w 


Since      w      +  w'       =  0  at  S,     and     V2*  =  0,  VV  =  0, 
«i/  r/v 

the  left-hand  member  of  this  equation  is  zero.  The  coefficients 
TO  and  TO'  are  always  essentially  positive,  even  if  K  or  K'  be 
negative.  Hence  each  member  of  the  right-hand  side,  and 
each  of  the  terms  under  the  integral  signs,  must  vanish 
separately,  and  therefore  ^'  =  0,  <f>  =  0. 

204.  External  Medium    not  Magnetic.—  If  the  ex- 

ternal medium  is  not  capable  of  being  magnetized,  we  have 
K  =0,  TS  =  1  ;  also 

U=  F+Q,     U'=  F+ii'; 

where  V  denotes  the  potential  of  the  forces  producing  the 
induction,  and  Q  and  Q'  the  potentials,  inside  and  outside  the 
body,  of  the  induced  magnetism.  In  this  case  V  is  supposed 
to  be  given,  and  12'  is  zero  at  infinity. 


Iwtropic  Ellipsoid  in  Uniform  Field.  105 

205.  Aiiisotropic  medium.  —  When  a  magnetic  medium 
is  anisotropic  or  crystalline,  the  induced  magnetism  is  not,  in 
general,  codirectional  with  the  magnetic  force  ;  but  the  com- 
ponents of  induced  magnetization  are  linear  functions  of  the 
components  of  force,  so  that  we  have 


A  =  KUa  +  K12|3  +  Kis 

B  =  K^a  +  K-22/3  +  K23y,   >  (7) 


,  \ 
22          23 

C     =     Ks 


By  (9),  Art.  (189),  we  see  that,  to  increase  by  ca  the  force 
acting  in  the  element  rf<2>,  the  work  required  is  -  A$a,  and 
therefore  we  conclude  that 

JW__          _iW  _4W=C 

da  d(3  (ty 

Hence    K->I  =  K-12,  &c.,    and  (7)  become 

A     =    Kiid   +   Kit  ft  +   Kisy,    \ 

B     =     K120   +   K22/3   +   KMy,     |  (9) 

C  =  KKO.  +  (C23/3  +  K33y. 

206.  Isotropic  Ellipsoid  in  Field  of  Uniform 
Force.  —  If  an  ellipsoid,  free  from  magnetism  and  sur- 
rounded by  a  non-magnetic  medium,  be  placed  in  a  field 
of  uniform  force,  the  distribution  of  induced  magnetism  can 
readily  be  determined.  In  fact,  we  may  suppose  the  ellipsoid 
to  be  uniformly  magnetized  in  a  direction  to  be  determined  ; 
and  if  the  conditions  of  the  question  can  thus  be  satisfied, 
we  know  by  Art.  203  that  we  have  reached  the  correct 
solution  of  the  question. 

Let  /  denote  the  intensity  of  the  induced  magnetization, 
and  X,  ju,  v  its  direction-cosines;  then,  by  (5),  Art.  184,  the 
potential  V  of  the  induced  magnetism  is  given  by  the 
equation 

V  =  I(\Lx  +  pMy  +  vNz),  (10) 


106  Magnetized  Bodies. 

where,  by  (17),  Art.  22,  the  constants  L,  M,   N  denote 


«•+«)!  (ft" +*)*(*+«)* ' 

and  the  two  other  integrals  obtained  by  interchanging  I  and  c 
with  a.  Hence,  if  the  components  of  the  uniform  force  due 
to  the  field  be  denoted  by  Flt  Ft,  Fs,  the  total  magnetic 
force  a,  parallel  to  the  axis  of  x,  is  Fi  -  7XL,  and  we  have 


with  two  similar  equations.     Accordingly,  we  get 
(l  +  KL)I\  =  Ktf, 

(11) 


The  values  of  /,  A,  n,  and  v  obtained  from  these  equations 
satisfy  the  conditions  of  the  question. 

207.  Anisotropic   Ellipsoid    surrounded    by    \on- 
IWagnetic    Medium    in    Uniform    Field    of  Force.— 

In  this  case,  if  we  proceed  in  a  manner  similar  to  that  of 
the  last  Article,  we  get 

I\  =  Kll(Fl  -  /XL)  +  Klt(F3  -  J/i  J/)  +  Ku(F*  - 
and  two  similar  equations  ;  whence  we  have 


*     (12) 

i+K»Ft+K#F») 

Hence  7,  X,  ju,  and  v  are  determined. 


Earth's  Magnetic  Potential]  107 

SECTION  III. —  Terrestrial  Magnetism. 

208.  Earth's  Magnetic  Potential. — The  components 
of  the  Earth's  magnetic  force  at  any  place  can  be  deter- 
mined by  observation.  This  can  be  done  either  by  finding 
the  time  of  oscillation  of  a  magnet,  free  to  move  in  a 
horizontal  or  in  a  vertical  plane,  when  disturbed  from  its 
position  of  equilibrium,  or  by  arranging  a  position  of 
equilibrium  under  the  combined  action  of  the  Earth  and 
magnets  whose  strengtli  and  position  are  known.  The 
investigation  of  the  Earth's  magnetic  potential  was  initiated 
by  Q-auss.  In  the  British  Islands  some  of  the  earliest  observa- 
tions were  carried  out  by  Lloyd  in  the  magnetic  observatories 
of  Trinity  College,  Dublin. 

When  the  Earth's  horizontal  force  has  been  determined 
at  a  sufficient  number  of  places,  the  question  of  the  existence 
of  an  acyclic  magnetic  potential  can  be  investigated. 

If  s  denote  any  portion  of  a  closed  path  on  the  Earth's 
surface,  H  the  horizontal  component  of  magnetic  force  at 
any  point,  and  9  the  angle  which  its  direction  makes  with 
that  of  *,  on  the  hypothesis  that  a  magnetic  potential  V 

dV 

exists,    we   have    H  cos  0  = r.      Hence,    if    an    acyclic 

ds 

magnetic  potential  exists,  /.ETcos  6  ds  taken  round  the  closed 
path  is  zero.  By  finding  a  sufficient  number  of  values  of 
H  and  0  the  numerical  value  of  the  integral  can  be  deter- 
mined approximately.  In  fact,  if  Sj  and  «2  correspond  to 
stations  not  too  far  apart,  we  have 

H  cos  Bds  =  l  (Hl  cos  0i  +  H*  cos  02)  (sz  -  Sj) 

approximately.  It  is  found  in  this  way  that  J  H  cos  9  ds 
taken  round  a  closed  path  is  always  zero. 

Hence  we  conclude  that  the  magnetic  action  of  r  the 
Earth  can  be  represented  by  an  acyclic  potential,  and  con- 
sequently that  electric  currents  passing  from  the  outer 
atmosphere  to  the  ground  cannot  be  the  cause  of  any  part 
of  this  action. 


108  Magnetised  Bodies. 

209.  Locality  of  the  Sources  of  the  Earth's 
Magnetic  Force.  —  If  the  Earth's  magnetic  action  be  due 
to  magnetism,  or  closed  electric  currents  in  its  interior,  the 
magnetic  potential  V  at  any  point  P  outside  its  surface  can 
be  expanded  in  descending  powers  of  r,  the  distance  of  P 
from  the  centre  of  the  Earth.  The  difference  between  the 
numerical  values-  of  V  &t  any  two  places  can  be  determined 
from  observations  of  the  horizontal  force.  If  the  magnetic 
action  be  due  to  magnets  or  currents  outside,  the  potential 
at  any  point  nearer  to  the  centre  than  the  nearest  of  these 
sources  of  action  can  be  expanded  in  ascending  powers 
of  r. 

Hence  for  a  point  P  close  to  the  Earth's  surface  at  its 
exterior  we  have 

r-stf}—,  +  *Yii>  (i) 


where   a   denotes   the   radius  of   the  Earth  and  Ui  and 
spherical  harmonics.     At  the  surface  of  the  Earth 


and  if  «»  denote  a  coefficient  in  U^  and  bi  the  coefficient  of  the 
corresponding  term  iu  Y{,  the  coefficient  of  this  term  in  V  i& 
«i  +  bi.  By  taking  a  sufficient  number  of  numerical  values 
of  V  at  known  places  on  the  Earth's  surface  we  can  deter- 
mine as  many  of  these  coefficients  as  we  please  so  that 
we  may  regard  a^  4  l{  as  known. 

If  we  now  consider  the  vertical  component  Z,  towards 
the  centre,  of  the  Earth's  magnetic  force,  we  have 


At  the  surface  (2)  becomes 

7i -(*'+!)  71).  (3) 


Earth's  Magnetic  Poles.  109 

Hence,  from  the  observation  of  a  sufficient  number  of 
values  of  Z  we  can  determine 

iff,-  -(/+!)  h, 

and  consequently  #,-  and  bi  are  each  known. 

It  is  found  that  «»•  is  always  zero,  and  accordingly  we 
conclude  that  the  Earth's  magnetic  action  is  due  altogether  to 
sources  inside  its  surface,  and  that  V,  the  potential  of  the 
Earth's  magnetic  action,  is  given  by  the  equation 

r -•**£.  (4) 

210.  JEarth's  Magnetic  Poles. — A  magnetic  pole  is  a 
point  at  which  the  horizontal  force  vanishes.  At  such  a 
point  this  force  changes  sign  so  that  at  each  side  of  the  pole 
the  same  end  of  the  needle  points  towards  the  pole. 

If  there  be  two  poles  of  the  same  kind  on  the  Earth's 
surface  in  going  from  one  to  the  other  along  a  magnetic 
meridian,  the  horizontal  force  must  change  sign  and  therefore 
vanish.  Hence  there  must  be  a  third  pole  between  the  two 
former.  The  end  of  the  needle  which  pointed  towards  these 
poles  points  away  from  the  intermediate  one  at  each  side. 

As  a  matter  of  fact  there  are  only  two  magnetic  poles  on 
the  Earth's  surface,  and  these  two  are  of  opposite  kinds.  The 
proximity  of  these  poles  to  the  extremities  of  the  Earth's 
axis  of  rotation  appears  to  indicate  a  connexion  between  the 
Earth's  magnetism  and  the  Earth's  rotation.  From  the 
properties  of  electric  currents  it  is  easy  to  see  that  such 
currents  circulating  round  the  Earth,  and  approximately 
parallel  to  the  equator,  would  account  for  the  magnetic 
phenomena  exhibited. 


110  Electric  Currents. 


CHAPTER  X. 


KLECTRIC    CURRENTS. 

211.  Introductory. — Not  long  after  the  discovery  of 
current  electricity  it  was  observed  by  Oersted  that  a  wire 
through  which  an  electric  current  is  passing  exercises  an 
attractive  or  repulsive  force  upon  the  pole  of  a  magnet  - 
needle.  It  was  found  also  that  wires  along  which  electric 
currents  are  passing  attract  or  repel  one  another. 

By  a  combination  of  experimental  and  mathematical 
investigations  Ampere  succeeded  in  arriving  at  the  laws 
which  regulate  the  attraction  of  currents  on  each  other  and 
on  magnets. 

His  original  investigations  must  ever  be  regarded  as 
worthy  of  the  highest  admiration,  but  some  of  his  experi- 
ments, combined  with  the  theoretical  developments  of  other 
physicists,  enable  us  to  arrive  at  his  results  by  methods 
shorter  and  simpler  than  those  employed  by  him. 

212.  Electric  Currents. — An  electric  current  may  be 
produced  in  various  ways ;  but  in  all  cases  the  maintenance 
of  an  electric  current  requires  an  expenditure  of  energy 
supplied  by  an  external  source. 

The  source  of  energy  may  be  chemical,  as  when  two 
substances  unite  chemically,  or  mechanical,  such  as  the 
action  of  a  steam-engine  or  water-mill,  but  in  all  cases  there 
must  be  a  source  of  energy  outside  the  current  itself  on 
which  its  continuance  depends.  The  force  due  to  an  electric 
current  is  not  therefore  a  permanent  natural  force,  and  pro- 
positions depending  on  the  principle  of  energy  cannot  be 
applied  to  it  in  the  same  manner  as  to  gravitation,  or  to  the 
attraction  of  static  electricity. 

The  currents  whose  attraction  we  are  about  to  consider 
are  those  transmitted  along  a  wire  of  small  section. 


Electric  Currents.  Ill 

The  quantity  of  electricity  which  passes  through  an 
orthogonal  section  of  the  wire  in  the  unit  of  time  is  called 
the  strength  of  the  current.  The  quantity  which  passes 
through  the  unit  of  area  is  called  its  intensity.  When  a 
steady  current  is  established,  the  strength  is  uniform  through- 
out the  wire.  The  force  which  causes  and  keeps  up  the 
current  is  the  electric  force.  When  there  is  a  potential 
corresponding  to  this  force,  the  force  is  the  rate  of  diminution 

of  the  potential,  or  — — ,  where  s  denotes  an  element  of 

els 

length  along  the  wire.  As  the  current  is  supposed  to  be 
constant,  this  force  must  be  equilibrated  by  another  of  equal 
magnitude. 

The  current  is  thus  analogous  to  the  uniform  motion  of  a 
body  sliding  on  a  rough  surface. 

The  retarding  force  on  a  unit  of  electricity  is  found  to  be 
proportional  to  the  intensity  of  the  current,  that  is,  its 
strength  per  unit  of  area. 

Thus  we  have 

-d—  =  k- 
ds          a 

where  A;  is  a  coefficient  depending  on  the  material  of  the 
wire,  <r  denotes  the  area  of  its  section,  and  i  the  strength  of 
the  current.  If  we  integrate  the  equation  above,  we  get 


Fi  -  F2  = 
If  k  and  a  be  constant,  this  becomes 

F.-F.-hf-*  (i) 

kl 
where  /  denotes  the  length  of  the  wire,  and  It  =  — .     The 

quantity  JR  is  termed  the  resistance  of  the  wire. 

If  Fi  -  F2,  the  difference  between  the  values  of  the 
potential  at  the  extremities  of  the  wire,  be  denoted  by  E, 
equation  (1)  may  be  written 

E  =  Ri.  (2) 


112  Electric  Currents. 

This  expresses  what  is  called  Ohm's  Law.  E  is  termed 
the  electromotive  force,  and  may  be  defined  as  the  difference  in 
potential  between  the  extremities  of  the  wire,  or,  more  generally, 
as  the  line  integral  taken  along  the  wire  of  the  electromotive 
intensity. 

The  term  '  electromotive  force  '  applied  to  this  integral 
seems  highly  objectionable,  but  is  sanctioned  by  long  usage. 

213.  Solenoids.  —  If  a  wire  be  bent  into  the  form  of  a 
circle,  not  quite  closed,  be  carried  on  for  a  short  distance  at 
right  angles  to  the  plane  of  the  circle,  bent  into  another  circle 
equal  and  parallel  to  the  first,  carried  on  again,  and  so  on, 
and  finally  brought  back  in  a  straight  line  perpendicular  to 
the  planes  of  the  circles  and  close  to  the  connecting  portions 
of  wire  between  them  ;  and  if  an  electric  current  be  sent 
through  the  wire,  we  obtain  what  is  termed  a  solenoid.  As 
the  portion  of  the  current  which  is  perpendicular  to  the 
planes  of  the  circles  consists  of  two  parallel  parts  close 
together  and  flowing  in  opposite  directions,  it  produces  no 
attraction  on  a  magnet-pole,  and  the  solenoid  may  be 
regarded  as  being  composed  of  a  number  of  equal  circles 
whose  planes  are  perpendicular  to  a  straight  line  passing 
through  their  centres. 

it  is  found  that  at  distances  which  are  large  compared 
with  the  diameter  of  one  of  the  circles,  the  solenoid  exercises 
the  same  action  as  a  linear  magnet. 

If  a  denote  the  area  of  one  of  the  circles,  <$  the  perpen- 
dicular distance  between  two  of  them,  /  the  length  of  the 
solenoid,  and  i  the  strength  of  the  current,  it  is  found  that 
the  magnetic  moment  of  the  solenoid  is  expressed  by 


The  magnetic  moment  of  a  linear  magnet  of  equal  length, 
made  up  of  small  magnets  having  each  a  magnetic  moment  /u 

and  an  axial  length  h,  is  expressed  by  7  /,     The  axial  length  h 

n 

is  the  distance  between  the  centres  of  two  of  the  small  magnets 
of  which  the  linear  magnet  is  composed.  If  the  moment  of 
the  solenoid  be  equal  to  that  of  the  magnet,  and  if  we  suppose 
h  =  8,  we  get  i<r  =  fi. 


Solenoids. 


As  the  equivalence  of  the  solenoid  to  the  magnet  holds 
fo°ndude  thearr        ^  ^^^  °f  ^^  ™  the  solenoid>  we 


A  small  circular  current  is  equivalent  to  a  small  magnet 
whose  centre  coincides  with  that  of  the  circle,  whose  axis  is 
perpendicular  to  the  plane  of  the  circle,  and  whose  moment 
****  ^  ^^  multiPlied  b^  the  strength  of 


The  equivalence  of  a  solenoid  to  a  linear  magnet  holds 
good  equally  well  if  another  plane  curve  be  substituted  for  a 
circle,  and  becomes  more  rigorously  true  according  as  the 
diameter  of  the  curve  is  diminished,  compared  with  the 
distance  of  the  magnet  on  which  the  solenoid  acts.  Hence 
we  conclude  that, 

The  magnetic  action  of  an  infinitely  small  electric  circuit 
is  equivalent  to  that  of  a  magnetic  particle  whose  axis  is 
surrounded  by  the  circuit  and  is  perpendicular  to  its  plane 
and  whose  magnetic  moment  is  equal  to  the  area  of  the 
circuit  multiplied  by  the  strength  of  the  current. 

i  2»4  ^qul.va>enfe  «f  Electric  Circuit  to  Magnetic 
Trr~~r  a.smgle-sheeted  surface  be  described  of  which  an 
electric  circuit  is  the  boundary,  and  a  network  of  lines  be 
drawn  on  this  surface  dividing  it  into  a  number  of  small 

lements,  the  electric  current  is  equivalent  to  a  current  of 
equal  strength  circulating  in  its  direction  (clockwise  or 
counter-clockwise)  round  each  of  these  elements.  This  is 
obvious  if  we  remember  that  along  the  boundary  line 

tetween  two  adjacent  elements  there  are  two  currents  in 
opposite  directions,  one  for  each  element.  As  these  currents 
are  equal,  they  neutralize  each  other;  and  the  only  current 
which  remains  uncompensated  is  that  in  the  outer  boundary 
-By  increasing  the  number  of  lines  in  the  network,  the  size 
ot  each  element  can  be  diminished  without  limit. 

From  Art.  213  it  appears  that  the  electric  circuit 
embracing  the  element  dS  of  the  surface  is  equivalent  to  a 
magnetic  particle  whose  axis  is  perpendicular  to  dS  and 
whose  moment  is  MS,  where  *  denotes  the  strength  of  the 
current. 


114  Electric  Currents. 

Hence,  the  total  electric  circuit  is  equivalent  to  the 
assemblage  of  small  magnets,  normal  to  the  surface  S, 
whose  moments  are  the  areas  of  the  elements  surrounding 
the  magnets  multiplied  by  the  strength  of  the  current,  that 
is,  to  the  magnetic  shell  whose  surface  is  S  and  whose 
strength  is  i. 

215.  Magnetic    Potential    of  Electric    Circuit.— 

Since  the  magnetic  action  of  an  electric  circuit  is  the  same 
as  that  of  a  magnetic  shell  boutided  by  the  circuit,  the 
magnetic  potential  of  an  electric  circuit  whose  strength 
is  t  at  a  point  P  is  expressed  by  i"O,  where  Q  denotes  the 
solid  angle  subtended  by  the  circuit  at  P.  This  potential  is 
continuous  everywhere  except  at  the  circuit  itself. 

For  any  closed  curve  not  passing  through  the  space 
surrounded  by  the  circuit  the  potential  is  acyclic. 

For  a  curve  passing  through  this  space  and  embracing 
the  circuit  the  potential  is  cyclic,  and  the  value  of  the  cyclic 
constant  is  4ni. 

These  characteristics  of  the  potential  show  that  in  moving 
a  magnet-pole  round  a  closed  curve  which  does  not  embrace 
the  circuit  no  work  is  done,  but  that  in  moving  the  unit 
pole  round  a  curve  embracing  the  circuit  and  passing 
through  its  interior,  if  the  direction  of  motion  be  opposed 
to  the  force,  work  is  done  represented  by  4iri. 

If  we  imagine  a  person  to  stand  on  the  positive  side  of 
a  shell  equivalent  to  the  current,  that  is,  on  the  side  towards 
which  the  north  poles  point,  the  current  as  seen  by  him  will 
circulate  counter-clockwise,  and  if  a  person  is  placed  lying 
along  the  current  which  enters  at  his  feet  and  goes  out  at 
his  head,  the  motion  of  a  north  magnetic  pole  moved  by 
the  current  round  his  body  will  as  seen  by  him  be  counter- 
clockwise. 

The  first  of  these  statements  is  deducible  from  the 
experiments  made  on  solenoids;  the  second  follows  from 
the  equivalence  of  the  current  to  the  magnetic  shell. 

216.  Magnetic  Force  of  Currents. — Since  an  electric 
circuit  is  equivalent  to  a  magnetic  shell,  the  components  of 
force  due  to  the  current  are  in  space  outside  the  shell  the  same 
as  a,  /3, 7,  the  components  of  magnetic  force  due  to  the  shell. 


Energy  due  to  presence  of  Current.  115 

Outside  the  shell  «,  0,  7  are  the  same  as  a,  b,  c,  the  com- 
ponents of  induction  due  to  the  shell.  At  the  shell  a  3 
are  discontinuous,  Art.  186;  but  since  the  magnetization  'of 
the  shell  is  normal  to  its  surface,  a,  b,  c  are  continuous,  Art. 
187.  The  force-components  of  the  current  are  everywhere 
continuous  except  at  the  current  itself.  Hence  we  conclude 
that  for  all  space  outside  the  current,  the  components  of  its 
magnetic  force  are  expressed  by  a,  b,  c,  beinsr  the  same  as  the 
components  of  induction  of  the  equivalent  magnetic  shell. 

217.  Energy  due  to  presence  of  Electric  Current 
in  Independent  Magnetic  Field.— Let  «',  j3  ,  7  denote 
the  components  of  magnetic  force ;  «',  b',  c'  those  of  induction 
due  to  a  magnetic  shell  8  equivalent  to  the  current;  a,  £,  7 
the  components  of  magnetic  force ;  «,  b,  c  those  of  induction 
due  to  the  field  @,  and  A,  £,  C  the  components  of  its  mag- 
netization.  Let  U  denote  the  energy  due  to  the  presence 
ot  the  shell  in  the  field,  and  W  that  due  to  the  presence  of 
the  current. 

By  Art.  216  and  (9),  Art,  189,  we  have 
V  =  -l(a'A  +  p'£  +  7'C)d<&, 
W  =  -  J  (a' A  +  b'B  +  c'C)  rf@. 

Except  at  the  surface  of  the  shell,  a'  =  a\  b'  =  /3',  c  =  7' ; 
but  at  8  we  have  «V@  =  a'd&  +  ^ildS,  where  I  denotes  the 
direction-cosine  of  the  normal  to  S,  with  similar  equations 
for  b  and  c'. 

Hence          W  =  U  -  ±iri  J  (I A  +  mB  +  nC)  dS. 
Again,  by  (22},  Art.  198, 


and  therefore 

W  =  -  t  /  [la  +  m/3  +  ny  +  4*  (IA  +  mB  +  nC)}dS 
=  -  i  /  (la  +  mi  +  we)  rf& 
12 


116 


Electric  Currents. 


218.  Force-Components  of  Current  expressed  a* 
Integrals.—  If  «,  t>,  c  denote  the  components  of  magnetic 
induction  due  to  a  shell  equivalent  to  the  current,  by  Art.  193, 
and  (24),  Art.  199,  we  have 


dR     dO  _  d_  f  «fr[  _  d_  tidtf_ 
~dy"~dz~  dy}    T        dz]    r    ' 


where  x'  ',  />  s'  denote  the  coordinates  of  a  point  on  the 
circuit,  and  r  the  distance  between  this  point  and  the  point 
if,  y,  s,  and  the  integrals  are  taken  round  the  entire  circuit. 

d  i       1  y-y 

Sinoe  d    *  =  "  ?  ~~r~ 


dy  z-z'     <&'  y  - 


we  get 


with  similar  expressions  for  b  and  c ;  and  if  F},  Ftt  Ft  denote 
the  components  of  force  exercised  by  a  circuit  of  strength  i 
on  a  magnet-pole  of  strength  m,  situated  at  the  point  x,  y,  z, 
we  have 

z-z'      dz'  y-y^ 


(4) 


dx'  z-z'd8f 


r          da'       T    I  ra 

219.  Force  exerted  by  Element  of  Current  on 
magnet-Pole.— The  components  of  force  given  by  (4)  are 
the  sums  of  the  components  of  force  contributed  by  the 
various  elements  of  the  circuit. 

Hence,  the  circuit  acts  as  if  the  force-components  due  to 
a  single  element  dtf  of  a  current  whose  strength  is  »,  acting 
on  a  magnet-p<>le  of  strength  m,  were  expressed  by 


i» ids'  Idy'  z-z'     dz'  y- y'\ 
~^~\d7  ~r~"d7      I    )' 
imds'  /dz' 


x-x 

\ds'  ~T 
imds'  (dx'  y-y' 
"r7"  \M  ~r 


d^_  z-x' 

d*      Y 
dy'  x-ai 
~ 


Force  exerted  by  Element  of  Current  on  Magnet-Pole.     117 

That  these  are  the  actual  force-components  due  to  a  current 
element  is  shown  at  the  end  of  this  Article. 
In  the  above  equations, 

dx'      dyf  .    dz 

-J7,     yy,     and    — , 
ds       ds  ds 

are  the  direction-cosines  of  the  current  element  ds',  and 
5=£,     *Z£',     and    L± 

those  of  r.  Hence,  if  61  denote  the  angle  between  ds'  and  r, 
and  3-j,  3*2,  33  the  direction-angles  of  a  perpendicular  to  their 
plane,  the  force-components  due  to  the  current  element  are 
expressed  by 

im  sin  Ods'  im  sin  Bds'  im  sin  Bds' 

COS  9i, COS  $2, COS  $3. 

Hence  the  force  which  a  current  element  ds'  of  strength  / 
exerts  on  a  magnet-pole  of  strength  m  is  perpendicular  to 
the  plane  containing  the  pole  and  the  current  element,  and 
tends  to  make  the  pole  move  in  a  counter-clockwise  direction 
round  the  current  element,  along  which  the  observer  is  sup- 
posed to  be  situated  with  the  current  entering  at  his  feet  and 
going  out  at  his  head.  The  magnitude  of  the  force  is 

im  sin  Bds' 


This  result  can  be  proved  directly  from  the  expression  for 
the  magnetic  potential  of  the  circuit. 

If  we  suppose  an  element  ds'  of  the  circuit  to  be  free  to 
undergo  a  displacement  under  the  action  of  a  magnetic  pole  m, 
the  work  done  by  the  force  in  this  displacement  will  be  equal 
to  the  loss  of  potential  energy  of  the  system. 

The  potential  energy  W  oi  the  system  is  denoted  by  imQ., 
where  Q,  is  the  solid  angle  subtended  at  m  by  a  surface  S 
bounded  by  the  circuit. 

Let  ds  receive  three  displacements  :  one,  S£,  along  ds' 
itself  ;  one,  8»j,  perpendicular  to  ds'  in  the  plane  of  ds'  aud  r  ; 
and  one,  d%,  perpendicular  to  the  two  former.  S£  does  not 
alter  the  surface  S.  The  displacement  8»j  by  the  motion  of  ds' 


118  Electric  Current*. 

generates  an  increment  of  the  surface  S,  but  the  element  of 
surface  so  generated  is  in  a  plane  containing  r  ;  and,  as  its 
normal  is  perpendicular  to  r,  it  subtends  no  solid  angle  at  m. 
The  displacement  S£  alters  S  by  the  amount  <fe'3g,  and  (he 
normal  to  this  element  of  surface  lies  in  the  plane  ofr  and  r/s', 
and  is  perpendicular  to  the  latter.  Hence,  if  0  denote  the 
angle  between  dn'  and  r,  the  angle  between  r  and  the  normal 

is  -  -  6.  Accordingly,  the  element  of  solid  angle  subtended 
at  m  by  the  element  of  surface  is 


and  therefore      8  W  =  im  Sfl 


Hence  the  force  between  m  and  (fa'  is  in  the  direction  of 
the  displacement  S£,  and  is  expressed  by 

ini  sin  Qdst 


The  direction  in  which  the  force  exerted  by  ds'  on  m  tends 
to  move  the  latter  is  in  the  direction  in  which  the  solid  angle  a 
at  m  is  diminishing.  Thus,  we  arrive  at  the  results  already 
stated. 

220.  Energy  due  to  mutual  action  of  two  Electric 
Circuits. — Since  the  action  of  each  circuit  in  space  outside 
itself  is  the  same  as  that  of  a  magnetic  shell,  if  W  denote  the 
energy  due  to  the  mutual  action,  by  (25),  Art.  199,  we  have 

(5) 

It  is  here  assumed  that  the  strength  of  each  current  is 
maintained  constant. 

221.  Forces    between    two    Electric     Circuits.— 

If  X,  Y,  Z  denote  the  components  of  the  force  acting  on  a 
current  element  in  consequence  of  the  mutual  action  between 
the  circuits,  for  any  system  of  small  displacements  we  have 
2  (Xfc  +  1%  +  ZSz)  =  -SW. 


Forces  between  Two  Ekctric  Circuits.  119 

In  order  to  determine  the  variation  of  JFwe  must  express 
cos  £  in  terms  of  r  and  its  differential  coefficients. 

If  x,  y,  z  denote  the  coordinates  of  an  element,  ds  of  one 
current,  and  x',  //,  z  those  of  an  element,  ds'  of  the  other, 
and  r  the  distance  between  these  elements,  remembering  that 
.r,  y,  z  are  functions  of  st  and  #',  y',  z'  of  s',  and  that  s  and  s' 
are  independent  of  each  other,  we  have 

r2  =  (x  -x'Y  +  (>/  -  yj  +  (s  -  s')3, 


rf«  '  ,ls 

,/r  *  <ft  Ate  £+  «  )  =  _oos 

</$  ds          cferfis          \fl?s  «V      ffe   rfs       as  ds 

Substituting  for  cos  s  in  (5)  we  get 
d*r        1  dr  dr 
ds  ds'      r  ds  ds 

The  first  term  under  the  integral  sign  can  be  integrated 
round   either   circuit,    and,    as   the    circuits    are    closed,   it 
vanishes. 
Hence 

JJ  (  r\ds    ds'       ds'    ds  J      ds  ds'    r2 j 

If  we  integrate  by  parts  the  first  two  terms,  since  the 
circuits  are  closed,  the  single  integrals  vanish,  and  we  have 

,  ff  (1  dr  dr       d  il.  dr  \       d  (I  dr\)  » 

F  =  - ' '  JJ  |?  *  ^' +  *  (;  £) +  &d  sjj  *  "s  "s 
.„[[{_»  *+i**j 

JJ  (       r  ds  ds       r2  as  as  , 

3  dr  dr  }  _ 

-   —   — ,  t  or  ds  ds 

r2  ds  ds  } 

£  +  |  cos  0  cos  0'  J  gr  rfs  ^',  (6) 

where  6  and  0'  denote  the  angles  which  r  makes  with  s  and  s'. 


"JJ5 


120  Electric  Ctin-entn. 

Hence 
S  (XBx  +  Tty 


^  (cos  £  +  I  cos  0  cos  0' J  ds  ds'Sr.         (7) 

Accordingly,  the  forces  due  to  the  mutual  action  of  the 
circuits  are  equivalent  to  a  system  of  forces  acting  in  the 
lines  joining  the  elements  of  one  circuit  to  those  of  the  other. 
If  R  denote  the  magnitude  of  the  force  acting  in  the  line 
joining  the  elements  ds  and  ds',  by  (7),  we  have 


R  =  -          cos e  +      cos 6  cos  &   ds  ds'.  (8) 

The  negative  sign  shows  that  the  force  between  the 
elements  is  attractive  when  the  currents  are  both  approaching 
the  shortest  distance  between  their  lines  of  direction. 

The  magnitude  of  It  was  discovered  by  Ampere.  He 
assumed  that  the  direction  of  the  force  between  two  current 
elements  is  the  line  joining  them. 

In  the  investigation  above,  nothing  has  been  assumed ; 
but  it  has  been  shown  that  two  closed  currents  act  on  each 
other  as  if  there  were  a  force  JR  along  each  line  joining  an 
element  of  one  current  to  an  element  of  the  other. 

So  far  as  this  investigation  goes  there  may  be  other  forces 
acting  between  each  pair  of  elements,  but  these  forces  must 
be  such  as  to  produce  no  effect  on  the  total  action  between 
two  closed  currents. 

If  Ult  UZt  and  U3  denote  three  functions  of  s  and  *',  in 
addition  to  E  acting  along  r,  there  might  be  three  forces : 

d~Ui 

•^rr  ds  M   parallel  to  the  axis  of  x, 

dl7t 

-p-  ds  ds'    parallel  to  that  of  y,    and 

dU3 

-TT  its  ds'    parallel  to  that  of  s, 

due  to  the  action  of  ds'  on  ds. 


Force  on  Current  Element  in  Magnetic  Field.          121 

In  this  case  the  total  force  parallel  to  the  axis  of  x  acting 
on  ds,  resulting  from  these  forces,  would  be 


J   ((IU*  i' 
ds     —7-  08  , 

ds 


taken  round  the  closed  circuit  s',  and  this  would  be  zero. 

As  the  expression  for  the  force  between  two  elements 
must  be  symmetrical  with  respect  to  these  elements,  the 
force  exercised  by  ds  on  ds'  parallel  to  the  axis  of  x  would, 
in  this  case,  be 

— r—  ds  ds' ; 
ds 

and  as  this  must  be  equal  and  opposite  to  the  force  exercised 
by  ds'  on  ds,  we  have 


__ 

ds    =        dx'  ' 

Again,  as  Uis  a  function  of  s  and  s', 

rfD;  -££*  +  ££'  *•-!£'<*-*•>. 

dv  ds  ds 

Hence   —  —  '  is  a  function  of  s  -  s'.  and  therefore 
ds 


In  like  manner, 

F,  -,«-«'         U3 


222.  Force  on  Current  Element  in  Magnetic 
Field.  —  If  A,  /j.,  v  denote  the  direction-cosines  of  a  current 
element  ds,  we  have  seen,  Art.  219,  that  the  components  of 
the  force  which  a  magnet-pole  exerts  on  ds  are 

(py  -  v/3)  ids,     (Va  -  Ay)  ids,     and     (A/3  -  /m)  «&i 

where  a,  (3,  y  denote  the  components  of  the  magnetic  force 
due  to  the  magnet-pole. 


122  Electric  Current*. 

If  there  be  any  number  of  magnet-poles,  the  components 
of  force  acting  on  ds  are,  therefore, 


{  fj.  (71  +  72  +  7s  +  &c.)  -  i'  (/3i  +  &  +  ft,  +  &o.)  )  ids,  &c. 

,  if  X,  Y,  ^denote  the  components  of  forc 
magnetic  field  whose  force  components  ar 

-  v/3)  ds,      Y  =  i  (va  -  A7)  (k,     Z  =  i  (X/3  - 


Hence,  if  X,  Y,  ^denote  the  components  of  force  acting 
on  ds  in  a  magnetic  field  whose  force  components  are  a,  |3,  y, 
we  have 


(9) 

223.  Force  exercised  by  Closed  Circuit  on 
Kleuient  of  another.— The  closed  circuit  s'  is  equivalent 
to  a  magnetic  shell,  and  the  components  of  its  magnetic 
force  are  a',  b',  c',  the  components  of  induction  due  to  the 
shell.  Hence,  if  X,  Yt  Z  denote  the  components  of  the 
force  exerted  by  &'  on  ds,  we  have 

X  =  i(pcf-vb')d8,     Y=i(v(i'-\cf)dy,    Z=  i(\b'-fia'}ds.    (10) 

If  F',  G',  H'  denote  the  components  of  the  vector  potential 
of  *',  by  Art.  193,  we  have 

dH'     d&    , 

a  =  — — ,  &c. ; 

dy        dz 

whence  by  substitution  we  obtain 

'dQ'      dP\         (dP      dH' 


=  i   1   \  —  4        dG>    |         (IH>        (\d  d    + 

I       dx  dx  dx       \     dx         dy         dz 

Accordingly, 

.  (  .  dF'         dG'         dH'     dP  ) 
X  =  1  j  A  -7—  +  fj. +  v —  |  ds, 

F.*|x^+/*^+»^-^j^,  y  (ii) 

(       dy      r  dy  dx        ds   | 

„     .  ('      dP        dG'       dH'     dH'  j    , 

£  =    ^     (A    +    IL   4-    w  9  '     ^/S 

I       ^2  dz  dz        ds    I 


Influence  of  Medium.  123 


CHAPTER  XI. 


DIELECTRICS. 

224.  Influence  of  Medium. — Faraday  discovered  that  if 
one  coating  of  a  Leyden  jar  be  raised  to  a  given  potential, 
and  the  other  coating  be  at  potential  zero,  the  charges 
•the  two  coatings  depend  on  the  insulating  medium  ini 
between  them. 

The  theory  that  electrical  action  is  merely  action  at  a 
distance,  independent  of  the  intervening  medium,  had  there- 
fore to  be  abandoned,  and  it  became  necessary  in  studying 
electrical  phenomena  to  take  into  account  the  changes  in 
the  non-conducting  media,  or  dielectrics,  interposed  between 
conductors. 

The  primary  medium  is  space  devoid  of  matter  but 
supposed  to  be  occupied  by  what  is  called  the  luminiferous 
ether.  Such  a  space  is  called  a  vacuum.  In  order  to  explain 
the  observed  phenomena  Faraday  originated,  and  Maxwell 
completed,  a  theory  which  regards  the  dielectrics  interposed 
between  conductors  as  the  primary  seat  of  electrical  action, 
and  looks  upon  apparent  action  at  a  distauce  as  a  result  of 
changes  in  the  intervening  medium. 

A  complete  mechanical  explanation  of  electrical  pheno- 
mena, or  a  full  and  consistent  theory  of  the  nature  of  the 
ether,  does  not  seem  to  have  been  reached  as  yet. 

It  is  therefore  necessary  to  start  with  assumptions,  as 
to  the  electrical  properties  of  dielectrics,  based  on  observation. 

These  assumptions  are  statements  of  supposed  facts  which 
enable  us  to  explain  observed  phenomena,  but  which  them- 
selves await  a  further  and  more  complete  explanation  resting 
on  the  nature  of  the  luminiferous  ether. 


124  Dielectric*. 

225.   Electric    Displacement    or    Polarization.  — 

When  a  conductor  is  electrically  excited  the  conductors  in 
the  vicinity  become  electrically  excited  also,  and  a  change 
is  produced  in  the  intervening  medium  or  dielectric  whereby 
at  each  point  a  directed  or  vector  quantity  is  brought  into 
existence  in  the  medium. 

This  directed  quantity  is  called  by  Maxwell  the  electric, 
displacement,  and  by  Professor  J.  J.  Thomson  the  electric 
polarization.  The  latter  term  is  no  doubt  scientifically  the 
more  correct  ;  but  the  word  '  polarization'  is  used  so  frequently  , 
especially  in  the  theory  of  light,  that  Maxwell's  term  is  in 
practice  the  more  convenient. 

In  order  to  bring  about  this  change  in  the  dielectric  the 
expenditure  of  work  is  required.  If  the  electric  displacement 
per  unit  of  volume  be  denoted  by  D,  and  its  components 
*>y/>0>A,  the  expression  for  the  total  work  §U  per  unit 
of  volume,  required  to  increase  D  by  BD,  is  of  the  form 


The  quantities  by  which  S/,  Sg,  and  SA  are  multiplied  in 
this  expression  are  called  the  components  of  the  electromotive 
intensity  R. 

It  will  be  shown  that  the  vector  quantity  thus  defined  has 
properties  for  the  most  part  the  same  as  those  which  belong 
to  the  electromotive  intensity  in  the  theory  of  action  at  a 
distance. 

Since  Xtydxdydz  represents  an  element  of  work,  XSfdxdy 
is  of  the  nature  of  a  mechanical  force.  Hence,  if  X  be 
regarded  as  of  the  same  nature  as  the  force  acting  on  the 
unit  of  electricity,  fdxdy  may  be  regarded  as  a  quantity  of 
electricity,  and  /  as  a  surface-density. 

In  an  isotropic  dielectric  whose  properties  are  the  same 
in  every  direction,  the  electromotive  intensity  is  co-directional 
with,  and  proportional  to,  the  electric  displacement.  Hence  for 
such  a  dielectric  we  may  write 

4vf=kX,     47r</  =  U',     47TA-AZ  (1) 

The  constant  k  depends  on  the  nature  of  the  dielectric, 
and  is  called  its  specific  inductive  capacity. 

Since  /  is  of  the  nature  of  an  electric  surface-density, 
by  (5),  Art.  29,  k  must  be  a  numerical  quantity. 


Energy  due  to  Electric  Displacement.  125 

226.    Energy  due  to  Electric  Displacement       1  1   U 

denote  the  energy  per  unit  of  volume  due  to  an   electric 
displacement,  by  Art.  224,  we  have 


Substituting  for  X,  Y,  Z,  from  (1)  we  get,  by  integration, 


Yg  +  Zh\        (2) 

Hence  the  total  energy  W,  stored  up  in  an  isotropic 
dielectric  @  in  consequence  of  an  electric  displacement,  is 
given  by  the  equations 

W  =  y  f  DV@  =  ~  I"  IPd®  =  i-  I  RDd®.          (3) 

The  second  of  the  expressions  for  W  given  by  (3)  differs 
from  that  in  Art.  77  only  by  containing  the  factor  k. 

227.  Conductors  and  Currents.  —  A  permanent  electric 
displacement  cannot  be  set  up  in  a  conductor,  but  passes  away 
immediately  if  not  renewed.     A  displacement  which  is  con- 
tinually passing  on  and  being  continually  renewed  constitutes 
an  electric  current.     The  intensity  of  a  current  is  the  rate  of 
change  of  the  corresponding  displacement.     When  a  conductor 
in  electric  equilibrium  is  situated   in  a  dielectric  in  which 
there  is  a  displacement,    it    constitutes    a   boundary  to  the 
dielectric  ;  and  the  surface  integral  of  the  normal  component 
of  the  displacement  taken   over  the   conductor  constitutes 
what  is  called  the  charge  on  the  conductor. 

228.  Soleuoidal  Distribution   of  Displacement.— 

If  a  closed  curve  be  drawn  in  a  dielectric,  and  through  each 
of  its  points  a  line  be  drawn  in  the  direction  of  the  electric 
displacement,  we  have  what  is  called  a  tube  of  induction,  or, 
in  the  language  of  Professor  J.  J.  Thomson,  a  Faraday  tube. 
Such  a  tube  terminates  at  each  end  on  a  conductor,  and, 
whatever  be  the  electric  charge  at  one  end,  an  equal  and 
opposite  charge  is  found  at  the  other.  In  an  isotropic  medium 


126  Diekctrics. 

tubes  of  induction  are  in  the  same  direction  as  tubes  of  force, 
and  are  therefore  at  right  angles  to  the  surface  of  a  conductor 
in  electric  equilibrium.  Hence,  if  the  tube  be  small,  the 
positive  displacement  over  the  normal  section  directed  into 
the  tube  at  one  end  is  equal  in  magnitude  to  the  negative 
displacement  directed  into  the  tube  over  the  normal  section 
at  the  other  end.  Hence  if  Si  and  22  denote  the  two  normal 
sections,  and  D,  and  Dz  the  two  displacements  in  the  positive 
direction  of  the  line  of  induction,  we  have  -D,2i  =  Dt^t- 

We  conclude  that,  for  any  small  tube  of  induction  drawn 
in  the  dielectric,  the  product  of  the  displacement  and  the 
normal  section  is  constant. 

From  this  it  follows  that,  if  any  closed  surface  S  be 
drawn  whose  interior  is  occupied  continuously  by  the  dielec- 
tric, and  if  /,  m,  n  denote  the  direction-cosines  of  the  normal, 
we  have 

/(//+  mg  +  n/i)dS  =  0. 


For,  if  i//  be  the  angle  which  a  line  of  induction  makes  with 
the  normal  to  the  surface  at  any  point, 


D2  =  D  cos  i/,  dS  =  (If  +  mg 

and,  as  every  tube  of  induction  is  cut  twice,  or  some  other 
even  number  of  times  by  the  closed  surface, 

J  (If  +  mg  +  nh}  dS  =  J  D  cos  $dS  =  0.  (4) 


If  the  volume  enclosed  by  S  be  the  element  dx  dy  dz,  we 
obtain 

fdy  dz  -  (f  +  .£  dx\  dy  dz  +  g  dz  dx  ~(ll  +  j-  dy\  dz  dx 

+  h  dx  (hj  -  I  h  +  —  dz  I  dx  dy  =  0  ; 


that  is,  +    '  +  ',0.  (5) 

do-      dy      dz 

This  equation  expresses  a  fundamental  property  of  the 
electric  displacement,  and  is  analogous  to  the  condition 
fulfilled  by  the  components  of  velocity  in  an  incompressible 

•fl  1 1 1 A  * 


Constancy  of  Charge  on  Insulated  Conductor.          127 

In  the  case  of  a  conductor,  /,  g,  h  cannot  exist  except  in 
the  form 


but  the  soleuoidal  condition  is  still  fulfilled,  so  that  for  a 
conductor  we  have 

da      dh 


229.  Constancy  of  Charge  on  Insulated  Con- 
ductor. —  If  a  conductor  be  insulated,  its  bounding  surface, 
or  surfaces,  remains  unchanged,  and  throughout  the  conductor 
by  (6)  we  have 

(  d 


Multiplying  by  dx  dy  dz,  and  integrating,  throughout  the 
conductor  we  get 

df         dg         dh 
di  +  mdi  +  H  dt 


that  is,  —  \(lf+  mg  +  nh  }dS  =  0. 

flfeJV  / 

Hence  /  (If  +  mg  +  nh)  dS,  taken  over  the  surface  or 
surfaces  of  the  conductor,  is  constant. 

When  a  conductor  is  touched  by  another  conductor,  the 
bounding  surface  of  the  space  through  which  the  integration 
is  effected  is  altered,  and  there  is  no  longer  any  ground  for 
asserting  the  constancy  of  the  charge. 

230.  Displacement    due   to  Electrified   Sphere.— 

If  a  conducting  sphere,  of  radius  «,  placed  in  an  isotropic 
medium,  be  uniformly  electrified,  the  lines  of  force  and  of 
induction  are  perpendicular  to  its  surface  and  pass  through 
its  centre,  since  there  is  perfect  symmetry  round  this  point. 


128  Dielectrics. 

Hence  the  sphere  is  in  electric  equilibrium,  and  over  any 
concentric  sphere  of  radius  r  the  displacement  D  is  uniformly 
distributed  ;  and  if  D0  denote  the  displacement  at  the  surface 
of  the  sphere  of  radius  a,  we  have  4rrr*D  =  47rrrZ>0  =  e,  where 
f  denotes  the  total  charge  on  the  electrified  sphere.  Hence 


If  a  be  sufficiently  small,  we  may  regard  the  sphere  as 
an  electrified  particle. 

The  electromotive  intensity  R  is  given  by  the  equation 


and  we  have  the  result,  that  in  an  isotropic  medium  the 
force  due  to  an  electrified  particle  varies  directly  as  the 
charge  on  the  particle  and  inversely  as  the  square  of 
the  distance. 

231.  Energy  due  to  two  Small  Electrified 
Spheres.  —  Let  the  radii  of  the  spheres  be  denoted  by  a  and 
|3,  and  the  spheres  themselves  by  A  and  B.  The  electro- 
motive intensity  due  to  the  sphere  A,  on  which  there  is  a 
charge  e^  is  by  Art.  229,  on  the  hypothesis  that  the  charge  is 

uniformly  distributed,  T—J,  where  rt  denotes  the  distance 
A/'i 

from  the  centre  of  the  sphere.     The  electromotive  intensity 

due  to  the  sphere  B  is  in  like  manner   —  ^ 

ki'j 

It  is  plain  that  the  resultant  force  may  be  derived  from 
a  potential  function  V,  where 


If  JFbe  the  energy  due  to  the  spheres,  wo  have,  then, 


Energy  due  to  two  small  Electrified  Spheres.  129 

The  surface  integral  is  to  be  taken  over  a  sphere  of  infinite 
radius  and  over  the  spheres  whose  radii  are  a  and  8 

At  the  surface  8,  of  the  sphere  A,  if  «  be  sufficiently 
small,  ^  +  a 

a       c 

where  c  denotes  the  distance  between  the  centres  of  A  and  B, 
and  d 


By  Art.  26,  =  0> 


and,  as  V  is  constant  at  8^  we  have 


In  like  manner, 


The  integral  over  the  sphere  of  infinite  radius  is  zero 
also    V2F=0    throughout  the  field.     Hence 


and 


If  the  sphere  ^4  were  alone  in  the  field,  the  expression 
above  would  ^  become  ^—  •  Similarly,  if  B  were  alone,  it 
would  be  -~  •  Hence  the  energy  due  to  the  mutual  action 


of  the  two  spheres  is  -J-?« 
kc 


130  Dielectric*. 

232.  Force  between  Electrified  Particles.—  If  W 

denote  the  energy  due  to  the  mutual  action  of  two  electrified 
particles,  by  Art.  231  we  have 


where  r  denotes  the  distance  between  them.     Hence,  if  F  be 
the  mutual  force  which  they  exercise  on  one  another, 

dW     I  e,e, 

F=  ~  Wt~ 

Accordingly,  the  force  between  two  electric  particles  acts 
in  the  line  between  them,  and  varies  directly  as  the  product 
of  the  quantities  of  electricity  and  inversely  as  the  square  of 
the  distance. 

Also,  by  (7),  Art.  230,  the  electromotive  intensity  due  to 
an  electric  particle  is  equal  to  the  force  which  it  exercises  on 
the  unit  of  electricity. 

233.  Irrotational  Distribution  of  Electromotive 
Intensity.  —  The  components  X,  Y,  Z  of  the  electromotive 
intensity,  due  to  a  permanent  statical  distribution  of  elec- 
tricity, must  be  the  differential  coefficients  of  an  acyclic 
function  of  the  coordinates. 

For,  if  we  draw  any  closed  circuit  and  suppose  it  occupied 
by  a  conducting  wire, 


taken  round  the  circuit,  must  be  zero,  as  otherwise  a  perma- 
nent electric  current  would  be  set  up  in  the  wire  without  any 
expenditure  of  energy,  which  is  impossible. 

Hence    J  (Xdz  +  Ydy  +  Zdz)     between  two  points  must 
be  independent  of  the  path,  and  therefore 

X<la>  +  Ytly  +  Zds  =  -  dV, 
and  V  must  be  acyclic. 


Distribution  of  Electricity  on  Conductors.  131 

234.  Distribution  of  Electricity  on  Conductors.— 

If  a  conductor  be  in  electric  equilibrium,  there  can  be  no 
electromotive  force  acting  in  it,  and  therefore  the  potential 
is  constant  throughout.  In  the  surrounding  dielectric, 

47T/  =  -  k  (~,  &c., 

and,  accordingly,  from  (5)  we  have  V2  V  =  0.  The  poten- 
tial V  is  therefore  determined  in  the  same  manner  as  on 
the  hypothesis  of  action  at  a  distance. 

The  charge  on  a  conductor  is  /(//*  +  tncj  +  nlb)dS;  and, 
by  (1),  Art.  225,  this  is  equal  to 

-T-\^d8> 

47rJ  dv 

where  D  and  v  are  both  drawn  into  the  dielectric  surrounding 
the  conductor. 

{  dV 
Hence,  if  the  total  charge  be  given,  so  also  is      -—  dS. 

235.  Conditions  at  Boundary  between  two  Dielec- 
trics.— If  two  dielectrics,  whose  specific  inductive  capacities 
are  ki  and  k^  be  in  contact,  at  the  boundary  between  them 
in  passing  from  one  to  the  other,  Fis  continuous,  as  otherwise 
the  electromotive  intensity  perpendicular  to  the  boundary 
would  be  infinite. 

Again,  the  normal  component  of  the  displacement  must 
be  the  same  in  one  medium  as  in  the  other.  To  prove  this, 
let  us  suppose  two  small  tubes  of  induction  resting  on  the 
same  element  of  the  boundary  surface  and  drawn  one  in  each 
medium.  Let  A  and  D2  denote  the  displacements,  Si  and  22 
orthogonal  sections  of  the  tubes  drawn  close  to  the  boundary 
surface  6T,  and  fa  and  fa  the  angles  between  the  lines  of 
displacement  and  the  normal  to  S.  Then,  by  Art.  228,  we 
have  DiSi  =  D2S2 ;  but  Si  =  f/»Scosi/>i,  22  =  dS  cos  fa,  and 
therefore  DI  cos  fa  =  Dz  cos  fa. 

Thdljonditions  stated  above  give  the  equations 


K  2 


132  Dielectric*. 

If  the  positive  direction  be  that  of  the  normal  drawn 
into  the  medium  whose  inductive  capacity  is  ki,  the  second 
equation  above  may  be  written  /u  JV"i  =  ktNt  ;  whence 


(11) 


If  we  suppose  k2  to  be  greater  than  A'i,  we  see  that  a 
dielectric  of  greater  inductive  capacity,  relatively  to  one  of 
less,  behaves  like  a  conductor  on  which  there  is  a  charge  of 

7.       _      /. 

density      *    .  1  JV2.     In  the  case  of  a  conductor,  we  must 
4irki 

suppose  kz  infinite,  then  from  (10)  Nz  =  0.  In  what  precedes, 
Ni  and  N2  denote  the  components  of  electromotive  intensity 
normal  to  the  boundary. 

236.  Attraction  on  Dielectric  in  Field  of  Force.  — 

If  a  body  composed  of  dielectric  material  be  placed  in  a 
medium  of  different  specific  inductive  capacity,  the  body  in 
general  behaves  like  a  conductor  in  tending  to  move. 

To  see  the  reason  of  this  we  must  remember  that,  in 
general,  if  a  conductor  or  a  dielectric  of  different  inductive 
capacity  be  introduced  into  a  medium  occupying  a  field  of 
force,  the  total  energy  of  the  field  is  altered  ;  and,  unless  the 
field  be  uniform,  the  alteration  is  different  according  to  the 
part  of  the  field  into  which  the  conductor  or  dielectric  is 
introduced. 

If  a  small  change  in  the  position  of  the  conductor 
diminishes  the  total  energy  of  the  field,  the  conductor  will 
have  a  tendency  to  move  in  the  direction,  producing  a 
change  of  position  whereby  the  total  energy  of  the  field  is 
diminished. 

The  same  thing  holds  good  in  the  case  of  a  body  com- 
posed of  dielectric  material  differing  in  inductive  capacity 
from  the  medium  by  which  the  field  of  force  is  occupied. 

237.  Crystalline  Dielectric.  —  In  a  crystalline,  or 
anisotropic,  dielectric  different  directions  differ  in  their 
electric  properties,  and  the  electromotive  force  is  not 
necessarily  co-directional  with  the  displacement. 


Crystalline  Dielectric.  133 

In  this  case,  the  components  of  the  one  are  linear 
functions  of  those  of  the  other,  so  that  we  have 

47r/  =  knX  +  k19Y  +  kl3Z,  \ 

4-n-g  =  knX  +  knY  +  k23Z,  I  (12) 

47rh  =  knX  +  #3,  F  +  A-sa^.  J 

If  there  be  a  function  U  of  the  components  of  force, 
representing  per  unit  of  volume  the  energy  due  to  the 
displacement,  we  have 

§U  =  X$f  +  YSg  +  ZBh.  (  1  3) 

Substituting  from  (12)  for  S/,  &o.,  in  (13),  and  arranging, 
we  get 


but  8^.81.8^ 

dX  dy  <fc 

and  tlierefore 

fiyi  =  7t'12,        /l*32   =  /»'23>        "%1    =  »13  > 

and 


+  2knYZ+  2/U3  XZ;          (14) 
also, 

rfZT-  rf«7  rftT 

/=^'     ^  =  ^T'     A'^' 

By  transformation  of  coordinates,  8-7r?7  can  be  reduced 
to  the  form 


Wlien  Z7"  is  reduced  to  this  form,  the  coordinate  axes  are 
the  principal  axes  of  electric  displacement,  and  /Cj,  #2>  /*3  denote 
the  principal  inductive  capacities  of  the  dielectric. 


134  Dielectric*. 

For  the  components   of   electric  displacement  we 
then,  the  equations 

4irf=/nX,     4ir(/  =  /,-2Y,     4ir/i  =  k3Z.  (16) 

If  we  take  any  point  P  of  the  dielectric  as  origin  and  draw 
the  ellipsoid  whose  equation  referred  to  the  principal  axes  is 


it  is  plain  that  if  we  draw  a  line  through  P  in  the  direction 
of  the  electromotive  intensity,  and  draw  a  tangent  plane  to 
the  ellipsoid  at  the  point  in  which  it  is  met  by  this  line,  the 
perpendicular  on  this  tangent  plane  is  in  the  direction  of 
the  electric  displacement. 

238.  Differential  Equation  for  Potential  in  Crys- 
talline Medium.  —  If  we  express  the  principal  components 
of  displacement  in  terms  of  the  electromotive  intensity  by  (16), 
equation  (5)  becomes 

.  dX      ,  dY      ,  dZ 

*•*  +*3jr  +  *S5-0' 

and  therefore 


239.  Distribution  of  Electricity  on  Conductors.— 

As  there  is  no  electromotive  intensity  in  the  substance  of  a 
conductor  in  electric  equilibrium,  V  must  be  constant  at  the 
surface. 

In  the  dielectric  outside  the  surface,  V  must  satisfy  the 
equation 


Also,  the  product  of  V  and  its  differential  coefficient 
integrated  over  a  sphere  of  infinite  radius  must  vanish. 

This  appears  from  the  consideration  that  If  +  mg  +  nh 
integrated  over  a  sphere  of  infinite  radius  is  finite.  Hence, 


Distribution  of  Electricity  on  Conductors.  13& 

if  R  denote  the  radius  of  the  sphere,  /  must  be  of  the  order 
•jp ;  but  /,  g,  h  are  of  the  same  order  as  the  differential 
coefficients  of  F.  Accordingly,  V  is  of  the  order  -^,  and 
V  — ,  &c.,  are  of  the  order  -=j- 

Finally,  if  the  charge  on  each  conductor  be  assigned, 

.  tdV      ,      dV  dV\ 

kl  I  —r-  +  #8*»  —p-  +  fan  ——    do 
dx  dy  dz  j 

is  given  for  each  conductor. 

There  is  only  one  function  Fwhich  satisfies  these  conditions. 

If  there  were  two,  let  $  be  the  difference  between  them. 
Take  the  expression 


df/ 1 

and  integrate  it  by  parts  throughout  the  whole  of  space — 
the  first  term  with  respect  to  x,  the  second  with  repect  to  ?/, 
and  the  third  with  respect  to  z ;  then  we  get 


From  what  precedes,  it  is  plain  that  each  term  on  the  right- 
hand  side  of  this  equation  is  zero  ;  and,  as  k},  k2j  and  k3  are 
always  positive,  we  have 

dj >  =  d±  =  d±  = 

dx      dy      dz 

and  therefore  $  is  constant,  and  consequently  zero  for  the 
whole  of  space. 


136  Dielectric*. 

240.   Energy  expressed  as  Surface  Integral. — If  V 

denote  the  potential,  and  JFthe  energy  due  to  the  electric 
displacement,  by  an  integration  similar  to  that  employed  in 
the  last  Article,  by  (14),  Art.  236,  we  obtain 


Hence,  by  (16)  and  (17),  we  have 

2  W  =  2  /  V(lf  +  my  +  nh)  dS.  (18) 

Since  V  is  constant  at  the  surface  of  each  conductor,  nnd 
since  /  (If  +  nig  +  nh)  dS  denotes  the  total  charge  on  the 
conductor,  equation  (18)  may  be  written 

11W  =  2>F.  (19) 

241.  Energy  due  to  Electrified  Particle  in  Electric 

Field. — Let  us  suppose  the  field  to  be  due  to  a  single  con- 
ductor, whose  surface  may  be  denoted  by  Si,  on  which  there 
is  a  charge  <v  Let  a  conductor,  whose  surface  may  be  denoted 
by  S2,  on  which  there  is  a  charge  e2t  be  introduced  into  the 
field.  Let  V  denote  the  potential  at  any  part  of  the  field 
before  the  introduction  of  $2,  and  V  +  v  the  potential  after- 
wards; also,  let  JPand  W  +  IP  denote  the  total  energy  of 
the  field  before  and  after  the  introduction  of  Sz.  Then  we 
have 

2 W  =  Vielt     2(W  +  tc)  =  ( F,  +  ri)  el  +  ( K2  +  r») ft. 

If  we  now  suppose  &  and  ft  to  be  infinitely  small,  so  also 
is  t>,  and  the  term  i\et  is  of  the  second  order,  and  therefore 
negligible.  Hence  we  have 


Energy  in  Electric  Field.  137 

On  the  hypothesis  that  &  and  e%  are  infinitely  small,  we 
have     Vie*  =  v\e\ ;    for,  if  we  integrate  the  expression 


K- 


dV  dv      1    dV  dv      1    dV  dv\ 
>l  ~7~  T"  +    -  ~T~   ~r  4    3  ~7T   T  ) 


!    since  F'and  v  each  satisfy  equation  (17),  we  get 


(20) 
!  j     \       oo?  «//  «c  y  \  / 

At  the  surface  Si  the  potential  V  is  constant,  and 


dx          ~  d;/ 

is  zero,  since  the  introduction  of  S2  does  not  alter  the  total 
charge  on  Si.  Again,  before  the  introduction  of  the  con- 
ductor Sz  the  total  charge  on  the  space  surface  82  was  zero, 
and  therefore 


K 


„  dv         ,    dv        7   dv 

«*i  ~r  +  m'^  T  +  nlc*  -j 
1  dx  dy  dz 


Hence,  as  Sz  is  infinitely  small, 

dv  dv        7  dv 

1-  WKZ  —  +  nka  — 

dx  at/  dz 

cannot  differ  from  -  4vr  F2e2  by  more  than  an  infinitely  small 
quantity  of  the  second  order.  Accordingly  the  left-hand  side 
of  (20)  is  equal  to  -  4?r  Fift. 

Again,  as  V+v  and  Fare  each  constant  at  Si,  so  also  is  i?, 
and  therefore 


138  Dielectrics. 

Also,  at  the  surface  &  we  have 


J( 


,  dV        ,    dV         ,    tfV 

//U  —    +  W/,'2  —r-     4     Ufa  —— 

ax  ay  dz 


and,  since  V+  v  is  constant,  and  Fcan  vary  only  by  an  infi- 
nitely small  quantity,  the  variation  of  v  must  be  infinitely 
small,  and 

v  (  Iki  -7-  +  w/i-j  -r-  +  nks  —j-  }  dSz, 
}    \      dx  di/  ftz  J 

taken  over  the  infinitely  small  surface  Si,  cannot  differ  from 
zero  by  more  than  an  infinitely  small  quantity  of  the  second 
order.  Accordingly  the  right-hand  side  of  (20)  is  equal  to 


We  have,  then,    F2?2  =  rid  ;    and  therefore    2w 
Hence,  by  bringing  an  electric  particle  et  to  a  point  where 
the  potential  of  the  field  is  Fa,  the  energy  produced  is  F2^. 

It  is  obvious  that  the  result  arrived  at  above  can  be 
extended  to  an  electric  field  due  to  any  number  of  conduc- 
tors, so  that  in  general  Vc  denotes  the  energy  produced  by 
bringing  a  small  body  having  a  charge  of  electricity  e  to  a 
point  where  the  potential  is  V. 

If,  instead  of  supposing  a  small  charged  conductor  intro- 
duced into  the  field,  we  suppose  the  charge  on  one  of  the 
conductors  St,  already  in  the  field,  increased  by  the  amount  Set, 
we  can  show  in  a  manner  similar  to  that  employed  above  that 
S  IF,  the  increase  of  energy,  is  given  by  the  equation 


In  fact, 


and  2SJT=  F,&>,  +  ^ST,  +  csSF2  +  &c.  ; 

but  Pi  8*  =  e,g  F,  +  r,8  F,  +  *3S  F,  +  &c., 

as  may  be  shown  in  the  following  manner. 


System  of  Charged  Conductors.  139 

Let  the  original  potential  at  any  point  of  the  field  be 
denoted  by  V,  and  the  increase  of  potential  due  to  the  intro- 
duction of  &?i  by  v,  then,  by  an  integration  similar  to  that 
already  employed,  we  have 


+  k,n         dSl  +  dS2  +  &c. 


d_V_        f    dV  dV\(  \ 

dx  dy  dz  J  \  ') 

At  each  of  the  conductors  Fis  constant,  and  also  V+  r,  and 
therefore  v. 

Again,  at  each  conductor,  except  the  first, 

dv  dv^ 

dy       sH  dz, 

is  zero,  and  at  the  first  this  integral  is   -  4ir<fct. 
Also,  at  each  conductor, 

dZ.  +  jfm  (—  +  kn  <IV\ 


(Y      dv  v*v-  ,.„  , 

JV  '  Tx  +  '*m~-+  »W--J( 


hence  the  equation  above  becomes 

4?r  ViSei  =  4ir  (e^^  +  e-,rz 
that  is, 

(21) 

Hence  we  obtain 

$W=  Vfo,  (22) 

and  therefore  we  conclude  that  under  any  circumstances  the 
energy  produced  by  bringing  a  small  quantity  of  electricity  e 
to  a  point  where  the  potential  is  V  is  denoted  by  Ve. 

242.  System    of  Charged    Conductor*. — It   is  now 

easy  to  see  that,  if  there  be  a  system  of  charged  conductors 
in  a  crystalline  dielectric,  the  equations  which  hold  good 


140  Dielectrics. 

between  the  charges  and  potentials  are  of  the  same  form  as 
those  belonging  to  an  isotropic  medium,  that  is, 

Fi    =  p\\e\  +  pizd  +  piaCa  +  &C., 

V-i  =  puei  +pnt*  +  p™ea  +  &G., 
F3  =  piaei  +  j0z3<?2  +  py*e3  +  &c., 

&c.,  &c. 

In  fact,  every  step  in  the  process  by  which  these  equations 
are  proved  in  Art.  128  holds  good  here. 

For,  from  equation  (16),  it  appears  that  if  each  component 
of  displacement  be  altered  in  the  same  ratio,  so  also  are  the 
differential  coefficients  of  the  potential  and  the  total  dis- 
placement. Accordingly,  if  the  mode  of  distribution  of  the 
displacement  be  assigned,  the  potential  at  any  one  point 
varies  as  the  displacement  to  whicli  it  is  due.  Also  two 
systems  of  displacement  which  are  each  in  equilibrium  may 
be  superposed  without  disturbing  the  equilibrium. 

243.  Force    on     Electric     Particle     in    Electric 
Field. — We  have  seen  that  the  energy  due  to  an  electric 
particle  e  in  an  electric  field  is  Ve. 

If  the  particle  receive  a  displacement  whose  components 
are  &r,  £//,  and  Ss,  the  energy  of  the  field  is  increased  by 

(dV  «       dV  .       dV  *  \ 

<?—£»+  —  Sy  +  -—  S*  . 
\rf<s  dy    •       dz      ) 

This  is  the  work  done  against  the  forces  of  the  field 
which  must  therefore  be 

dV  dV  dV 

~e^    -*7-y>    aud   "'A' 

Accordingly,  the  force  acting  on  an  electric  particle  per  unit 
of  mass  is  the  same  as  the  electromotive  force  of  the  field. 

244.  Potential  due  to  Spherical  Conductor.— If  a 

charged  spherical  conductor  whose  radius  is  a  be  alone  in  the 
field,  the  potential  Vis  constant  at  the  surface  of  the  sphere, 
and  in  the  space  outside  satisfies  equation  (17).  If  we  assume 

A/*I  £  =  z>     \/h  n  =  //,     and     v/^3  £  =  s, 
(17)  becomes         <?V     tfV     <PV 


Force  due  to  Spherical  Conductor.  141 

and,  at  the  surface  of  the  sphere, 

7u£2  +  &„*  +  W  =  a2.  (24) 

We  have  therefore  to  find  a  function  of  £,  »},  and  £  whicli 
satisfies  (23),  and  which  is  constant  when  £,  rj,  £  satisfy  (24). 
This  is  the  same  px-oblem  as  to  find  the  potential  of  an  ellip- 
soidal charged  conductor.  Hence  the  form  of  Fis  given  by 
Ex.  3,  Art.  75. 

If    ki  >  kz  >  /i'3,     we  have 


dx 


(25) 
where  X  is  the  greatest  root  of  the  equation 


r2  +  x^T2  +  x^7"L 

The  constant  C  is  determined  from  the  equation 

dV  dV  dV\ 

?!  —  +  wkz  —  +  nki  — —  j  dS  =  —  4-rre, 
dx  dy  dz  J 

where   e   denotes    the    charge    on    the    surface    S    of   the 
conductor. 

245.    Force   due   to    Spherical    Conductor. — Diffe- 
rentiating (26)  we  obtain 


The  quantity  inside  the  bracket  on  the  right-hand  side 
may  be  denoted  by  — ,  and  we  get 

a\=       PZZ 
d£     X(X2-&2)* 
In  like  manner  we  have 


142  Dielectrics. 

Again, 


accordingly,  if  -X",   7,  Z  denote  tlie   components  of  force, 
we  have 


~^~7*T  * A'-*' 

Y=-liV-  =.°_  ;-    --*-,  -  \ 


"   X 


246.    Force    due   to   Spherical    Particle.—  In   the 

oase  of  a  particle,  a  becomes  infinitely  small,  and  so  also 
do  k  and  //  ;  then 

A'  =  A2  -  /*'  =  A2  -  F, 

and  p*  =  A2  =  f2  +  nj  +  ^- 

Accordingly,  we  have 


If  we  substitute  for  £,  »j,  and  £  in  terms  of  .r,  //,  and  2, 
we  obtain 

Cx  C,j  Cz 

X  =  'k7\^    r=^'   z  =  w> 

where 


Hence  we  conclude  that  the  force  exercised  by  a  spherical 
particle  at  a  point  P  is  not  in  the  direction  of  the  line  joining  P 
to  the  centre  of  the  particle,  and  does  not  vary  inversely  as 
the  square  of  the  distance  of  P  from  the  centre  of  the  sphere. 


Force  fine  to  Spherical  Partick.  143 

From  (16)  and  (27)  we  have 

/=-?l?,    <j  =  —J,    h  =  —3~,         (28) 

where  r  denotes  the  distance  of  P  from  the  origin. 

Hence,  the  direction  at  any  point  of  the  displacement 
due  to  a  spherical  particle  passes  througli  the  centre  of  the 
particle,  but  the  magnitude  of  the  displacement  does  not 
vary  inversely  as  the  square  of  the  distance. 


144  Electromayuelic  'ihconj  of  Light. 


CHAPTER  XII. 


ELKCTKOMAGNET10    THEORY    OF    LIGHT. 


247.  Introductory. — The  electromagnetic  theory  of  light 
cannot  be  considered  part  of  the  theory  of  Attraction ;  but  it 
is  so  intimately  connected  with  the  properties  of  dielectrics, 
and  with  those  of  electricity  and  magnetism  which  have  been 
explained  in  the  foregoing  chapters,  that  some  account  of 
Maxwell's  great  investigations  does  not  seem  out  of  place 
here. 

248.  Energy  of  Current  in  Magnetic  Field.— From 
the  identity  of  the  action  of  an  electric  current  with  that  of 
a  magnetic  shell,  in  Art.  217  it  was  concluded  that  the 
potential  energy  JFof  a  current  in  an  independent  magnetic 
field  is  given  by  the  equation 

JF=  -  tj(fo  4  wb  +  nc)dS.  (1) 

If  i  assume  the  infinitely  small  value  S/,  equation  (1) 
becomes 

8  W  =  -  St  /  (la  +  mb  +  nc)  dS.  (2) 

This  equation  holds  good  whether  the  field  be  independent 
or  not,  as  a  change  in  the  integral  due  to  an  infinitely  small 
value  of  i  must  be  infinitely  small,  and  when  multiplied  by  Si 
becomes  evanescent.  We  cannot,  however,  regard  the  energy 
due  to  the  presence  of  an  electric  current  as  potential,  because 
the  current  is  not  a  permanent  natural  agent  whose  action 
varies  merely  with  its  position.  The  current  may  cease,  and, 
if  so,  its  energy  disappears. 

We  must  therefore  consider  the  energy  due  to  an  electric 
current  as  kinetic. 


Energy  and  Electromotive  Force.  145 

In  a  dj'namical  system,  if  work  be  done  against  the 
natural  motion  of  the  system,  the  energy,  if  potential,  is 
increased,  but  the  energy,  if  kinetic,  is  diminished. 

Hence  we  conclude  that,  if  the  energy  of  an  electric 
current  be  kinetic,  the  expression  for  the  variation  of  energy 
due  to  a  variation  of  i  must  have  the  opposite  sign  from 
that  which  it  would  have  if  the  energy  were  potential. 
Therefore,  if  T  denote  the  kinetic  energy  due  to  the  presence 
of  an  electric  current  in  a  magnetic  field,  we  have 

gr  =  &'/(/«  +  mb  +  no)  dS.  (3) 

dT 

Since    §T  -  —  &',     we  obtain 
di 

l^  =  $(la  +  mb  +  nc)dS.  (4) 

249.  Energy  and  Electromotive  Force. — The  con- 
nexion between  variation  of  energy  and  force  is  given  by 
Lagrange's  Equations,  Dynamics,  Art.  207. 

In  the  present  case  of  the  dynamical  system  consisting 
of  electric  currents  in  a  magnetic  field,  the  position  of  the 
system  is  specified  by  the  geometrical  coordinates  of  the 
various  magnets  and  electric  circuits,  and  in  the  case  of 
each  current,  by  the  distances  along  the  circuit  which  the 
electric  molecules  have  travelled  at  any  time  since  a  definite 
epoch.  If  s  denote  the  distance  along  the  circuit  which  a 

molecule   of    electricity   has  travelled,   its   velocity   is    — . 

dt 

Again,  if  p  denote  the  density  of  the  electricity,  and  a  the 
area  of  a  section  of  the  circuit,  the  quantity  of  electricity 

which  passes  the  section  in  the  unit  of  time  is     pj  — ,     but 
this,  Art.  212,  is  i  the  strength  of  the  current.     Hence, 

ft  Cf       fa          Cs 

idt  =  \     pa  —  dt  =  \     pa  ds  =  iL (s)  -  \L  (s0)} 
<0  JV      dt          J*o 

rt 
since  p  is  constant,  and  <r  a  function  of  s.     Hence,  if       i  dt 

J  'o 


146  Electromagnetic  Theory  of  Light. 

and  *0  be  assigned  so  also  is  *.     Accordingly,  instead  of 
specifying  the  position  of  a  molecule  of  electricity  by  s  we 

may  do  so  by  the  coordinate  »j,  where    TJ  =       i  dt.     Again, 

J  ^0 

since  i  is  uniform  throughout  the  circuit,  >/  is  the  same  for 
all  the  molecules  of  electricity. 

If  now  X',  Y',  Z'  denote  the  components  of  the  total 
electric  force  at  any  point  of  the  circuit,  Lagrange's 
equation  of  motion,  corresponding  to  the  coordinate  i),  is 


dt  <ty     dti 

and  -if  X,  Y,  Z  denote  the  components  of  electromotive 
intensity,  the  corresponding  forces  X",  Y",  Z"  are  given  by 
the  equations 

X."  =  ptrXd*,      Y"  =  p<rYd*t     Z"  =  p<rZ<t*, 
also  dr\  =  ifdt  =  pad*. 

Hen  oe 


From  Art.  212  it  appears  that  when  a  current  is  passing 
the  electromotive  force  is  opposed  by  the  resistance  of  the 
circuit,  so  that  the  generalized  component  of  force  tending 
to  increase  TJ  is  not  E  but  E  -  Ri. 

Again,  the  kinetic  energy  T  does  not  depend  on  »/  but 

i  rp 

on   77   or    i.     Hence    —    is   zero   always,   and   Lagrange's 

equation    of   motion    corresponding  to  the  generalized  co- 
ordinate »j  becomes 


Maxwell's  Theory  of  Light.  147 

This  equation  may  be  written 


If  T  remain  unchanged,  (6)  becomes  Ohm's  equation  (2), 
Art.  212. 

If  T  vary  in  consequence  of  a  change  in  the  electro- 
magnetic field,  the  electromotive  force  keeping  up  the 

current  is  diminished  by   —  —  .     If  this  be  negative,  the 
dt   di 

electromotive  force  is  increased. 

This  property  of  currents  is  abundantly  confirmed  by 
experiment.  It  is  indeed  on  this  property  that  almost  all 
the  modern  applications  of  electricity  depend.  It  was 
originally  discovered  by  observation  ;  but  its  exact  mathe- 
matical expression  as  given  above  is  due  to  Maxwell. 

A  simple  case  of  this  phenomenon  is  exhibited  if  two* 
currents  which  repel  one  another  be  made  to  approach. 
An  additional  electromotive  force  is  then  developed  in  each 
circuit  tending  to  increase  the  current. 

This  still  holds  good  if  E  be  originally  zero  in  one  circuit. 
A  current  is  then  produced  tending  to  oppose  the  motion. 
Such  currents  are  called  '  induction  currents.'  It  is  on  their 
existence  that  the  whole  theory  of  light  as  an  electromagnetic 
phenomenon  depends. 

The  general  principle  exemplified  in  the  production  of 
induction  currents  may  be  expressed  by  the  statement 

In  any  circuit  contained  in  an  electromagnetic  field  every 
variation  in  the  strength  of  the  field  produces  an  electromotive 
force  which  tends  to  diminish  the  variation. 

250.  Maxwell's  Theory  of  Light.  —  Maxwell  supposes 
the  entire  universe  to  be  filled  with  a  dielectric  called  the 
lumiuiferous  ether. 

If  there  be  a  variable  electric  displacement  iu  any  part  of 
this  dielectric,  the  variation  of  the  displacement  constitutes  an 
electric  current  which  produces  an  electromagnetic  field.  The 
variation  of  the  current  produces  an  electromotive  force  in  all 

L2 


148  Electromagnetic  Theory  of  Lii/Jit. 

the  surrounding  circuits.  These  electromotive  forces  produce 
currents  which  again  give  rise  to  other  electromotive  forces 
and  currents,  and  so  the  original  variable  displacement  is 
propagated  througli  space. 

In  the  case  of  light,  the  original  displacement  is  vibratory  ; 
that  is,  it  begins  in  a  certain  direction,  increases  in  that 
direction  up  to  a  certain  amount,  and  afterwards  takes  place 
in  the  opposite  direction  till  it  reaches  the  same  amount  as 
before,  only  in  the  opposite  direction,  when  it  is  again 
reversed  ;  and  this  process  is  repeated  so  long  as  the  light 
remains  steady. 

The  displacement  is  therefore  quantitatively  the  same  as 
the  distance  moved  through  by  a  vibrating  particle,  and  may 
be  represented  by  an  expression  of  the  form 

a  sin  —  t. 

T 

The  whole  phenomenon  may  therefore  be  termed  an 
electric  vibration ;  and,  when  propagated  through  space, 
may  be  called  an  electric  wave. 

From  the  results  already  arrived  at,  the  laws  which 
govern  this  propagation  may  be  deduced,  as  will  be  shown 
in  the  following  Articles. 

In  the  study  of  an  electric  vibration  we  have  to  do  with 
five  vector  quantities :  the  displacement,  the  electromotive 
intensity,  the  current  intensity,  the  magnetic  force,  and 
the  magnetic  induction. 

Let 

/,  g,  h  denote  the  components  of  electric  displacement ; 

X,  Y,  Z  those  of  electromotive  intensity  ; 

*/,  v,  w  those  of  current  intensity ; 

a,  /3,  7  those  of  magnetic  force ; 

a,  b,  c  those  of  magnetic  induction. 

We  seek  to  determine  differential  equations  for  the  com- 
ponents of  one  of  the  vectors  which  will  enable  us  to  arrive 
at  the  laws  of  its  propagation. 


Magnetic  Induction  and  Electromotive  Intensity.        149 

251.  Magnetic  Induction  and  Electromotive  In- 
tensity.— We  have  seen,  Art.  249,  that  for  any  circuit  s, 
if  X,  Y)  Z  denote  the  components  of  electromotive  intensity 
due  to  current  induction, 


r       vT"      9  r}  \     J  /lr\ 

,,      ,.       -  -  ^  -r-  +  .r  — -  +  Z  —  }ds.  (7) 

at    dt      J  \     f/s          </s          fltey 

If  we  imagine  a  surface-sheet  /S  filling  up  the  circuit  s, 
by  Stokes's  theorem,  Art.  192,  the  right-hand  side  of  (7)  is 
equal  to 

n.fdz    dY\       \ 

\]l[j T-  )  +  &c.    rfiS'; 

J  (  V<?y     rfs  /        ) 

and,  by  (4), 

dT      f 

—  =    (la  +  mb  +  nc)  dS. 

Hence, 


—    (la  +  mb  +  nc)  dS 


JdT     dZ\         fdZ     dX        fdX      rfF\)   , 

\-j  ---  T  )  +  m  I-,  ---  3-  +  'M  —j  ---  r  it  <*&• 
\dz       (I//  J         \dx       dz          \di/       ds  J) 

In  the  case  of  an  electric  disturbance  in  a  continuous 
medium,  this  equation  holds  good  for  every  circuit  which 
can  be  drawn  ;  and  therefore  we  have 

da_dY_dZ      db  _  dZ  _  dX      clc_  _  dX  _  dY 
~di~~dz~dy*     df.~dx~~az'     di  ~  ~dy  ~  dx  '      (' 

252.   Current  Intensity  and   Magnetic  Force.—  If 

we  suppose  a  surface-sheet  S  drawn  in  the  dielectric,  the 
total  current  passing  across  it  is  denoted  by 

/  (In  +  mv  +  nw)  dS. 

The  line  integral  of  the  magnetic  force,  taken  round  a 
circuit  s,  bounding  the  surface  S,  is  due  altogether  to  the 
current  passing  across  /S',  since  for  magnetic  forces  due  to 


150  Electromagnetic  Theory  of  Light. 

currents  not  embraced  by  s  this  line  integral  is  zero.  Hence, 
by  Art.  215,  we  have 

r  /    j*,          j.,,          A*  \ 

</| 

3  _  da 

"      dy 

and,  since  this  equation  holds  good  for  every  circuit  and 
corresponding  surface  which  can  be  drawn  in  the  medium, 
we  have 

dy      dQ  (fa      dy        .  dQ       da          ._. 

4iru  =  -7-  -  -£-,     4irv  =  —  -  -f-9     4irw  =  -£-  -  —  •       (9) 
dy      dz  dz      dx  dx      dy 

253.  Relation     between     Magnetic     Force     and 
Induction.  — We   have   seen,    Art.  201,   that   in   a   body 
magnetically    isotropic,   in    which    there    is    no    permanent 
magnetism,  the  components  of  magnetic  induction  are  in  a 
constant  ratio  to  those  of  magnetic  force,  so  that 

a  =  zja,     b  =  w/9,     c  =  zay.  (10) 

In  what  follows,  we  shall  always  suppose  the  medium  to 
be  magnetically  isotropic. 

254.  Equations  of  the  Electromagnetic  Field  and 
of  Propagation  of  Disturbance. — In  the  general  case  of 
a  dielectric  electrically  crystalline,  collecting  the  results  given 
by  (16),  Art.  237,  by  Art,  227,  and  by  (9),  (10),  and  (8)  of  the 
present  Chapter,  we  have  the  following  group  of  equations 
holding  good  in  the  electromagnetic  field  : — 


da 


4n/-jr,x, 

4irg-- 

=  Ktl 

4- 

rh  =  & 

•$••• 

(11) 

S.i 

'•  * 

-*, 

dh 
di 

- 

?r. 

(12) 

§rfy 

dy 

-*'  4™ 

da 

dy 
dx1 

4mc 

-«. 
dx 

da 

(13) 

a  =  zsa 

,     b  = 

w/3, 

c  = 

Vy. 

(14) 

dY 
~dz 

dZ     db 

dy  *     dt 

dZ 

dx 

dX 

dc 
di 

-' 

dX 
dy   ~ 

dY 

dx  ' 

(15) 

Solution  of  Equation  of  Propagation.  151 

By  differentiation  from  (12)  and  by  (13),  &c.,  we  have 


that  is, 

dY 


dt  \d{i      dz        «  \  at/  <(t      dz 

H*.((!x  _<*¥}_  d  (<tz  _ 

ts\dy\  di/       dx  )      'dz  \  dv 


y 
If  we  assume 


we  get 


In  the  case  of  an  isotropic  medium, 

A*-  =  IT-  =  6'2  -  F2, 
and  we  have 


255.  Solution     of    Equation     of    Propagation.  — 

Equations  (16)  and  (17)  are  very  general  in  their  character; 
and  to  obtain  a  solution  suitable  for  the  present  investigation 
we  must  consider  some  of  the  characteristics  of  a  ray  of  light. 
When  light  emanating  from  a  point  passes  through  a 
lens  whose  focus  is  at  the  luminous  point,  a  cylindrical 
beam  is  obtained  whose  parallel  sections  are  planes  having 
similar  characteristics  in  reference  to  the  beam.  We  may 
assume  therefore  that  one  of  the  vibrations  which  constitutes 
the  light  is  propagated  so  that  its  direction  remains  parallel 


152  Electromagnetic  Theory  of  Light. 

to  a  line  fixed  in  space,  and  that  at  all  points  of  a  section  of 
the  beam  parallel  to  a  certain  definite  direction  the  vibrations 
are  in  parallel  directions,  and  in  a  similar  state  or  phase. 
Consequently,  if  D  denote  one  of  the  displacements  whose 
vibrations  constitute  the  light,  the  direction  of  D  is  constant, 
and  the  direction  in  which  D  is  propagated  through  space  is 
also  constant. 

If  X,  JJL,  v  denote  the  direction-cosines  of  D,  we  may  there- 
fore assume  that  X,  ft,  v  are  constant  for  all  positions  of  Dy 
and  we  have 


Equation  (17)  assumes  its  simplest  form  when  /is  a  function 
of  one  coordinate;  and,  as  a  particular  case  of  (17),  we  may 
write 

%-"& 

By  Art.  53,  the  solution  of  (18)  is 


This  expression  for/  indicates  a  variable  quantity  whose 
magnitude  at  a  given  point  is  continually  altering  and 
whose  every  state  or  phase  advances  through  space  in  the 
direction  of  z  with  a  velocity  V. 

This  is  obvious,  because 

${F(/  +  O-(*  +  O)  =<t>(Vt-z)t    provided     fT-s'; 

and,  accordingly,  the  value  of  /  at  the  point  z  at  the  time 
t  is  the  same  as  the  value  of  /  at  the  point  z  +  z  at  the 
time  t  +  t'. 

If  $  be  a  periodic  function,  the  disturbance  in  the  medium 
is  called  a  wave. 

The  distance  between  two  points  on  the  line  of  propaga- 
gation  at  which  the  disturbance  is  in  the  same  state  is  called 
the  wave-length. 

If  T  denote  the  period  of  the  disturbance,  that  is,  the 
length  of  time  in  which  the  disturbance  at  a  fixed  point  P 


Direction  of  Displacement  in  Isotropic  Medium.        153 

passes  through  all  its  phases  and  returns  to  its  original  state, 
the  wave-length  is  equal  to  FT.  For,  during  the  period  T, 
the  original  disturbance  reaches  a  point  Q  whose  distance 
from  P  is  VT,  and  the  disturbance  at  P  has  during  the  same 
time  returned  to  its  original  state.  Hence,  at  the  end  of  the 
period  r  the  disturbance  at  Q  is  in  the  same  state  or  phase  as 
that  in  which  it  is  at  P,  and  consequently  PQ  is  a  wave-length. 

When  a  wave  is  passing  through  a  medium,  the  locus  of 
the  points  at  which  the  disturbance  is  in  the  same  phase  is 
called  the  wave-front. 

If  the  wave-front  be  a  plane  parallel  to  a  plane  fixed  in 
space,  the  wave  is  called  a  plane  wave. 

In  the  case  of  a  plane  wave,  the  direction  of  propagation 
is  the  normal  to  the  wave-front,  and  the  direction  of  vibration 
is  parallel  to  a  line  fixed  in  space. 

We  can  now  generalize  the  solution  of  (18)  so  as  to  satisfy 
(17),  and  to  represent  the  propagation  of  a  plane  wave  of 
electric  displacement  through  the  dielectric. 

We  may  assume 

/=  XZ),  g  =  ^D,  h  =  vl),  D=<t>\Vt-  (Ix  +  my  +  ws)}  ,     (19) 

where  /,  m,  n  denote  the  direction-cosines  of  a  line  fixed  in 
space. 

Then     V2D  =  (/'  +  mz  +  n2)<f>"  =  <j>",     and 


and,  accordingly,  (J7)  and  the  corresponding  equations  for 
g  and  h  are  satisfied,  also  D  represents  the  displacement  in  a 
plane  wave  whose  line  of  propagation  is  in  the  direction  /,  m,  n. 

256.  Direction  of  Displacement  in  Isotropic 
Medium.  —  The  expressions  for  ^,  &c.,  given  by  ^12) 
and  (13),  show  that 


±W^dg     dh\ 

dt  \dx      dt/      dz ) 


154  Electromagnetic  Theory  of  Light. 

If  there  be  an  electric  displacement  in  the  medium  before 
the  disturbance  takes  place,  by  (5),  Art.  228, 

£+4  +  ^-0.  (20) 

dx      dy     dz 

Hence  this  equation  always  holds  good ;  but 
/=A0{F* -(&  +  »*//  + MS)}, 

with  corresponding  equations  for  g  and  /<,  and  therefore 
by  (20), 

(A/  +  fim  +  vn)<f>'  =  0, 
and  accordingly 

A/  +  fjLtn  +  vn  =  0, 

and  we  learn  that  in  a  plane  wave  the  disturbance  is  per- 
pendicular to  the  wave-normal,  and  is  therefore  in  the 
wave-front. 

This  is  often  expressed  by  saying  that  the  disturbance 
is  in  the  plane  of  the  wave. 

257.  Magnetic   Force   in   Isotropic   Medium. —By 

(14),  &c.,  we  have 


dt  ~  -a  (It 


Integrating  with  respect  to  /*,  we  obtain 

a  =  4ir  V(mv  -  nfji)D  +  constant. 

As  we  are  concerned  only  with  the  magnetic  force  due  to 
the  disturbance,  the  constant  may  be  uegle<3ted,  and  we  have 

a  =  4irVD(mv-  Wju),    \ 

-  /v),  (21) 

-  m\).  J 


Crystalline  Medium. 


Hence  the  magnetic  force  is  in  the  plane  of  the  wave  and 
perpendicular  to  the  displacement,  and  its  magnitude  H  i& 
given  by  the  equation 

H  =  4-rrVD.  (22) 

258.  Crystalline  Medium.— The  solution  found,  Art, 
255,  for  (17)  holds  good  for  (16)  with  some  modifications. 

In  fact,  if  we  assume  equations  (19)  and  substitute  in  (16) 
and  the  two  corresponding  equations,  we  get 

F2A  =  Az\  -  l(Azl\  +  £zmfj.  +  Clnv),  ] 

Vzfi  =  .5V  -  m  (Azl\  +  Wmp  +  C"W),  I      (23) 

F2v  =  C-v  -  n  (A'l\  +  Rnifi  +  Cznv).  J 

In  the  solution  of  (17)  V  is  given,  and  we  find  that  A,  ju,  v 
are  indeterminate,  provided  they  fulfil  the  condition 

/A  +  nifj.  +  vn  =  0. 

In  the  present  case,  when  /,  m,  n  are  given,  equations  (23) 
determine  F2  and  A,  p,  v.  If  we  eliminate  A,  /u,  v  from  (23), 
we  get  a  cubic  equation  to  determine  F"2.  The  absolute 
term  of  this  equation  is 


If  we  call  this  determinant  Q,  we  have 
lz-l 


I 


tn          n 


m~  -  1 


m 


n9-! 


lz-l      m* 


I2         mz     n*  -  1 


0  mz  nz 
0  w2-!  «2 
0  mz  nz-l 


156  Electromagnetic  Theory  of  Light. 

Hence  one  value  of  V1  is  zero.    The  corresponding  values 
of  X,  fji,  v  are  proportional  to 


but  they  have  no  physical  import,  as  the  displacement  to 
which  they  belong  is  not  propagated  through  the  dielectric. 

For  each  of  the  values  of  V*  which  are  not  zero  there  is 
a  corresponding  set  of  values  of  X,  /u,  v,  indicating  two  possible 
directions  of  displacement  with  a  given  wave-front. 

If  we  multiply  the  first  of  equations  (23)  by  /,  the  second 
by  m,  and  the  third  by  n,  and  add,  we  get 


F'(/X  +  mn  +  nv)  =  (^2/X  +  ffmfjL  +  C*vn)(l  -I1-  w2  -  M')  =  0. 

Hence, 

l\  +  mfi  +  nv  =  0,  (24) 

and  we  infer  that  the  two  directions  of  displacement  corre- 
sponding to  a  given  plane  wave-front  lie  in  the  plane  of  the 
wave. 

If  we  multiply  the  first  of  equations  (23)  by  X,  the  second 
by  fji,  the  third  by  v,  and  add,  we  get 


=  A*X*  +  By  +  <?V  -  (A*  IX  +  Knifi  +  C*nv)(l\  +  MH  +  «w), 
and  therefore,  by  (24),  we  have 

F2  =  A*X*  +  £y  +  <?  V.  (25) 

If  Xi,  /ai,  i'j  ;  Xj,  /tij,  i/2  denote  the  direction-cosines  of 
the  two  displacements  perpendicular  to  /,  m,  n,  and  V\ 
and  Vi  the  corresponding  velocities  of  propagation,  we  have 

(A*  -  V?}  X:  =  1(A*IX,  +  £'»!/«,  +  C'nvi), 

with  two  corresponding  equations. 

Multiplying  the  first  by  X,,  the  second  by  /ua,  the  third 
by  i/j  and  adding,  since  /Xa  +  m^  +  nvt  =  0,  we  get 

F,2  (A,X2 


Wave- Surf  ace.  157 

In  like  manner,  we  have 

F22(\|A2  +  ^tijU2  +  VlVz)  =  -42AiA2  +  B^fJLifJLz  +  CZVi\'z. 

Consequently,  unless   Fi  =  F"2,    we  obtain 

A,A2  +  fruz  +  i/ii/2  =  0,  (26) 

^2A,A2  +  IPnifti  +  <?Vn>2  =  0.  (27) 

Hence  we  learn  that  the  two  directions  of  displacement 
belonging  to  the  same  wave-plane  are  perpendicular  to  each 
other  in  the  plane  of  the  wave,  and  are  also  conjugate  in  the 
ellipsoid  whose  equation  is 

-4V  +  BY  +  Cz*2  =  constant. 

Since  these  two  directions  are  perpendicular  and  conjugate 
to  each  other,  they  are  axes  of  the  section  of  this  ellipsoid 
made  by  the  wave-plane. 

259.  "Wave  -  Surface. —  If    a    vibratory    disturbance 
emanate    from    a   point    0   and   spread    in    all    directions 
through  a  medium   surrounding  0,  the  locus  of  points  at 
which  at  any  time  the  disturbance  is  in  the  same  state  or 
phase  is  called  the  wave-surface. 

If  the  medium  surrounding  0  be  isotropic,  the  disturbance 
is  propagated  with  equal  volocities  in  all  directions,  and  the 
wave-surface  is  a  sphere  having  0  as  centre. 

If  the  medium  be  not  isotropic,  we  may  suppose  a  number 
of  small  plane  waves  to  start  simultaneously  from  0  in  all 
possible  directions.  Each  of  these  is  propagated  with  a 
velocity  corresponding  to  the  direction  of  its  normal.  The 
envelope  at  any  time  of  all  these  plane  wave-fronts  is  the 
wave-surface  corresponding  to  the  medium. 

260.  Construction  for  Wave-Surface  of  Crystalline 
Medium. — When  an  electric  disturbance  takes  place  in  a 
crystalline  medium,  the  equations  of  Art.  258  enable  us  to 
give    a    construction   by  which   the  wave-surface  may  be 
obtained. 


158  Electromagnetic  Theory  of  Light. 

If  we  take  any  period  of  time  tf,,  and  assume 

a  =  Atlt     b  =  Btly     c  =  Ctlt 
the  ellipsoid,  whose  equation  is 

xz  .  //>      s* 


is  that  which  Fresnel  called  the  '  ellipsoid  of  elasticity,'  and 
may  be  termed  Fresnel's  ellipsoid. 

Let  an  electric  disturbance  emanate  from  the  centre  0  of 
this  ellipsoid,  and  let  OP  be  the  direction  of  the  electric  dis- 
placement in  a  plane  wave  due  to  the  disturbance.  Draw  a 
tangent  plane  to  Fresnel's  ellipsoid  perpendicular  to  OP  ; 
let  Q  be  its  point  of  contact,  and  draw  OP"  perpendicular  to 
the  plane  POQ. 

Then  OT  and  OQ  are  conjugate;  and,  being  also  at 
right  angles  to  each  other,  are  the  axes  of  the  section  of 
Fresnel's  ellipsoid. 

Let  the  direction-cosines  of  OP,  OT,  and  OQ  be  denoted 
by  A|,  pi,  vi  ;  A2,  juj,  v2  ;  A',  fS,  v  ;  then  Au  /«„  1-1  are  proportional 
to 

A'        L  •      v 


and  therefore,  since     X'A2  +  fj.'fj.z  +  v'i>2  =  0,     we  have 


that  is,  ^!2AiAz  +  J^/ui/u,  +  C78vii/,  =  0. 

Also,  \\  +  /U!^u2  +  I/,)-,  =  0. 


Hence,  by  Art.  258,  OY  must  be  the  second  possible 
direction  of  displacement  in  the  wave-plane  corresponding 
to  OP,  and  this  wave-plane  must  be  POY. 

Draw  OS  in  the  plane  POQ  perpendicular  aud  equal  to 
OP  ;  then  OS  is  the  wave-normal,  and  its  length  is  the 
distance  through  which  the  wave-front  has  advanced  in  the 
time  ti.  If  OZ'be  drawn  in  the  plane  QOP  perpendicular 
and  equal  to  OQ,  the  locus  of  Tfor  all  possible  positions  of  OP 


Construction  for  Wave- Surf  ace. 


159 


is  a  surface  which  touches  at  T  the  wave-frout  perpendicular 
to  OS. 


Fin.  1. 

To  prove  this,  take  on  the  tangent  to  Fresnel's  ellipsoid, 
QP,  a  point  Q'  infinitely  near  Q,  and  in  the  plane  QOP 
draw  OT'  perpendicular  to  OQ' ;  then  OT  =  OQ',  and  if  a 
plane  be  drawn  perpendicular  to  OT',  it  passes  through  OQ', 
and  one  axis  of  the  section  of  Fresuel's  ellipsoid  made  by 
this  plane  is  infinitely  near  OQ'  and,  being  an  axis,  is  there- 
fore equal  to  OQ'  and  consequently  to  OT'.  Accordingly  T' 
must  be  a  point  on  the  locus  surface,  and  TT  a  tangent  to 
this  surface. 

Again,  draw  TT"  parallel  to  OF,  and  take  on  it  T" 
infinitely  near  T.  Then,  since  TT"  is  perpendicular  to  02\ 
we  have  OT"  equal  to  OT.  Again,  since  OQ  is  perpen- 
dicular to  the  plane  TOT",  the  plane  perpendicular  to  OT" 
passes  through  OQ,  and  the  axis  of  the  section  of  Fresnel's 
ellipsoid  made  by  this  plane,  being  infinitely  near  to  OQ,  is 
equal  to  it,' and  therefore  to  Ol'and  OT".  Hence  T"  is  a 
point  on  the  locus  surface,  and  Tl '  a  tangent  to  this  surface. 

Accordingly,  the  plane  STT"  is  a  tangent-plane  to  the 
locus  surface  ;  but  this  plane  is  the  position  of  the  wave-front 
at  the  time  ^.  Hence  the  locus-surface  is  the  envelope  of  all 
possible  wave-fronts  at  the  time  tif  and  is  therefore  the  wave- 
surface. 


160  Electromagnetic  Theory  of  Liyht. 

261.  Equation  of  Wave-Surface.  —  It  is  now  easy  to 
find,  in  the  manner  of  MacCullagh,  the  equation  of  the  wave- 
surface. 

If  r  denote  the  length  of  any  radius-vector  of  Fresnel's 
ellipsoid,  a  sphere,  having  0  as  centre  and  r  as  radius,  meets 
the  ellipsoid  in  the  cone  whose  equation  is 


A  tangent  plane  to  this  cone  meets  the  ellipsoid  in  a 
section  in  which  two  consecutive  radii  vectores  are  equal  to  r. 
Hence  the  line  of  contact  is  an  axis  of  this  section,  and 
the  extremity  of  an  intercept  equal  to  r  on  the  perpendicular 
to  the  tangent-plane  to  the  cone  is  a  point  on  the  wave- 
surface.  If  r  be  regarded  as  constant,  the  equation  of  the 
cone  reciprocal  to  the  cone  of  intersection  of  the  sphere  and 
ellipsoid  is 

0.  (28) 


. 

fll  -  r*         b*  -  r*         c*  -  r? 

The  coordinates  of  a  point  on  the  wave-surface  whose 
distance  from  0  is  r  satisfy  this  equation.     Hence,  if 

*•'  =  z2  +  if  +  z>, 

equation  (28)  becomes  the  equation  of  the  wave-surface. 

Rejecting  the  factor  r2,  and  getting  rid  of  fractious,  we   i 
have 

-  r2)  (a2  -  r2) 

-rj     ft'-r3    =  0. 


Arranging  in  powers  of  r,  and  dividing  by  r2,  we  get, 
finally, 

(a1  tf  +  b*  y*  +  c2  s2)  r»  -  a2  (&»  +  c')  x*  -  i2  (c2  +  «2)  //2 

0.        (29) 


The  surface  whose  equation  we  have  obtained  was 
discovered  by  Fresnel,  and  is  known  as  Fresnel's  wave- 
surface. 


Mayni'tic  Force.  161 

262.  Magnetic  Force.—  From  Art.  254,  we  have 


dt     CT 


Integrating  with  respect  to  z1,  we  get 


Hence  we  have 


/3  =          (w^X.- 

7  =  1       (/^3^  - 


From  (30),  we  see  that 

la  +  m     + 


also, 


=  0. 


Accordingly,  the  magnetic  force  is  in  the  wave-plane, 
and  perpendicular  to  the  displacement;  that  is,  its  direction 
coincides  with  the  second  possible  direction  of  displacement 
in  the  wave-plane. 


162  Electromagnetic  Theory  of  Light. 

Hence  if  H  denote  the  magnetic  force,  we  have 


with  two  other  corresponding  equations.     Multiplying  first 
by  Az,  second  by  /u2,  third  by  v»,  and  adding,  we  get 


H  = 

=  1^  (A*\S  +  *V  +  0'".')  =  ^  F2  =  4;r  PZ>.      (31) 

263.  Electromotive  Intensity.  —  If  F  denote  the 
resultant  electromotive  intensity,  and  0i,  02,  and  03  its 
direction-angles,  we  have 


with  two  similar  equations  ;  then  F  is  in  the  direction  of  OQ, 
fig.  1  ;  and  if  ^  denote  the  angle  between  the  displacement 
and  the  resultant  electromotive  intensity,  we  have 

F  cos  x  =  F  (\!  cos  0i  +  /ui  cos  &  +  in  cos  03) 

and 

F  =  4irwP\D  sec  X-  (32) 

264.  Conditions  at  a  Boundary.  —  When  a  disturbance 
passes  from  one  medium  into  another,  six  conditions  must  be 
fulfilled  at  the  boundary  ;  but  of  these  six,  only  four  are 
independent. 

By  Art.  228,  the  normal  component  of  electric  displace- 
ment must  be  continuous.  Hence,  if  /,  m,  n  denote  the 
direction-cosines  of  the  normal  to  the  boundary,  /,  17,  //  the 
components  of  displacement  on  one  side  of  the  boundary- 
surface,  and  /',  /,  //  those  on  the  other,  we  have 

I  (f  -./')  +  m(g-g')+  n  (h  -  //)  =  0.          (33) 


Conditions  at  a  Boundary.  163 

Again,  the  tangential  components  of  electromotive 
intensity  are  continuous.  In  fact,  each  component  of 
electromotive  intensity  must  be  continuous  in  a  direction 
perpendicular  to  its  own,  as  otherwise,  by  (15),  there 
would  be  an  infinite  rate  of  change  in  the  magnetic 
induction. 

Accordingly,  if  X,  F,  Z,  and  X',  Y',  Z'  denote  the 
components  of  electromotive  intensity  at  the  two  sides  of 
the  boundary-surface,  and  Ai,  m,  Vl ;  A2,  /u«,  v2  the  direction- 
cosines  of  two  mutually  perpendicular  tangents  to  the 
surface,  we  have 

|_    ££iSlZ£-nI-(*-J>i£J (34) 

As  the  magnetic  induction  fulfils  the  solenoidal  condition, 
each  of  its  components  must  be  continuous  in  a  direction 
coinciding  with  its  own,  and  therefore  the  component  normal 
to  the  surface  must  be  continuous.  Hence  we  have 

I  (a  -  a')  +  m  (b  -  b')  +  n(c-  c")  =  0.  (35) 

Also,  by  (13),  the  components  of  magnetic  force  tangential 
to  the  surface  are  continuous,  and  therefore 

Ai  (a  -  a')  +  fj.i(p  -  /3')  +  vi  (7  -  7')  =  0, 


i        (36) 
A,  (a  -a')  +  /«»(j3-/3')  +  1-2(7-7')  =  0. 

Equation  (35)  follows  from  equations  (34),  as  may  be 
shown  in  the  following  manner  :  — 

By  (15)  we  have 
da      dn\         fdb      db'\        fdc      dc' 


dy 


<ty\         )    dx 

M2 


164  Electromagnetic  Theory  of  Light. 

From  equations  (34)  it  appears  that  X-X',  Y-  Y', 
and  Z-Z'  are  proportional  to  (p\vi-  vi/uz),  &c.,  that  is,  to 
/,  in,  it ;  or,  if  U=  0  be  the  equation  of  the  boundary-surface 
to 

dU     dU  ,     dU 


Hence,    if  A  denote   an  undetermined  function  of   the 
coordinates,  and  Q  be  put  for 


we  obtain 


d  A  dU      d   4  dU\         (d      dU      d  A  rfi 

—  A  -. -T-  A  -7-  )  +  »*  (-T  A  -r-  -  3-  A  — 

</s      f/y       </y       flfe  /          \^       </2       (/s       d. 

(d      dU      d      dU\ 

+  »  (  y  A  — r  A  -r- 1 

\</y       dx      (to      ay ) 


iy  dz      dy    dz )         \  dz  dx      dz   dx 

1          A\      I      _  *,_      

V  dx  dy       dx    dy 

dx  \  dy  dz   dy  dz  J   dy  \  dz  dx   dz  dx  J 

i  | j  f  =0 

dz  \  dx  dy   dx  dy  J  j 

In  a  similar  manner,  from  equations  (12),  (13),  and  (36) 
we  get 

l^f(f-f)  +  »»-£  (g  -  g')  +  n  1  (k  -  //)  =  o. 


Propagation  of  Light.  165 

By  integration,  we  obtain 

1  (/-/')  +  »i  (9  ~  g'}  +  n  (/*  -  //)  =  constant, 
l(a  -  a')  +  m  (b  -  b')  +  n(c  -  c')  =  constant ; 

but  as  we  are  here  considering  only  the  results  of  the 
disturbance,  we  must  suppose  f,g,h;  f,  g',  h' ;  a,  &c.,  to 
be  all  initially  zero,  and  therefore  we  get  (33)  and  (35). 

265.  Propagation  of  Light. — If  we  suppose  each  point 
of  a  plane  area  S  to  be  a  centre  of  disturbance,  and  draw  the 
wave-surfaces  of  which  these  points  are  the  centres,  and  which 
all  correspond  to  the  same  period  of  time  ti,  a  plane  2',  parallel 
to  S,  which  touches  one  of  these  surfaces  will  touch  them  all ; 
and  if  we  draw  straight  lines  from  the  boundary  of  S  to  the 
points  of  contact  with  S'  of  the  surfaces  whose  centres  are  on 
this  boundary,  the  area  S'  enclosed  by  this  cylinder  is  made 
up  of  points  at  which  the  disturbances  are  all  in  this  plaue, 
parallel  to  one  another,  and  in  the  same  phase.    Consequently, 
3"  is  the  wave-plane  at  the  time  ^.    Outside  the  cylinder  the 
plane  2'  does  not  touch  any  of  the  wave-surfaces,  and  the 
disturbances  due  to  wave-surfaces  corresponding  to  a  period 
different  from  ^  are  not  in  the  plane  2',  nor  parallel  to  one 
another,  so  that  instead  of  strengthening  they  interfere  with 
each  other.     Thus  the  sensible  effect  is  limited  to  the  area 
within  the  cylinder  passing  through  the   boundary  of  S ; 
accordingly,  the  light  is  propagated  in  a  straight  line,  and 
the  direction  of  the  cylindrical  beam  or  ray  is  that  of  a  line 
drawn  from  the  centre   of  one  of  the  wave-surfaces  to  its 
point  of  contact  with  2'. 

If  the  medium  be  isotropic,  the  wave-surfaces  are  spheres, 
and  the  ray  of  light  is  perpendicular  to  the  wave-plane. 

If  the  medium  be  not  isotropic,  the  ray  is  in  general  not 
perpendicular  to  the  wave-plane. 

266.  Reflexion  and  Refraction.— When  a  disturbance 
advancing  through  a  medium  reaches  the  boundary  of  another 
adjoining  medium,  the  continuity  of  propagation  is  inter- 
rupted.    The  most  general  hypothesis  we  can  make  is,  that 
disturbances,  starting  from  the  boundary,  are  set  up  in  both 
media.     A  small  portion  of  the  boundary  between  the  two 
media  may  be  regarded  as  a  plane  area,  and  we  may  suppose 


166 


Electromagnetic  Theory  <f  L></ht. 


a  cylindrical  ray  of  disturbance  to  reach  this  area.  The  plane 
containing  the  wave-normal  of  the  incident  ray  and  the  normal 
to  the  boundary  is  called  the  plane  of  incidence. 

All  the  plane  sections  of  the  cylindrical  ray  which  are 
parallel  to  the  plane  of  incidence  have  a  common  perpendicular 
lying  in  the  tangent  plane  to  the  boundary. 

We  shall  suppose  at  first  that  each  medium  is  isotropic. 


Fio.  2. 

Let  AB  be  the  line  in  which  the  boundary-surface  is  met 
by  that  plane  of  incidence  which  contains  the  longest  of  the 
parallel  chords  of  the  cylindrical  beam  of  light.  Let  IA 
and  JB  be  the  lines  of  intersection  of  this  plane  with  the 
cylindrical  boundary  of  the  beam. 

Draw  AP  perpendicular  to  IA.  When  the  disturbance 
reaches  A,  wave-surfaces  start  from  A  in  each  medium ;  and 
when  the  disturbance  at  P  reaches  B,  the  wave-surface  start- 
ing from  A  is  a  sphere  having  A  as  centre,  and  a  radius  equal 
to  PB.  There  are  corresponding  wave-surfaces  having  their 
centres  at  all  the  points  of  the  beam  which  lie  on  the  plane 


Reflexion  and  Refraction.  167 

boundary  of  the  two  media.  If  we  draw  through  B  a  perpen- 
dicular to  the  plane  of  incidence,  a  plane,  through  this  line, 
touching  the  sphere  having  A  as  centre,  touches  all  the  wave- 
surfaces,  and  is  therefore  the  wave-front  of  the  reflected  beam. 
A  perpendicular  to  this  plane  will  be  in  the  direction  of  the 
reflected  ray. 

If  £Q  be  a  tangent  to  the  section  of  the  wave-surface 
starting  from  A,  the  reflected  ray  is  in  the  direction  of  AQ. 

We  see,  then,  from  the  equality  of  the  triangles  AQB 
and  £PA,  that  the  incident  and  reflected  rays  make  equal 
angles  with  the  normal  to  the  boundary-surface.  We  have 
seen  above  that  the  reflected  ray  lies  in  the  plane  of  incidence. 
We  have  thus  the  two  laws  of  reflexion  in  an  isotropic  medium. 
The  direction  of  the  refracted  ray  is  obtained  by  a  method 
similar  to  that  employed  for  the  reflected. 

Describe,  with  A  as  centre,  the  wave-surface  belonging  to 
the  second  medium  and  corresponding  to  the  period  of  time 
required  by  the  incident  ray  to  travel  from  P  to  B.  If  the 
velocity  of  propagation  in  the  second  medium  is  less  than  in 
the  first,  tlie  sphere  in  the  second  medium  will  have  a  radius 
AQ'  less  than  PB;  and  if  *  and  i\  be  the  angles  which  the 
incident  and  refracted  rays  make  with  the  normal  to  the 
boundary-surface,  we  see  that  the  refracted  ray  is  in  the 
plane  of  incidence.,  and  that 

sin  it  _  AQ'  _  V\ 
~^7  =  £P~V 

where  F  and  Fi  denote  the  velocities  of  propagation  in  the 
first  and  in  the  second  medium. 

The  ratio  ~  is  called  '  the  index  of  refraction  of  the  two 

V\ 
media' ;  and  if  we  denote  it  by  /n,  we  have    sin  t  =  /z  sin  h> 

When  the  second  medium  is  crystalline,  its  wave-surface 
will  have  two  sheets,  and  two  tangent  planes  can  be  drawn 
passing  through  the  perpendicular  at  B  to  the  plane  of 
incidence.  The  corresponding  directions  of  displacement  are 
obtained  by  means  of  Art.  260,  and  the  lines  from  A  to  the 
points  of  contact  of  the  tangent  planes  are  the  directions  of 
the  rays.  In  a  crystalline  medium  there  is  thus  double  refrac- 
tion, and  a  single  ray  of  light  becomes,  in  general,  two  rays. 


168  Electromagnetic  Theory  of  Light. 

267.  Common  Light  and  Polarized  Light.—  In  an 

isotropic  medium  the  direction  of  displacement  may  be  any 
whatever  perpendicular  to  the  ray.  In  the  case  of  common 
light,  the  direction  of  displacement  is  not  fixed,  but  after  a 
few  hundred  vibrations  passes  into  another  direction  in  the 
wave-plane.  In  the  case  of  light,  some  billions  of  vibrations 
are  completed  during  a  second,  so  that  in  any  appreciable 
length  of  time  we  may  consider  that  there  are  as  many 
vibrations  in  any  one  direction  in  the  wave-plane  as  in  any 
other.  When  light  is  polarized,  all  the  vibrations  belonging 
to  a  given  ray  are  in  the  same  direction. 

We  have  seen  that  when  light  passes  into  a  crystalline 
medium  it  necessarily  becomes  polarized.  In  fact,  when  the 
direction  of  the  ray  is  given,  the  tangent-plane  to  the  wave- 
surface  at  the  point  where  it  is  met  by  the  ray  is  the  wave- 
front,  and  the  line  in  which  this  plane  is  met  by  the  plane 
containing  the  ray  and  the  wave-normal  is  the  direction  of 
vibration. 

268.  Intensity  of  Light.  —  The  ultimate  measure  of  the 
intensify  of  light  is  its  effect  on  the  eye,  but  indirectly  we 
can  ascertain  how  it  depends  on  the  displacement  producing 
the  light  and  obtain  its  mathematical  expression. 

It  is  ascertained  experimentally  that  if  light  emanate 
from  a  constant  source,  the  intensity  of  the  illumination  of 
a  small  plane  area  perpendicular  to  the  direction  of  the  light 
varies  inversely  as  the  square  of  the  distance  from  the  source. 

We  conclude  from  this  that  the  intensity  of  light  varies 
as  the  energy  of  the  disturbance  per  unit  of  volume.  In  fact, 
if  a  disturbance  emanates  from  a  source  0  in  an  isotropic 
medium  and  spreads  equally  in  all  directions,  the  mean  total 
kinetic  energyremains  constant,andthedisturbance  atany  time 
occupies  the  space  between  two  spheres  whose  radii  differ  by 
a  wave-length.  Since  the  wave-length  is  very  small,  the  space 
occupied  by  the  disturbance  is  represented  by  4m  2A,  where  A 
denotes  the  wave-length.  Hence  if  thekiuetio  energy  be  denoted 

fTJ 

by  T,  the  energy  per  unit  of  volume  is  -  —  pr  ;  and  this  varies 

* 


inversely  as  the  square  of  the  distance  from  the  source. 


Intensity  of  Light.  169 

The  simplest  form  of  expression  for  a  periodic  disturbance 
producing  a  plane  wave  whose  front  is  perpendicular  to  the 
axis  of  x  is  a  cos  ^,  where 


and  V  denotes  the  velocity  of  wave-propagation.  The 
corresponding  velocity  v  of  vibration  is 

27TF 

--  r  —  a  sin  <•/>. 
A 

Hence  the  mean  value  of  t>2  is 

47T2        1    f27r  27T* 

—  —  a*  —  -       sin20  d$  ;     that  is,    —  «». 

Accordingly,  the  density  of  the  medium  being  constant,  the 
kinetic  energy  per  unit  of  volume  varies  as  —  «z,  or  as  the 

square  of  the  amplitude  if  T  be  assigned.  If  we  now  suppose 
a  small  plane  surface  to  be  illuminated  by  two  similar  sources 
of  light,  the  rays  from  which  are  approximately  perpendicular 
to  the  surface,  and  whose  distances  from  it  are  equal,  the 
disturbance  due  to  one  of  these  sources  may  be  represented 
in  any  direction  perpendicular  to  the  ray  by  a  cos  0,  and  that 
due  to  the  other  by  a  cos  (0  +  e)  . 

The  total  disturbance  is,  then,  2a  cos  |e  cos  ($  +  |e).  In 
a  short  period  e  passes  from  0  to  2?r,  and  the  mean  value  of 
the  square  of  the  amplitude  is 


which  is  equal  to  2«2.  Hence,  if  we  suppose  that  the  intensity 
of  light  is  measured  by  the  energy  per  unit  of  volume  due 
to  the  disturbance,  we  find  that  the  illumination  given  by 
two  similar  sources  of  light  is  double  that  given  by  one. 
Thus  the  conclusion  already  arrived  at  is  confirmed. 


170  Electromagnetic  Theory  of  Light. 

269.  Energy  due  to  Electromagnetic  Disturb- 
ance.— We  have  seen  (Art.  248)  that  if  T  be  the  kinetic 
energy  of  a  system  of  currents  in  an  electromagnetic  field, 

j  tr\ 

—  r  =  /(/«  +  wfl  +  nc)dS. 

Since  TIB  a  homogeneous  quadratic  function  of  the  strengths 
of  the  currents, 

«•-*£,    also    -^-f,*.. 
di  dy       ds 

Substituting  in  (4),  and  applying  Stokes's  theorem,  we  have 

.(IT      .  |Ynrfe      ~dy      ,,d*\. 
j  .  -rr  =  i      F  -r-  +  G-+  +  H  —  }  dn  ; 
rft        J\     rfs          rf«          rfyl 

.  r/« 

but  J  —  =  all, 

wliere  a  is  the  orthogonal  section  of  the  current,  and  i<  the 
component  of  its  intensity,  and     ads  =  rf@.     Hence  we  get 


where  the  integral  is  to  be  taken  throughout  the  whole  of 
space.     Now,  by  (13), 

</7      r//3    - 
4nu  =  —  --  -,  &o.  ; 
rf^r      ds 

whence,  substituting,  we  have 


=  /  {  F(my  -  w/8)  +  (?  (,,o  -  /y)  +  II  (//3  -  #wa)}  dS 


Energy  due  to  Electromagnetic  Disturbance.  171 

where  the  volume-integral  is  to  be  taken  throughout  the 
whole  of  space,  and  the  surface-integral  over  botli  sides  of 
every  surface  separating  two  media,  and  over  a  sphere  whose 
radius  is  infinite. 

Since  a,  /3,  y  are  each  at  infinity  of  the  order   —  ,    where 

M  is  infinite,  the  surface-integral  at  infinity  is  zero.  Again, 
tny  -  >?/3  is  the  magnetic  force  in  the  plane  of  yz  perpendicular 
to  the  normal  to  the  surface  S.  By  (13),  such  a  force,  being 
tangential,  is  continuous  in  passing  from  one  side  of  the 
surface  to  the  other,  and  therefore  the  corresponding  surface- 
integral,  when  taken  over  both  sides  of  <S,  vanishes. 
Hence,  if  we  substitute  for 

dH     dG 


their  equivalents  «,  b,  c,  we  obtain 

8irT=  $(aa  +  Jj3  +  Cy)  r/@  =  -a  J(a'  +  |38  +  72)  rf3. 

Substituting  for  a2  +  j32  +  72  its  value  from  (31),  we 
get 

87rT=16 

whence  T=  2* 

In  addition  to  the  kinetic  energy  of  the  electric  currents, 
the  disturbance  produces  potential  energy  W  due  to  the 
electric  displacement. 

If  we  substitute    ™A2,    ^B\    and    zsC*    for 

1         1  1 

*'     K'     and    K, 

by  equations  (14)  and  (16),  Art.  237,  we  get 
W  =  VTT  Jw  (A2f*  +  Bz(f  +  CW)  f/@ 

=  27r  /  v  (A*\*  +  B'-f.c  +  G'V)  Z>V/8  =  2;r  J  *  V*D*<i<5. 

(38) 

Hence,  if  E  denote  the  total  energy  per  unit  of  volume, 
we  have 

\  (39) 


172  Electromagnetic  Theory  of  Light. 

270.  Quantities  to  be  determined    in    Reflexion 
and  Refraction. — When  light  passes  from  one  medium 
into  another,  there  are  four  quantities  to  be  determined  by 
means  of  the  equations  holding  good  at  the  boundary.    These 
quantities  differ  according  to  the  nature  of  the  media. 

When  light  passes  from  one  isotropic  medium  into 
another,  the  direction,  intensity,  and  line  of  displacement 
of  the  incident  ray  being  given,  the  directions  of  the  reflected 
and  refracted  rays  are  known  by  Art.  266,  and  we  have  to 
determine  their  intensities  and  lines  of  displacement. 

When  the  first  medium  is  isotropic  and  the  second  crys- 
talline, the  directions  and  lines  of  displacement  of  the  two 
refracted  rays  are  determined  by  Arts.  266  and  260,  and  also 
the  direction  of  the  reflected  ray.  We  have,  then,  to  find  the 
intensity  and  line  of  displacement  of  the  reflected  ray,  and 
the  intensities  of  the  two  refracted  rays. 

Similarly,  when  light  passes  from  a  crystalline  into  an 
isotropic  medium,  we  have  to  determine  the  intensities  of  the 
two  reflected  rays,  and  the  intensity  and  line  of  displacement 
of  the  refracted. 

Lastly,  when  botli  media  are  crystalline,  we  have  to 
determine  the  intensities  of  the  two  reflected,  and  of  the 
two  refracted  rays. 

271.  Reflexion  and  Refraction.  Isotropic  Media.— 
Polarized    light    passes    from    one    isotropic    medium    into 
another :  determine  the  intensities  and  directions  of  electric 
displacement  of  the  reflected  and  refracted  rays. 

Let  D,  D',  and  Dl  denote  the  displacements  belonging  to 
the  incident,  reflected,  and  refracted  rays ;  then  we  may  put 

-D  =  acos^,     !>'  =  &' cos  $',     DI  =  aj  cos^, 
and  we  may  assume  that  at  the  surface  separating  the  media 

*  -  f  -  f .. 
Again,  if  we  put 

/  =  x/2^  Fa,     1'  =  yi^n  Fu',     7,  =  y^,  F,a,, 

where  Fand  FI  denote  the  velocities  of  propagation  of  the 
incident  and  refracted  rays,  we  have  I1  =  ZTTZJ  F2a2  =  mean; 
value  of  E,  by  Art.  269. 


Reflexion  and  Refraction.     Isotropic  Media.  173 

Hence  P,  7'2,  and  7?  express  the  intensities  of  the  incident 
reflected,  and  refracted  rays. 

In  the  case  of  most  dielectric?,  w  is  sensibly  the  same  so 
that  we  may  assume  •esl  =  -a. 

Let  the  normal  to  the  separating  surface  drawn  into  the 
second  medium  be  the  axis  of  X,  and  the  plane  of  incidence 
the  plane  of  XY.  Then,  by  Art,  266,  the  axis  of  Zis  the 
line  of  intersection  of  the  three  wave-planes. 


FIG. 


Let  01  be  a  wave-normal  or  ray,  and  the  plane  OZDSM 
the  corresponding  wave-plane,  OZTthe  direction  of  displace- 
ment^ and  OM,  perpendicular  to  02),  the  corresponding 
direction  of  magnetic  force. 

Equations  (21)  show  that  the  magnetic  force  is  perpen- 
dicular to  the  wave-normal  and  to  the  displacement,  and  is 
so  directed  that  seen  from  it  the  wave-normal  must  be  turned 
counter-clockwise  in  order  to  coincide  with  the  displacement. 

Let  the  displacements  make  angles  0,  6',  and  Ql  with  OZ, 
and  let  the  wave-normals  make  angles  i,  i',  and  i\  with  OX; 
then,  by  Art.  266,  wo  have 

Vi    . 

i   =  TT  -  /,     sin  ii  =  —  sin  i, 

where  V  and  Vl  denote  the  velocities  of  wave- propagation  in 
the  first  and  in  the  second  medium. 


174  Electromagnetic  Theory  of  Light. 

If  X,  Y,Z-,  X',  Y',Z';  Xi,  F,,  Z,  denote  the  compo- 
nents of  electromotive  intensity,  and  a,  /3,  7  ;  «',  /3',  7'  ; 
«i>  /3i,  71  those  of  magnetic  force  corresponding  to  the  three 
rays,  by  Art.  264  wo  have 


F+F'=F,,    Z+Z'  =  Zlt    /3  +  0'  =  /3lf    7  +  7'  =  7,.     (40) 
By  Arts.  257,  254,  we  have 


also,  from  fig.  3,  we  see  that 

F=  -  F  sin  0  cos  ?',     F'=  F'sin  0' cos/,     FI  =  -  Fj  sin  #1  cos  A,} 

Z  =  F  cos  0,  Z'  =  F'  cos  0',  Zi  =  Ft  cos  0,. 

(41) 

/3  =  -  TTcos  0  cos  e,    /3'  =  7f  'cos  0'  cos  /,    /3i  =  -  J7i  cos  0j  cos  *',, } 

7  =  -  H  sin  0,          7'  =  -  H'  sin  0',       7!  =  -  TTj  sin  0,.         ) 

(42) 

As  stated  above,  we  may  assume  TO,  =  TO,  and  if  in 
equations  (40)  the  members  of  the  first  two  be  divided  each 
by  2v/<!7rTO,  and  the  members  of  the  last  two  be  multiplied 

each  by  ,    these  equations  by   (41)  and  (42),  when 

<6  y   &TT 

—. — r  is  substituted  for   — ,  become 

61111,  Pi 

sin  i  cos  i  (/sin  9-1'  sin  #')  =  /!  sin  ^  cos  A  sin  0M 
sin  t'(7cos  0  +  /'  cos  0')  =  II  sin  t\  cos  0,, 
cos  i  (I  cos  0  -  lf  cos  ^)  =  7,  cos  t\  cos  0U 

7  sin  0  +  1'  sin  0'  =  /i  sin  0,. 
From  the  first  and  last  of  equations  (43)  we  obtain 

sin  2«  +  sin  2t\  _ 
27  £in0=  —  -  7, 

sm  2t 

(44) 
OT,   .      ,     sin2f-sin2i,        . 

27  sin  0  =  —  7,  sin  ft. 

sin  2t 


Reflexion  and  Refraction.  175 

And  from  the  second  and  third  we  have 


(45) 


If  the  displacement  of  the  incident  ray  be  perpendicular 
to  the  plane  of  incidence,  0  =  0,  and  by  (44)  we  have 
/!  sin  0!  =  0,  whence  I,  =  0,  or  0X  =  0  ;  but  if  we  adopt  the 
former  alternative,  by  (45)  we  have  I  cos  0  =  0,  which  is 
impossible.  Hence  0i  =  0.  In  like  manner,  we  get  0'  =  0  ; 
and  we  learn  that  in  this  case  all  the  displacements  are 
perpendicular  to  the  plane  of  incidence.  Again  from  (45) 
we  have 

T  _     sin  2i  sin  («,-») 

/'-shTCTTTr/'     7  ^InT/TTT)7-         (46) 

If  the  displacement  of  the  incident  ray  be  in  the  plane  of 
incidence,   0  =  ?,    and  from  (45)  we  see  that 

a      TT       „,     TT 
1  =  2'  2; 

as  otlierwise,  by  44,  we  should  have  1=0.  Hence  in  this 
case  all  the  displacements  are  in  the  plane  of  incidence. 
Also,  by  (44),  we  have 

/  -        2  sin  2i  sin  2i  -  sin  2t\ 

sin  2i  +  sin  2t'i    '          ~  sin  2i  +  sin  2«, 

In  this  case,  if    sin  2<\  =  sin  2i,    we  have  /'  =  0  ;  that  is, 
there  is  no  reflected  ray.     When     2*\ 


, 

«i  =  n  -  I,     and     —  —  r  =  tan  i  : 
2  sin  i  , 

that  is,  if  //  be  the  index  of  refraction,  i  =  tan'1  ^  ;  and  we 
learn  that  if  the  tangent  of  the  angle  of  incidence  be  equal 
to  the  index  of  refraction,  there  is  no  reflected  ray  when  the 
displacement  of  the  incident  ray  is  in  the  plane  of  incidence. 
The  displacements  belonging  to  common  light  may  be 
resolved  each  into  two  components,  one  in  the  plane  of 
incidence,  and  the  other  perpendicular  to  that  plane. 


176 


Electromagnetic  Theory  of  Light. 


The  whole  of  the  reflected  light  is  produced  by  the  latter 
displacements  when  the  angle  of  incidence  is  tan'1  ju.  This 
light  is  therefore  polarized,  and,  if  it  be  made  to  impinge  on 
a  second  reflecting  surface  so  that  the  second  plane  of 
incidence  is  perpendicular  to  the  first,  there  is  no  reflected 
ray  when  the  tangent  of  the  angle  of  incidence  at  the  second 
reflecting  surface  is  equal  to  the  corresponding  index  of 
refraction. 

The  discovery  of  polarized  light  was  partly  based  on  the 
observation  of  the  phenomenon  stated  above,  and  common 
light,  when  reflected  at  the  angle  of  incidence  tan"1  /u,  was 
said  to  be  polarized  in  the  plane  of  incidence. 

The  plane  of  polarization  as  thus  specified  is  perpendicular 
to  the  direction  of  the  electric  displacement  which  produces 
the  light. 

272.  Reflexion  and  Refraction.  Crystalline 
Medium. — Polarized  light  passes  from  an  isotropic  into  a 
crystalline  medium :  find  the  intensity  and  direction  of  dis- 
placement of  the  reflected  ray,  and  the  intensities  of  the  two 
refracted  rays. 

Adopting  a  notation  similar  to  that  employed  in  the  last 
Article,  and  putting  D,  D' ,  />„  and  Dt  for  the  displacements 
belonging  to  the  four  rays,  we  may  assume  that  at  the 
boundary-surface  <£  =  <f>'  =  ^j  =  02. 

As  before,  take  the  plane  of  incidence  for  the  plane  of 


Fio  4. 


XY,  and  the  normal  to  the  boundary-surface  as  the  axis  of 


Reflexion  and  Refraction.  177 

Then  all  the  -wave-planes  pass  through  the  axis  of  Z,  and 
all  the  wave-normals  lie  in  the  plane  of  XY. 

Let  ZODS  be  the  wave-plane,  01  the  wave-normal,  and 
OD  the  direction  of  displacement  corresponding  to  one  of  the 
refracted  rays.  Then,  by  Art.  260,  the  plane  10  D  contains 
OQ,  the  line  of  direction  of  the  electromotive  intensity,  and 
QOD  is  the  angle  denoted  by  x  in  Arts.  260  and  263. 

Equations  (34)  and  (36)  become,  in  this  case, 

F  +  r  =  Yl  +  F2,     Z+Z'  =  Zi  +  Z2)\ 

0  + /3'  =  ft  +  ft,      7+7'  =  7i  +  7*-j 


Also,  by  Art.  263,  we  have     F,  =  4:inzV'\Di  sec  Xi- 

Now  F,  =  FlcosQiF;  but  (fig.  4)  from  the  spherical 
triangle  Qi^F  we  have 

cos  Qi  Y  =  cos  Qi  /!  cos  II  Y  +  sin  Qi  /\  sin  /!  Y  cos  QJr  F, 

7T  7T  7T 

Hence     cos  Qi  Y  =  -  sin  xi  sin  i\  -  cos  Xi  cos  i\  sin  0t. 

A  similar  equation  holds  good  for  Q>Y.  Substituting  in 
the  value  of  Fi,  given  above,  and  using  1, 1',  I1}  and  /2  as  in 
Art.  271,  we  get,  instead  of  Fi,  the  expression 

-  /!  sin  ii  sec  x\(sin  xi  sin  i\  +  cos  xi  cos  i\  sin  0i)  ; 
that  is,  -  /i  (sin  t\  cos  i\  sin  0i  +  sin2/!  tan  xO- 

Again,  Z±  =  Fi  cos  QiZ  =  Fi  cos  xi  cos  0i. 

Hence,  instead  of  Z\,  we  get    /i  sin  ^  cos  0lt 

The  expressions  to  be  substituted  for  the  magnetic  forces 
are  similar  to  those  made  use  of  in  the  case  of  isotropic  media. 
Thus  equations  (48)  become 
sin  i  cos  i  (/sin  9-1'  sin  0') 

=  /i  (sin  ii  cos  i\  sin  0!  -f  sin2  ii  tan  xO 

+  /2  (sin  iz  cos  iz  sin  02  +  sin2  ia  tan  x? 
sin  i(lGOsO  +  lf  cos0')  =  /,  sin?!  cos0!  +  /2  sin  i2  cos02, 
•cos  ?(/cos0  -  /'  cos0')  =  /i  cosz'i  cos0,  +  /2  cos  ?2  cos  I 
/sin  0  +  /'  sin  0'  =  /!  sin  0,  +  /2  sin  02. 

N 


178  Electromagnetic  Theory  of  Light. 

273.  Uniradial    Directions.  —  When    the   angle    of 
incidence  is  given  there  are  two  directions  of  the  displace- 
ment belonging  to  the  incident  ray  for  which  there  is  only 
one  refracted  ray. 

To  find  one  of  these  directions  we  may  suppose  72  zero  in 
equations  (49),  and  determine  0  in  terms  of  i,  i\,  and  0t. 

Making  I2  equal  to  zero,  and  eliminating  I'  sin  &  from 
the  first  and  last  of  equations  (49),  we  get 

/sin  2i  sin  6  =  I{  {sin  (i  +  1\)  cos  (*  -  t'j)  sin  0t  +  sin2 1\  tan  Y_, )  • 

(50) 

In  like  manner,  from  the  second  and  third  we  obtain 

/  sin  2»  cos  0  =  /i  sin  (i  +  i,)  cos  0^ 
Hence,  by  division,  we  get 

tan  0  =  cos  (i  -  f,)  tan  Oi  +    .     "  <!  . .  tan  Y,.       (51) 
sin  (t  -f  «,) 

The  second  value  of  tan  6  is  obtained  by  putting  02  and  /, 
for  0|  and  ii  in  (51). 

274.  L  nia\al  Crystals. — In  the  case  of  what  are  called 
uniaxal  crystals,  Fresnel's  ellipsoid  is  a  surface  of  revolution. 
If  we  suppose  c  =  b  in  the  equation  of  the  wave-surface  (29), 
Art.  261,  that  equation  becomes 


that  is,          (f*-P)(aV+# 

But  (52)  is  the  equation  of  the  surface  composed  of 
sphere  whose  equation  is  r"  =  i*,  and  the  ellipsoid  of  revo- 
lution whose  semi-axis  of  revolution  is  b,  and  whoso  other 
semi-axis  is  a. 

If  a  >  b,  and  Fresnel's  ellipsoid  is  prolate,  the  ellipsoid 
forming  part  of  the  wave-surface  is  oblate. 


ITniaxal  Crystals.  jyg 

These  conditions  hold  good  in  the  case  of  a  crystal  of 
calcium  Carbonate  commonly  called  Iceland  spar  This 
crystal  is  very  celebrated  in  the  history  of  science  "s 
observations  of  its  behaviour  led  to  the  discovery  of  double 
refraction  and  of  polarized  light. 

The  axis  of  revolution  of  Fresnel's  ellipsoid  is  coincident 
with  the  line  which  is  called  the  axis  of  the  crystal  This 
me  is  the  axis  of  symmetry,  and  can  be  determined  from 
the  geometrical  form  of  the  crystal. 

In  the  case  of  an  uniaxal  crystal,  all  rays  inside  the 
crystal  whose  directions  of  electric  displacement  are  perpen- 
dicular to  the  axis  are  propagated  with  the  same  velocity 
Ilm  appears  from  (25)  by  making  C  =  B  and  A  =  0  •  then' 
M2  +  v  =  1,  and  V2  =  B\  Conversely,  if 


we  have     (A2  -  £2)cos2S  =  0,    and  therefore    S  =  ~.    For 
these  rays  the  wave-surface  is  a  sphere. 

Again,  if  the  wave-surface  be  an  ellipsoid  of  revolution 
since  the  normal  to  a  surface  of  revolution  meets  the  axi«' 
the  ray,  the  wave-normal,  and  the  axis  must  be  in  the  same 
plane  ;  but  the  plane  containing  the  ray  and  the  wave-normal 
by  Art.  260,  contains  the  direction  of  electric  displacement' 
Hence  this  direction  is  in  the  plane  containing  the  ray  and 
the  axis. 

When  light  passing  through  an  isotropic  medium  is 
refracted  at  the  surface  of  an  uniaxal  crystal,  one  refracted 
ray  is  refracted  in  the  same  manner  as  "if  the  crystal  were 
isotropic,  since  the  wave-surface  of  this  ray  is  a  sphere. 
I  his  ray  is  called,  therefore,  the  ordinary  ray.  The  other 
refracted  ray,  whose  wave-surface  is  an  ellipsoid  of  revolution, 
is  called  the  extraordinary  ray. 

Both  rays  are  polarized,  and  as  a  result  of  experiment  it 
is  said  that  the  ordinary  ray  is  polarized  in  the  principal 
plane.  By  the  principal  plane  is  meant  the  plane  passing 
through  the  refracted  ray  and  the  axis  of  the  crystal.  Hence 
we  see  again  that  the  direction  of  electric  displacement  is 
perpendicular  to  the  plane  of  polarization. 

N2 


180  Elccti-uiiKKjm-lic  Theory  of  L'ujht. 

275.  Uniaxal  Crystal.  Reflexion  and  Itefrac- 
tlon.  —  In  the  case  of  an  uniaxal  costal,  since  \\  =  0, 
equutioiis  (49)  beeomu 

sin  »  cos  i  (I  sin  9-1'  sin  ff)  =  J,  sin  i\  cos  n  sin  6^ 

+  It  (siu  fa  cos  i2  siu02  +  Biii*/8  tan  x*)> 
sin  /(7cos0  +  7'cos0')  =  I\  sin?',  cos0i  +  /2  sinfjcos 
cos  /(/cos0  -  1'  cos  61')  =  /i  cos?'i  cos0i  +  72  cos/2  cos  92, 
I  em  6  +  I'  sin  0'  =  J,  sin  9t  +  72  sin  02. 

As  an  example  of  the  use  of  these  equations,  we  may 
suppose  light  to  fall  on  the  surface  of  an  uuiaxal  crystal  cut 
perpendicular  to  the  axis. 

In  this  case,  since  the  axis  of  the  crystal  is  the  normal  to 
the  surface,  the  plane  of  incidence  contains  the  axis  and  the 
wave-normal  of  the  extraordinary  ray,  and,  consequently,  the 
ray  itself.  Hence  both  refracted  rays  are  in  the  plane  of 
incidence  ;  and,  by  Art.  274,  we  have 


Accordingly,  equations  (53)  become 

sin  i  cos  i(I  sin  9-1'  sin  6")  \ 

=  /2(sin  ?2  cos  it  +  siiiV2  tan  ^2), 

sin  i(Icioad  +  /'  cosfl'j  =  7,  sin  i,,  v   (54) 

cos  »  (7cos0  -  7'  cos0')  =  Ii  cos  t\, 
7  siu  0  +  I'  siu  0'  =  72. 

If  we  now  suppose  that  the  incident  light  is  polarized  in 
the  plane  of  incidence,  0  =  0;  and  from  the  first  and  last  of 
equations  (54)  we  have 

It  (sin  i  cos  i  -f  sin  it  cos  i,  -f  siiiV2  tan  \,)  =  0. 


Un'mial  Crystal.  181 

Since  the  expression  by  which  72  is  multiplied  cannot  be 
zero,  we  get  72  =  0,  and  therefore  sin  9'  =  0.  The  second 
and  third  of  equations  (54)  become,  then, 

sin  /  (7  +  /')  =  7,  sin  ?„     cos  i  (I-  I'}  =  I,  cos  t\  • 
whence  we  get 

27  sin  /  cos  i  =  ^  sin  (t\  +  i),      21'  sin  i  cos  i  =  £  sin  (i\  -  i). 
Finally,  we  obtain 

L=I     sin2'  r  _  r  si"  ('.  -  i) 

sin  (*•+!,)'  sTnTTwo' 

Again,  if  the  incident  light  be  polarized  in  a  plane 
perpendicular  to  the  plane  of  incidence,  9  =  ?,  and  the 
second  and  third  of  equations  (54)  become 

le  sin  i  cos  9'  =  7X  sin  /\,       -  /'  cos  i  cos  Q'  =  l^  cos  i\. 
Hence  we  obtain     7,  sin  (i  +  i\)  =  0,     and  therefore     ^  =  0  ; 
whence  also    cos  9'  =  0,     and    9'  =  -  • 

From  the  first  and  last  of  equations  (54}  we  have,  then, 
sin  i  cos  i  (I-  1'}  =  72  'sin  i2  cos  H  +  sin2/3  tan  ^2),      I  +  I'  =  72. 
"Whence 

,,  _  j  sin  *  cos  z  ~  (sin  4  cos  4  +  sin2  /2  tan  ^2 
sin  i  cos  a"  +  sin  i\  cos  ?'2  +  sin2  «2  tan  ^2 

r  _  r  2  sin  z  cos  « 

sin  e  cos  «  +  sin  ?'2  cos  ?2  +  sin2  «2  tan  ^3  ' 

These  expressions  can  be  put  into  a  simpler  form. 

The  angle  x  is  the  angle  between  the  directions  of  electro- 
motive force  and  electric  displacement,  and  is  measured  from 
the  former  towards  the  latter  in  the  same  direction  as  the 
line  of  displacement  is  turned  in  order  to  become  the  wave- 
normal.  This  appears  from  the  figures  and  formulae  of 


182 


Electromagnetic  Theory  of  Liy/tt. 


Arts.  260  and  272.  What  has  been  said  amounts  to  this — 
that  in  equations  (53)  ^  is  to  be  regarded  as  positive  when 
the  direction  of  the  electromotive  force  does  not  lie  between 
those  of  the  displacement  and  the  wave-normal,  and  conse- 
quently the  ray  does  occupy  this  position.  In  the  present 
case  the  axis-minor  of  the  wave-ellipse  is  the  normal  to  the 
surface,  and  the  positive  angular  direction  is  from  it  to  the 
refracted  wave-normal.  The  refracted  ray  lies  farther  from 
the  axis  than  the  normal,  and  consequently  does  not  lie 
between  the  electric  displacement  and  the  wave-normal. 
Hence  in  (56;  the  angle  %?  is  negative. 

An  expression  for  tan  x  can  be  found  by  the  geometry  of 
the  ellipse. 


FIG.  5. 

In  the  figure  OX  represents  the  axis  of  the  crystal,  OQ  the 
line  of  electromotive  force,  OP  that  of  electric  displacement, 
01  the  extraordinary  wave-normal.  Then  v  is  the  angle 
QOP ;  but  QOP  =  R01,  and 

—  =  UI'  OI  =  2  triangle  ROI 
01 =     OP  01*  ~ 

Now,  if  pi  and  jh  be  the  focal  perpendiculars  on  the 
tangent,  and  ti  and  U  the  intercepts  on  the  tangent  between 

their  feet  and  the  point  of  contact,  —  =  — ,    and  therefore 


(p<+p,)(t,-t,)  -  (/>,  - 


Ui/id.i'fil  Crt/sfa/. 


183 


but  £(;;,  +  jh)((\  -  tz)  is  double  the  area  of  the  triangle 
ROI,  and  |  Q0i  -Jfc)(&  +  &)  is  double  the  area  of  the 
right-angled  triangle  whose  sides  are  ^/((i2  -  bz)  sin  t'2  and 
v/(rt2  -  I'}  cose'z,  the  angle  XOI  being  «,.  Hence,  if  Of  be 
denoted  by  ;j,  we  have 


In  the  present  case  ^2  is  negative,  and  we  have 

(a2  -  i*)  sin2  /2    \ 
sin  e,  cos  it  +  sin-  /2  tan  v2  =  sin  ?2  cos  Ml-  — 

\        fl2sin2/2  +  62cos2?2y 

J2  sin  i-i  cos  /2  jB2  sin  «2  cos  «'2 

az  sin2  ?2  +  i2  eos2  it      A2  sin2  /2  +  B*  cos2  /2 

Again,  if  Fdenote  the  velocity  of  propagation  in  the  external 
medium, 

F2  sin2  /2  =  (^42  sin2  ?2  +  ^2  cos2  ^2)  sin2  /  ; 
whence 


sin2  h  +  B2  cos2/2 


F2  - 


Hence 


B2  sin  /2  cos  /2  5  sin  t 


^'Bin'fc  +  .B'oos8/, 

and 

sin/  cost  +  sin /2  cos/2  +  siu3'/2  tan  ^2 


sin  e  (  F2  cos  i  +  B  </  F2  -  A2  sin2 /j 
Vi 


siiu'cos?  -  (sin/2  cos/2  +  si 


sin?  {  F2  cost  -  B  </  F2  -  A2  sin2?! 
F2 


(58) 


184  Electromagnetic  Tli<or>/ of  Liyht. 

Accordingly, 

F'oos/-  7?  y/CF2-  ^4'  si  n2?) 
F2  cos  >  +  £  v/(  F'  -  ^4*  wn»/) ' 

2  F8  cos  i 


7,  =  7 


F8  cos  i  +  7V(  V*  -  A*  si 


If  the  value  of  i  be  such  that  I'  -  0,  the  reflected  ray, 
when  common  light  falls  on  the  crystal,  is  polarized  in  the 
plane  of  incidence.  This  value  of  i  is  called  the  polari/ing 
angle  of  the  crystal  when  cut  perpendicular  to  its  axis. 

Making  7'  =  0  in  (59),  we  have 

F4(l  -  sin'i)  -  &(  V*  -  A*  sin'*) ; 


whence 


F;(F8-7J2) 

F*  -^8/y2 


(60) 


276.  Reflexion  and  Refraction  at  Interior  Surface 

of  Crystal.  —  When  light  passes  from  the  interior  of  an 
uuiaxal  crystal  into  an  isotropic  medium,  there  are,  in  gem-  ral, 
two  reflected  rays  ;  and  when  the  incident  ray  is  nn  ordinary 
ray,  we  have 


sin  /i  cos  f\  (/,  sin  Oi  -  1\  sin 
+  (sin  i\  cos  i\  sin  W* 


tan  \z)  l 

=  73  sin  ?3  co8/s  sin  0., 
sin  f\(7i  cos  Oi  +  I\  cos  0',)  +  7'a  sin  i\  cos  0'2, 

=  73  sin  /s  cos  ^3, 
cos  ;',(/i  cos  0i  -  7'i  cos  0'i)  +  7'j  cos  ?"2  cos  0'a. 

=  73  cos  /3  cos  03, 
7,  sin  0!  4  /',  sin  0\  +  7',  sin  0'a  =  7,  sin  08. 


^ 


Reflexion  and  Refraction.  185 

When  the   incident   ray   is    an    extraordinary  ray,   the 
equations  at  the  refracting  surface  become 

(sin  it  cos  /2  sin  02  +  sin2  ?2  tan  ^2)  J2  1 

+  I'  \  sin  i\  cos  i'\  sin  O't  \ 
+  (sin  /'2  cos  i'z  sin  0'2  +  sin2«'2  tan  x'2)  7'2 

=  /3  sin  4  cosz'g  sin  0,3, 

/2  sin  /2  cos  02  +  I\  sin  ?'i  cos  0\  +  7'2  sin  A  cos  0'z          <.  (62) 

s  73  sin  /3  cos  0 
/2  cos  /2  cos  02  +  I'  i  cos  A  cos  B'i  +  I'z  cos  A  cos  B'z 

—   /3  C(^S  ?3  COS  0 

/2  sin  02  +  l'\  sin  0'j  +  /'2  sin  0r2  =  /3  sin  03.  j 

When  the  crystal  is  cut  perpendicularly  to  its  axis, 


In  this  case,  the  first  and  last  of  equations  (61)  become 
(sin  <"2  cos  i'z  +  siir/'2  tan  ^'2)  7'2  =  /:3  sin  03  sin  ?'3  cos  /j, 

/'a  =  /3  sin  03. 
Hence 

/3  sin  03  {sin  /3  cos  ^  -  (sin  A  cos  i'z  +  sin2  A  tan  x'z)}  =  0  ; 

but.  the  multiplier  of  73  sin  03  in  this  equation  is  nor,  in 
general,  zero,  and  therefore  we  have 

sin  03  =  0,     I',  =  0. 

Consequently  there  is  no  extraordinary  reflected  ray,  and  the 
refracted  ray  is  polarized  in  the  plane  of  incidence.  From  the 
second  and  third  of  equations  (61)  we  then  obtain 

sin  (>,  -  i.)  si'i_  /63) 


186  Electromagnetic  Theory  of  Light. 

If  the  ray  incident  on  the  interior  surface  of  the  crystal 
bo  the  extraordinary  ray,  and  the  crystal,  as  before,  he  cut 
perpendicularly  to  its  axis,  since  all  the  rays  and  wave- 
normals  are  in  the  plane  of  incidence  which  cuts  the  wave- 
ellipsoid  in  an  ellipse  whose  axis-minor  is  the  axis  of  the 
crystal  and  also  the  normal  to  the  surface,  we  have 

i'a  =  TT  -  i,,     x's  =  -  X«  » 

whence 

sin  i't  cos  i't  +  sinYa  tan  x'a  =  -  (sin  it  cos  /2  +  sin2/2  tan  xJ- 

In  this  case,  the  second  and  third  of  equations  (62)  become 

/' 'i  sin  /'i  =  Is  sin  /3  cos  #,,     I'\  cos  ?',  =  I3  cos  /3  cos  03, 

whence    I3  cos  03  sin  (/3  -  i'i)  =  0  ;    but   siu(i3-i'i)    cannot  be 
zero,  and  therefore    cos03  =  0,    and    7',  =  0.     Consequently, 
there  is  no  ordinary  reflected  ray,  and  the  refracted  ray  is 
polarized  in  a  plane  perpendicular  to  the  plane  of  incidence. 
The  first  and  last  of  equations  (62)  now  become 

(sin  it  cos  it  +  sin2  it  tan  x8)  ( ?t  ~  1'*)  -  fa  giu  '» cos  ''»> 

It  +  I't  =  /a- 
Hence 

sin  i2  cos  it  +  sin2 /2  tan  x^  -  sin  /3  cos  /3 
2  sin  it  cos  it  +  sin2/2  tan  xa  +  gin  '3  cos  /3 ' 

2 (sin  it  cos  it  +  sin'/a  tan  x«) 


sin  it  cos  it  +  smV2  tan  xa  +  sin  h  cos  »3 

By  reductions   similar  to  those  effected   in  the  ca-e  of 
-equations  (56)  we  get. 


,2  -  A*  sin*/,)  +  F32  cos  /, ' 


a2  -  A1  sin2/3)  -  Fs"  cos  /3 

-r  j  &  L*  *y      y    r    a      —    •**       Dill     13; 

2  «    '/T^32-^28in2/3)-f  F82oos/3' 


Singularities  of  the  Wave-Surface.  187 

If  an  uniaxal  crystal,  bounded  by  faces  parallel  to  each 
other  and  perpendicular  to  the  axis,  be  placed  in  an  isotropic 
medium  and  a  ray  of  light  polarized  in  a  plane  perpendicular 
to  the  plane  of  incidence  be  transmitted  through  the  crystal 
the  incident  and  emergent  rays  are  parallel,  and  the  plane  of 
polarization  remains  unchanged.  Then  ,',  =  ,',  and  in  virtue 
of  equations  (59)  equations  (64)  become 


(65) 


When  the  incident  ray  falls  on  the  first  surface  of  the 
crystal  at  the  polarizing  angle,  we  have 

l'  =  0,     7'2  =  0,     and     J3  =  72  =  /. 

In  this  case,  the  incident  light  passes  through  the  crystal 
unchanged  in  intensity,  direction  of  electric  displacement, 
and  direction  of  propagation, 

277.     Singularities    of    the    Wave-Surface  —  The 

equation    of    the   wave-surface,   Art.  261,   may    be    put    in 
the  form 

<«V  4  by  +  cV  -  «V)0*;S  +  if  +  s2  -  V)  -  (<?  -  V)(b*  -  c2)//2  =  0. 


From  this  equation  it  appears  that  if  the  point  of  intersection 
of  the  three  surfaces 

« V  +  I? if  +  cV  -  rt»e»  =  0,     x2  +  i'  +  z*  -  b2  =  0,     //  =  0 

be  taken  as  origin,  the  lowest  terms  in  the  equation  of  the 
wave-surface  are  of  the  second  degree,  and  therefore  that  the 
origin  is  a  double  point  on  the  wave-surface  at  which  there 
is  a  tangent  cone  of  the  second  degree. 


188  Electromagnetic  Throry  of  Light, 

If  we  seek  for  the  coordinates  of  the  points  of  intersection 
of  the  three  surfaces,  we  have 

«V  +  cV  =  rtV,     x*  +  z>  =  b\     >/  =  0  ; 

whence   we   obtain    for   the   coordinates   of   the   point   the 

expressions 

,.j     M  ;,»  _  rt 

*-'£$<  **-°>  *'  =  a^-      (fi6) 

The  equation  of  the  circular  sections  of  Fresnel's  ellipsoid 


whence,  if  w,,  tstt  and  za3  denote  the  direction-cosines  of  the 
perpendicular  to  a  plane  of  circular  section,  we  have 

,fi~ 


From  (66)  and  (6?)  it  appears  that  a  singular  point  on 
the  wave-surface  is  on  a  perpendicular  to  the  plane  of  & 
circular  section  of  Fresnel's  ellipsoid  at  a  distance  l>  from 
the  origin. 

The  existence  of  such  points  follows  readily  from  the  mode 
of  generation  of  the  wave-surface  described  in  Art.  260.  Fiona 
thence  it  appears  that  the  perpendicular  to  each  section  of 
Fresjiel's  ellipsoid  meets  the  wave-surface  in  two  points  whose 
distances  from  the  centre  are  equal  to  the  principal  semi-axea 
of  the  section. 

If  the  section  be  circular,  every  axis  is  a  principal  axis, 
and  all  the  corresponding  points  on  the  wave-surface  coalesce 
into  one. 

The  perpendiculars  on  the  corresponding  tangent-planes 
of  the  ellipsoid  are,  however,  not  in  the  same  plane  ;  and  thus 
corresponding  to  the  one  ray  going  from  the  centre  to  the 
singular  point  there  are  an  infinite  number  of  wave-front* 
that  is,  an  infinite  number  of  tangent-planes  to  the  wave- 
surface  meeting  at  the  singular  point. 


Singularities  of  the  Wave- Surf  nee.  189 

As  the  wave-normals  and  velocities  of  propagation  are 
different  for  these  fronts,  when  the  ray  reaches  the  surface 
of  the  crystal  it  is  refracted  into  an  infinite  number  of  rays, 
forming  a  cone,  and  the  phenomenon  exhibited  is  termed 
conical  refraction. 

From  the  consideration  of  the  ellipsoid  reciprocal  to 
Fresnel's  ellipsoid,  it  is  easy  to  see  that  the  wave-surface 
must  possess  singularities  of  another  kind  in  addition  to 
those  mentioned  above. 

From  Art.  260,  it  appears  that  the  perpendicular  to  each 
section  of  the  reciprocal  ellipsoid  is  perpendicular  to  two 
tangent-planes  of  the  wave-surface,  and  meets  them  in  points 
whose  distances  from  the  centre  are  the  reciprocals  of  the 
semi-axes  of  the  section.  If  the  section  be  a  circular  section, 
every  axis  is  a  principal  axis,  and  all  the  corresponding  feet 
of  perpendiculars  on  tangent-planes  to  the  wave-surface 
coalesce  into  one. 

The  central  radii  of  the  reciprocal  ellipsoid  are  co-direc- 
tional with  perpendiculars  on  tangent-planes  of  Fresnel's 
ellipsoid,  which  are  the  reciprocals  of  the  radii,  so  that  all 
the  perpendiculars  to  tangent-planes  of  Fresnel's  ellipsoid 
which  lie  in  a  circular  section  of  the  reciprocal  ellipsoid  are 
equal  to  the  mean  semi-axis  of  Fresnel's  ellipsoid,  and  corre- 
spond to  a  single  tangent-plane  to  the  wave-surface.  The 
corresponding  radii  of  Fresnel's  ellipsoid  do  not,  however,  lie 
in  the  same  plane,  and  are  not  equal,  so  that  there  are  an 
infinite  number  of  rays  corresponding  to  the  same  wave-front 
which  must  therefore  touch  the  wave-surface  all  along  a  curve. 
To  find  the  nature  of  this  curve,  we  may  proceed  thus. 

Let  p  denote  the  length  of  the  central  perpendicular  on  a 
tangent-plane  of  Fresnel's  ellipsoid,  and  a,  /3,  7  its  direction- 
.angles. 

If  /;  lie  in  the  circular  section  of  the  reciprocal  ellipsoid, 
we  have  p  =  b,  and  therefore 

<iz  cos2a  +  b~  cos2/3  +  c2cos27  =  £2(cos2a  +  cos2/3  +  cos2^) ; 
that  is,  («2-&2)  C082a  -  (62-C2)  C082y  =  0. 

Also,  cos2  a  +  cos2  7  =  siu2/3  ; 

b"1  —  c2  a2  —  b~ 

whence     cos2a  =  — -,  siu2/3,     cos2  7  =    2  _  ^  sin'/j      (68) 


190  Electromagnetic  Theory  of  Light. 

Let  r  denote  the  central  radius  of  Fresnel's  ellipsoid  to  tlie 
point  of  contact  of  the  tangent-plane  perpendicular  to  j),  then 

(i*  cos2  a  +  i4  cos2/3  +  c*  co.-r-y 
~V~ 

and  if  p  denotes  the  distance  of  this  point  of  contact  from 
the  foot  of  the  perpendicular,  /o8  =  r9  -  ;A  In  the  present 
case,  p  =  b,  and  we  have 

a*  cos2  n  +  b*  cos2  /3  +  <••*  cos2  y  -  4* 

p*  -  —j-r- 

_  (r«4  -  &')  cos2  «  -  (6*  -  /•')  cos?  Y 
P 

Substituting  for  cos2a  and  cos27  their  values  from  (68),  we  get 


It  is  plain,  from  the  construction  in  Art.  260,  that  p  is 
the  distance  from  the  foot  of  the  perpendicular  on  the  tangent- 
plane  to  the  wave-surface  to  its  point  of  contact,  and  that  this 
distance  is  parallel  to  the  corresponding  direction  of  displace- 
ment in  the  wave-plane.  In  the  present  case  the  wave-plan! 
contains  the  axis  of  y,  and  /3  is  the  angle  which  the  electric 
displacement  makes  with  this  axis.  Hence  j3  is  the  angle 
which  the  line  from  the  foot  of  the  perpendicular  to  the 
point  of  contact  of  the  wave-front  with  the  wave-.surt;i(  .- 
makes  with  a  parallel  to  the  axis  of  y  in  the  wuve-front. 

Accordingly, 

-*•>*.  ft  (69, 


is  the  equation  of  the  curve  along  which  the  wave-front 
touches  the  wave-surface.  This  curve  is  therefore  a  circle 
which  touches  the  parallel  to  the  axis  of  y  at  the  foot  of  the 
perpendicular  from  the  centre,  and  whose  diameter  is  denoted 
by  the  expression 


Total  Reflexion.  19j 

Corresponding  to  the  wave-plane  we  have  been  considering 
there  are  an  infinite  number  of  rays  which  meet  the  wave- 
iront  along  its  circle  of  contact  with  the  wave-surface.  All 
these  rays  have  the  same  wave-normal,  and  are  propagated 
with  the  same  normal  velocity.  Hence,  when  they  are  re- 
fracted at  the  surface  of  the  crystal,  the  emergent  rays  are 
parallel  and  form  a  cylinder.  Unless  the  wave-normal  be 
normal  to  the  surface,  the  section  of  this  cylinder  made  by 
the  plane  bounding  the  crystal  is  an  ellipse. 

The  remarkable  phenomena  described  above  were  foretold 
by  Hamilton  as  consequences  of  properties  of  Fresnel's  wave- 
surface  discovered  by  him.  They  were  realized  experimentally 
nrst  by  Lloyd,  and  long  afterwards  by  Fitzgerald. 

278.  Total  Reflexion.—  When  light  passes  from  a  denser 
into  a  rarer  medium,  if  the  angle  of  incidence  exceed  sin"1  -, 

where  ^  denotes  the  relative  index  of  refraction  of  the  medm 
there  is  no  refracted  ray.  In  fact,  under  these  circumstances^ 
a  refracted  wave-plane  is  impossible,  as  it  would  in  the  case 
of  an  isotropic  medium,  be  a  tangent-plane  to  a  sphere  drawn 
through  a  line  lying  inside  the  sphere.  If  both  media  be 
isotropic,  equations  (43)  seem  impossible  to  satisfy  ;  for,  if 
we  suppose  /!  zero,  these  equations  cannot  be  satisfied  unless 
we  make  I  and  /'  each  zero. 

Mathematically  it  is  possible  to  give  a  solution  of  equa- 
tions (43),  which  in  its  final  result  is  physically  satisfactory  ; 
but  it  seems  impossible  to  obtain  a  sound  physical  basis  for 
the  equations  themselves. 

The  mathematical  solution  is  as  follows  :  —  Assume 
D  =  ae-<4>,     I)'  =  a'e-'p',     D1  =  aj  e-«i>i, 

where       <  =  v/-  1  ,     and     (/>  =  -^  {  Vt  -  (Ix  +  my  4  ws)  j, 

A 

' 


AI 

then    the    differential    equations    of    wave  -propagation    are 
satisfied,  and  D,  &c.,  are  periodic. 


192  Electromagnetic  Theory  of  Light. 

If  we  now  suppose  the  incident  light  polarized  in  the 
jilane  of  incidence,  since 

Fi      1        V     1 

A7  =  ^'   T  =  ^'   and   ri  =  T' 

at  the  origin,  where  x,  //,  and  x  are  all  zero,  we  have 

f  -  f'  ~*  *  f»  J 

and  as  equations  (43)  mathematically  hold  good,  we  have 
sin  1  1  cos  i  -  cos  »,  sin  t  r 
sin  f  ,  cos  i  +  cos  t\  sin  « 

But  sin  »',  =  /z  sin  i,     cos  ix  =  t  -v/O*2  sia8'  ~  !)• 

and  therefore 

/'     fi  sin  t  cos  «  -  i  sin  »  v/(/u2  sin2  i  -  1)      1  -  t  tan  e 
/       a  sin  i  cos  t  +  t  sin  &  *S  ($£  sin2  *  —  1)       1  +  i  tun  t 

v/^sii.2/-!) 
=  (cos  c  +  (  sin  e  s  =  e"2",    where    tan  e  =  —  *•  —  . 

fj.  COS  / 

Hence  D'  =  a  r2'*  <r"J>'  =  a  e-'(<?>'-i-2«), 

and,  accordingly,  the  intensity  of  the  reflected  light  is  equal 
to  tiiat  of  the  incident  ;  but  its  phase  is  increased  by  2e. 
Again, 


and  since  the  axis  of  x  is  normal  to  the  surface  separating 
the  media,  and  the  axis  of  z  perpendicular  to  the  plane  of 
incidence,  we  have 

/j  =  cos  i,  =  t  </(fj?  siu't  -  1),     nil  =  AI  sin  i,     N!  =  0, 


2iir,¥, 

(70) 


Absorption  of  Light.  193 


nt  ™r-hHS  ^^f1?"'  ^e  .P°*er  of  e  whose  index  is  real  is 
P^10.d^;  and  since  A,  is  very  small  when  *  is  of  sensible 
magnitude    this  factor  tends  to  become  very  small      Hence 
at  any  sensible  distance  from  the  boundary  A  is  very  small 
and  there  is  no  visible  refracted  ray. 

In  other  cases  of  total  reflexion  a  similar  mode  of  treat- 
ment may  be  employed  The  results  obtained  above  satisfy 
the  mathematical  conditions  holding  good  when  the  reflexion 
is  not  total,  and  the  final  result  is  consistent  with  the  observed 
phenomena;  but  the  whole  investigation  can  scarcely  be 
regarded  as  having  any  physical  validity. 

279.  Absorption  of  tight.—  When  a  medium  is  not  a 
perfect  insulator,  an  electromotive  force  produces  not  only  a 
change  01  electric  displacement  but  also  a  conduction-current 

i±  G  be  the  electric  conductibility  of  the  medium,  the 
istance  of  an  element  of  unit  section  parallel  to  the  axis 

of  x  is  —  ,  and  the  electromotive  force  for  this  element  is 

Xdx.     Hence,  if  i\  denote  the  intensity  of  the  conduction- 
current  parallel  to  x,  we  have     i\  =  CX. 

The  total  current  is  made  up  of  the  conduction-current 
and  that  due  to  a  change  of  the  electric  displacement; 
accordingly,  we  have 


and  as         X  =  ~f,     we  obtain     u  =/+    ^ 


•** 

ic 


Substituting  for  u  in  terms  of  the  components  of  magneti 
force,  and  for  the  latter  in  terms  of  those  of  displacement,  by 
means  of  equations  (13),  (15),  and  (11),  we  get 


f  v./  +  .    (7J) 

K  -&K  dxdx      d  v     ' 


The  last  term  in  this  equation  is  zero;  and  if  we  take 
the  normal  to  the  plane  of  the  wave  as  the  axis  of  z,  the 
displacement  /is  a  function  of  z  only,  and  (71)  becomes 


K 


(     > 


194  Electromagnetic  Theory  of  Light. 

If  U  denote  the  velocity  of  wave-propagation  when  there 
is  no  absorption,  we  have 


and  putting    ir-nC  =  k,    we  get 
Thus  (72)  becomes 


To  solve  this  equation,  we  may  assume 
/=  a  «'0>< -»«*), 

where  /-—  2?r 

i  =  v/-l,      n  =  — , 


and  m  is  a  quantity  to  be  determined  so  as  to  satisfy  (73). 
We  have,  then, 

-  n* 


that  is,  «2 

-^-4*««.  (74) 

Assume     m-q-  ip,     then 


Eliminating  g,  we  get 
/hence 


;>''  = 


Absorption  of  Light.  195 

As/>  is  real,  p2  must  be  positive,  and  therefore 


Here  A;  is  of  the  same  order  as  C,  which  is  of  the  order 


K  1 

or 


Hence  -—  is  of  the  form  v^2,  where  v  is  a  numerical 
coefficient  depending  on  C  and  on  the  units  selected,  T  the 
time  of  vibration  in  the  wave  of  light,  and  ^the  unit  of  time. 
In  order  that  C  should  have  any  sensible  magnitude,  V  must 
be  enormously  great  compared  with  r.  Hence  WU'  jg  a 

^j2 

small  quantity,  whose  square  may  be  neglected  in  the 
expansion  of  the  square  root,  and  we  have 


2U*      2n* 
Substituting  q  -  tp  for  m,  we  get 

/  =  a,  ft*  €'(»*-  **L  (75) 

As  the  wave  is  advancing  in  the  direction  of  2  positive, 
q  is  positive  ;  and  since  pq  is  positive,  p  must  be  positive. 
Hence 


2ir^CU,  (76) 

also 

_  2kn  _   n    _  '2Tr 

q  =  IT  ~  1J  =   Ur' 
and 

2i7T 

-  (Ut-  Z\ 

f  =  ae-f'eVr  •  (77) 


196  Electromagnetic  Theory  of  Light. 

It  follows,  from  the  expression  obtained  for  f,  that  the 
velocity  of  wave-propagation  is  U,  and  is  therefore  unaltered 
by  absorption.  In  consequence  of  the  factor  e~ps,  the  amplitude 
of /diminishes  as  z  increases.  Since  ;;  varies  as  C,  unless  C 
be  very  small,  the  amplitude  of /diminishes  rapidly,  and  the 
medium  is  practically  opaque. 

280.  Electrostatic  and  Electromagnetic  measure. — 

The  reader  of  the  foregoing  pages  may  have  been  struck  by 
an  apparent  inconsistency  between  the  present  Chapter  and 
Chapter  XI. 

In  Chapter  XI.  the  specific  inductive  capacity  k  is  of  the 
nature  of  a  numerical  quantity.  In  the  present  Chapter,  the 
specific  inductive  capacity  TTis  regarded  as  the  reciprocal  of 
the  square  of  a  velocity.  The  apparent  inconsistency  results 
from  the  fact  that  in  Chapter  XI.  the  various  quantities  are 
supposed  to  be  expressed  in  electrostatic  measure,  whereas  in 
the  present  Chapter  they  are  supposed  to  be  expressed  in 
electromagnetic. 

We  must  consider  the  hypotheses  on  which  the  two  modes 
of  measurement  are  based,  and  how  it  is  that  in  reference  to 
space,  time,  and  mechanical  force,  the  expression  for  the  same 
physical  quality  of  a  body  is  in  one  mode  of  expression  a 
quantity  of  a  nature  different  from  what  it  is  in  the  other. 

Lot  e  and  E  denote  quantities  of  electricity  expressed  in 
electrostatic  and  electromagnetic  measure,  JCand  3£  the  corre- 
sponding electromotive  intensities,  and  /  and  f  the  displace- 
ments. Let  L  denote  a  linear  magnitude,  and  T  a  portion 
of  time,  and  let  us  use  the  symbol  =  to  mean  that  two 
expressions  denote  quantities  of  the  same  nature. 

Electrostatic  measure  is  based  on  the  assumption  that  the 
product  of  two  quantities  of  electricity  divided  by  the  square 

e* 
of  a  line  denotes  a  mechanical  force,  that  is,  —  =  mechanical 

force. 

Electromagnetic  measure  is  based  on  the  assumption  that 
the  product  of  the  strengths  of  two  magnetic  poles  divided 
by  the  square  of  a  line  denotes  a  mechanical  force,  that  is, 
if  m  denote  the  strength  of  a  magnetic  pole, 

«»«  e» 

yj-  =  mechanical  force  «=  — ;     whence     e  =  m. 


Electrostatic  and  Electromagnetic  Measure.  197 

Again,  i  denoting  the  strength  of  a  current,  E=  Ti;  but 
f  =  ,/,  where/  denotes  the  strength  of  a  magnetic  shell,  and 
JD  =  magnetic  moment  =  mL  ;  wlience 


The  electromotive  intensity  multiplied  by  a  quantity 
of  electricity  denotes  in  either  system  of  measurement  a 
mechanical  force  ;  according^,  eX  =  E3,  ;  but 

T  T 

E  =  -e,     and  therefore    £  =  —X. 

-Li  1 

Again,    f  I?  =  E,    and   fD  =  e  ;     whence 

I-*,,     also     /-£-*, 

and  therefore 

T  T2  1 


where  F  denotes  a  velocity.  Thus  k  is  a  numerical  quantity, 
but  K  the  reciprocal  of  the  square  of  a  velocity. 

The  magnitude  of  the  unit  of  electricity  differs  very  much 
in  the  two  systems  of  measurement. 

In  the  electromagnetic  system,  two  units  at  the  unit  of 
distance  apart  act  on  each  other  with  the  unit  force. 

In  the  electromagnetic  system,  two  magnet-poles  of  unit 
strength,  at  the  unit  distance  apart,  act  on  each  other  with 
the  unit  force. 

A  circular  current  of  unit  strength  acts  on  a  unit  magnet- 
pole  at  its  centre  with  a  force  which  is  2?r  times  the  unit  of 
force,  provided  the  radius  of  the  circle  be  of  unit  length. 

The  quantity  of  electricity  which  passes  through  a  section 
of  this  circuit  in  the  unit  of  time  is  the  unit  quantity  of 
electricity  expressed  in  electromagnetic  measure. 

The  quantity  of  electricity  contained  in  the  electro- 
magnetic unit  is  n  times  the  quantity  contained  in  the 
electrostatic. 


198  Electromagnetic  Theory  of  Light. 

If,  then,  E  and  e  denote  the  same  absolute  quantity  of 
electricity  expressed,  one  in  electromagnetic,  the  other  in 
electrostatic  units,  and  if  L  and  T  denote  the  units  of  length 
and  of  time,  we  have 


but  E1S,  =  eX,  where  3c  and  X  denote  the  electromotive 
force  corresponding  to  the  quantity  of  electricity  denoted 
by  E  and  e  ;  whence 


Then, 


E  =  ^-e  =  ~  UkX  =  ISk-^r- 
nL         nL  M*  L2 


whence 


When  the  second  and  centimetre  are  taken  as  the  units 
of  time  and  length, 

n  =  '3  x  1010     approximately. 


Note  on  Thomson  and  Dirichlet's  Theorem.  199 


NOTE  ON  THOMSON  AND  DIEICHLET'S  THEOREM, 

ARTICLE  70. 

When  the  number  of  given  surfaces  is  reduced  to  one, 
this  theorem  is  proved  by  Gauss  in  the  following  manner  :  — 

(1)  On  a  given  surface  8  a  homogeneous  distribution  of 
a  given  quantity  of  mass  is  always  possible,  such  that  J  VadS 
is  a  minimum.  For  this  distribution,  F"is  constant  for  all 
occupied  parts  of  the  surface,  and  there  is  no  part  unoccupied. 

If  r  denote  the  longest  distance  between  any  two  points 
of  S,  and  M  the  total  mass,  it  is  obvious  that  at  any  point 

of  S  the  potential  cannot  be  less  than  —  ,  since  the  distri- 

bution is  homogeneous,  that  is,  composed  of  mass  having 
everywhere  the  same  algebraical  sign.    Hence  J  VadS  cannot 

be  less  than  —  • 
r 

Consequently  \VadS  cannot  be  diminished  without  limit, 
and  there  must  be  a  distribution  such  that  J  VadS  cannot  be 
made  less.  In  this  distribution  V  must  be  constant.  For,  if 
for  an  occupied  portion  Si  of  the  surface,  Vi  be  everywhere 
greater  than  A,  and  for  another  equal  portion  S2  of  the 
surface  Vz  be  everywhere  less  than  A,  at  each  point  of  2i 
let  §<T  =  -  v,  and  at  each  point  of  S2  let  8<r  =  +  v,  then  the 
total  mass  remains  unaltered,  and 


since  SF  is  the  distribution  resulting  from  So-,  and  therefore, 
by  Art.  51,  we  have 


200  Note  on  Thomson  and  Dirichlet's  Theorem. 

Accordingly,  J  VadS  has  received  a  variation  which  is 
essentially  negative,  nnd  consequently  cannot  be  a  minimum 
for  the  distribution  <r.  Hence,  when  the  integral  is  a  mini- 
mum, V  is  constant  for  the  occupied  part  of  the  surface.  If 
there  were  a  part  unoccupied  by  Art.  66,  V  would  be  less  for 
this  part  than  for  the  occupied  part,  and  hence  as  before  the 
integral  could  be  made  less.  Accordingly,  in  the  distribution 
for  which  jVadS  is  least,  there  is  no  part  of  the  surface 
unoccupied. 

(2)  If  U  be  a  given  function  of  the  coordinates,  a 
homogeneous  distribution  of  given  mass  over  S  is  possible, 
such  that  J(F-  2U)adS  is  a  minimum.  For  this  distri- 
bution V-  U  is  constant  for  all  occupied  portions  of  the 
surface. 

If  V  be  the  largest  value  of  U  on  S,  it  is  clear  that 
/  (  V-  2  U)  <j(tS  cannot  be  less  than 


and  therefore  that  there  must  be  a  distribution  such  that 
J  (V  '-  2U)adS  cannot  be  made  less.  For  this  distribution 
V  -  U  is  constant  at  all  occupied  parts  of  the  surface. 

Let     JF=  J  (  F  -  2  Z7)  odS,     then 

8  W=  J  $r*dS  +  $  (V-  2ET)  falS  =  2l(V 


If  V-  U  be  greater  than  A  at  every  point  of  an  occupied 
portion  of  surface  2,,  and  less  than  A  at  every  point  of  an 
equal  portion  2*  °f  surface,  as  in  (1),  SJP  can  be  made 
negative,  and  therefore  W  cannot  be  the  least  possible. 

In  this  case,  if  part  of  the  surface  S  be  unoccupied, 
V-  U  may  be  greater  on  this  part  than  it  is  on  the  occu- 
pied part,  and  therefore  in  this  case  we  cannot  show  that  the 
whole  surface  must  be  occupied. 

(3)  Suppose  now  three  distributions  of  mass  on  S. 

1.  A  distribution  whose  surface-density  is  <TO  and  potential 
Fo,  such  that  J  VadS  is  the  least  possible,  the  total  mass 
being  M. 


Gauss's  Method.  201 

2.  A  distribution  whose  surf  ace-density  island  potential 
F,    such  that    l(V-^U}  odS    is  the  least  possible,  the 
total  mass  being  M,  and  e  being  a  given  constant 

3.  ,  A  distribution  whose  density  is  <r2,  and  potential  Ftf 
such  that 


then  the  total  mass  is  zero,  and 


but  this  is  constant  for  all  parts  of  the  surface  occupied  by  <r,. 

If  £  be  diminished  without  limit,  the  distribution  cr, 
passes  into  <TO,  and  in  this  case  there  is  no  finite  portion 
of  the  surface  S  left  unoccupied. 

Hence,  when  £  is  diminished  without  limit,  Fi  -  U  is 
constant  for  the  whole  surface  S. 

Let  us  now  superpose  on  <r2  the  distribution  whose  density 
is  a<rQ,  where  a  is  constant.  Then 

V=  a  V,  +  V,,     and      V-  U=  a  V,  +  F2  -  U. 

By  a  proper  determination  of  a  the  right-hand  member  of 
this  equation  can  be  made  zero  at  all  points  of  S. 

Accordingly  for  a  single  surface  Thomson  and  Dirichlet's 
Theorem  is  proved. 

This  theorem  in  its  most  general  form  can  readily  be 
deduced  from  the  properties  of  fluid  motion. 

Suppose  that  the  given  surfaces  <S\,  S2,  &c.,  are  sur- 
rounded by  liquid,  or  incompressible  fluid,  of  unit  density, 
extending  to  infinity.  Apply  to  the  liquid  at  each  surface 
an  impulsive  pressure  which  at  each  surface  is  equal  to  the 
given  value  of  Thomson's  function  for  that  surface.  The 
liquid  begins  to  move  irrotationally,  and  the  velocity  potential 
of  the  motion  is  the  same  as  the  impulsive  pressure,  and  is 
equal  at  each  surface  to  the  given  value  of  Thomson's 
function,  and  satisfies  Laplace's  equation  for  the  whole  of 


202  Note  on  Thomson  and  Dirichkfs  Theorem. 

Thus  the  truth  of  Thomson  and  Dirichlet's  Theorem  is 
established. 

It  is  easy  to  show  from  Green's  theorem  that,  if  there  be 
a  given  quantity  of  mass  on  each  of  a  number  of  surfaces, 
this  mass  may  be  so  distributed  that  the  potential  shall  be 
constant  over  each  surface. 

Let    2fF=2f  FarfS.     Then 


-  +£>a  -  f  \(*r\\  (*T)'+  f^ 

dv     dv  J         }\\dx  )      \dijj      \dz 


-  -  z 

Hence  W  is  essentially  positive,  and  cannot  therefore  be 
diminished  without  limit,  and  there  must  be  a  distribution  of 
mass  such  that  W  cannot  be  made  less.  For  this  distribution 
V  must  be  constant  for  each  surface.  For  if  V  be  not  con- 
stant, W  may  be  made  to  receive  a  variation  which  is  negative 
by  transferring  positive  mass  from  points  on  the  surface  where 
Fis  greater  than  A  to  points  where  it  is  less  than  A.  In  this 
case  it  is  not  necessary  that  the  part  of  the  surface  from  which 
the  transfer  is  made  should  be  occupied.  On  the  other  hand, 
if  V  be  constant  for  each  surface,  any  change  of  distribution 
increases  W.  For,  let  v  be  the  change  in  F,  then 


dv 


dv 


where  the  surface-integrals  are  to  be  taken  over  both  sides 
of  the  surfaces ;  but  as  Fis  constant  for  each  surface,  and 

)  —  dS  zero, 
dv 

since  the  total  mass  is  constant,  we  have 


since  V2/y  =  0  throughout  the  field.  Hence  the  change  in  W 
is  essentially  positive,  and  JFis  least  when  Fis  constant  over 
each  surface. 


Gauss's  Method.  203 

The  property  of  the  potential  made  use  of  in  (1)  to  show 
that  the  whole  surface  must  be  occupied  is  perhaps  more 
readily  established  by  the  method  of  Gauss  than  by  that 
employed  in  Art.  66. 

Gauss's  method  is  as  follows  : — 

If  there  be  no  mass  outside  a  surface  S  on  which  the 
potential  is  everywhere  positive,  its  value  at  a  point  0, 
outside  S,  is  positive,  and  less  than  A  its  greatest  value  on  S. 

For  if  the  potential  P  at  0  be  greater  than  A,  draw 
lines  in  all  directions  from  0 ;  they  meet  the  surface  S  or  go 
to  infinity,  and  the  potential  on  any  one  of  them  passes  from 
P  to  A,  or  to  some  value  less  than  A.  Hence  on  every  line 
there  is  a  point  at  which  the  value  of  the  potential  is  B, 
lying  between  P  and  A.  All  these  points  form  a  closed 
surface  at  which  the  potential  is  constant ;  and  as  there  is  no 
mass  inside  it,  the  potential  has  the  same  value  throughout 
the  interior  of  the  surface,  Art,  61.  Hence  the  value  of  the 
potential  at  0  is  B,  and  cannot  consequently  be  P  as  was 
supposed.  If  P  were  negative,  we  could  show  in  like 
manner  that  the  potential  at  0  must  lie  between  P  and  zero, 
and  could  not  therefore  have  the  supposed  value. 

Again,  the  potential  at  0  cannot  be  A  or  zero.  For  if  it 
has  either  of  these  values,  describe  a  sphere  round  0  as  centre. 
At  no  point  of  the  surface  of  this  sphere  can  the  potential 
be  greater  than  A  or  less  than  zero.  Hence  its  mean  value 
on  this  surface  cannot  be  A  or  zero,  unless  it  have  this  value 
for  the  whole  surface  of  the  sphere,  in  which  case  it  would 
have  the  same  value  for  the  whole  of  space  external  to  S, 
which  is  impossible. 

If  the  potential  be  everywhere  negative  on  the  surface  o, 
its  value  at  a  point  0  outside  S  is  negative,  and  less  in 
absolute  magnitude  than  its  greatest  negative  value  on  /S'. 
This  is  proved  in  a  manner  precisely  similar  to  that  adopted 
in  the  case  of  the  positive  potential. 


INDEX. 


\_Thef.gures  refer  to  the  pages. ~\ 


Absorption  of  light,  193. 

Analogues  of  tesseral  harmonics,  47, 

56. 
Anisotropic  ellipsoid  in  magnetic  field, 

106. 

dielectric,  132. 
magnetic  medium,  105. 
Attraction,   Earth's   tangential  com- 
ponent of,  14. 
on  dielectric  body,  132. 
Axis  of  magnet,  95. 

Boundary  between  two  dielectrit 
media,  conditions  at,  131, 
162. 

Clairaut's  theorem,  12. 
Complete  solid  harmonics,  26. 

spherical  harmonics,  3,  23. 
Conductors,  charge  on,  127. 

distribution  of  electricity  on,  131, 

134. 

Conductors,  system  of  charged,  139. 
Conical  refraction,  189. 
Crystalline  dielectric,  132. 

distribution  of  electricity  on  con- 
ductors in,  134. 
electromagnetic    disturbance   in, 

155. 
energy  in,   expressed  as  surface 

inte'gral,  136. 
energy  due  to  electrified  particle 

in,  136. 

force  on  electric  particle  in,  140. 
force  due  to  spherical  conductor 

in,  141. 
force  due  to  spherical  particle  in, 

142. 

potential  in,  134. 
potential  due  to   spherical  con- 
ductor in,  140. 
wave-surface  in,  157,  160. 


Current,  electric,  energy  of,  in  mag- 
netic field,  115,  144. 

in  presence  of  a  second,  118. 

intensity  and  magnetic  force,  149. 
Cylindrical  refraction,  191. 


Dielectrics,  124. 

Dielectric  body,  attraction  on,  132. 

Dirichlet,  199". 

Displacement,  electric,  124. 

direction  of,  in  plane- wave,  153. 
distribution  of,  125. 
due  to  electrified  sphere,  127. 
energy  due  to,  125,  132. 
Distribution  of  given  mass  on  surfaces 
for  potential  constant  for  each 
surface,  202. 

Disturbance,  electromagnetic,  propa- 
gation of,  150. 


Earth,  figure  of  the,  11. 

Earth's   magnetic   force,   locality   of 

source  of,  108. 
Earth's  magnetic  poles,  109. 

potential,  107. 
Electric     current,     energy     due     to 

presence  of,  115,  144. 
force  on  current  element  exercised 

by,  122. 

magnetic  force  of,  114,  116. 
magnetic  potential  of,  114. 
magnetic  shell  equivalent  to,  113. 
properties  of,  110. 
Electric  current  element,  force  on,  in 

magnetic  field,  121. 
magnetic  force  of,  116. 
Electric    currents,     energy    due    to 

mutual  action  of,  118. 
mutual  forces  between,  118. 


206 


Index. 


Electric  displacement,  124. 
distribution  of,  125. 
due  to  electrified  sphere,  127. 
energy  due  to,  125. 
Electricity,   distribution  of,  on  con- 
ductors, 131. 

Electrified  particle  in  crystalline  me- 
dium, force  on,  140. 
force  due  to,  142. 
Electrified  particles,   force  between, 

130. 

Electrified  spheres,  energy  dur  to,  128. 
Electromagnetic   disturbance,  energy 

of,  170. 
Electromagnetic  field,  equations  of, 

160. 

Electromagnetic  theory  of  light,  144. 
Electromotive  force,  112. 
Electromotive    intensity.     130,    149, 

162. 
Electrostatic      and      electromagnetic 

measure,  196. 

Ellipsoid,  anistropic,  in  field  of  mag- 
netic force,  106. 
components  of  attraction  of,  77. 
isotropic  in  magnetic  field,  105. 
potential  of,  78,  79. 
Ellipsoids  in  general,  60. 
of  revolution,  39. 
oblate,  54. 
prolate,  39. 
Ellipsoidal  harmonics,  39,  60. 

expressed  as  functions  of  Carte- 
sian coordinates,  66. 
identity  of  terms  in  equal  series 

of,  70. 

surface  integral  of  product  of,  69. 
vanishing  at  infinity,  65. 
Energy  and  electromotive  force,  145. 
Energy  due  to   electromagnetic   dis- 
turbance, 170. 

Faraday  tube,  125. 
Fitzgerald,  191. 

Fluid,  homogeneous  mass  of  revolv- 
ing, 10. 
Focaloid,  attraction  of,  77. 

for  ellipsoid  in  general,  77. 

for  oblate  ellipsoid,  58. 

for  prolate  ellipsoid,  52. 
Fresnel,  158. 
Fresnel's  ellipsoid.  158,  178. 

wave-surface,  160,  178. 


Gauss,  107,  199,  203. 

Hamilton,  191. 

Harmonics,  complete  spherical,  3,  23. 

ellipsoidal,  39,  60,  73. 

incomplete,  34. 

of  imaginary  degree,  38. 

reduction  of  function  to  spherical, 
24. 

solid,  1,  26,  74. 

spherical,  2,  18. 

applications  of,  7. 
Homocoid  for  ellipsoid  in  general,  7'2. 

for  oblate  ellipsoid,  68. 

for  prolate  ellipsoid,  52. 

Induction,    magnetic,    87,    88,    102, 

149,  150. 

Intensity  of  light,  168. 
Interior  surface  of; crystal,  reflexion 

and  refraction  at,  184. 
Isotropic  medium,  154. 


Lagrange's  equations,  145. 
Laplace,  coefficients  of,  2,  20. 
Legendre,  coefficients  of,  3,  15. 
Light,  absorption  of,  193. 

common,  168. 

electromagnetic  theory  of,  144. 

intensity  of,  168. 

Maxwell's  theory  of  147. 

polarized,  168. 


Lloyd 


propagation  of,  165. 
'd,  107, 


191. 


MacCullagh,  160. 
Magnetic  axis  of  body,  95. 

force,  87,  88,  149,  150,  154,  101. 

induction,  87,  88,  102,  149,  150. 
vector  potential  of,  90,  92. 

moment  of  element  of  body,  81. 

of  body,  96. 

particle,  vector  potential  of,  95. 

shell,  97. 

energy  due  to,  100,  101. 

potential  of,  97. 

system,  energy  due  to,  90. 
Magnetism,  induced,  102. 

distribution  of,  103. 

terrestrial,  107. 


207 


Magnetization,  intensity  of,  81. 
Magnetized  ellipsoid,  84. 

body,  potential  of,  82,  86. 
sphere,  83. 
Magnets,  constitution  and  action  of, 

81. 

energy  due  to,  89. 
Maxwell's   method  of  forming  solid 

harmonics,  28. 
theory  of  electric  displacement, 

124. 

light,  147. 

Medium,  dielectric  influence  of,  123. 
Moment,  magnetic,  of  body,  95. 


Oblate,  ellipsoid  of  revolution,  54,  50. 


Poisson's    equation    for    magnetized 
body,  83. 

Polarization,  electric,  124. 

Polarized  light,  168. 

Potential,  expansion  of,  in  solid  har- 
monics, 1. 

of  surface  distribution  on  pro- 
late ellipsoid,  50. 
on  oblate  ellipsoid,  56. 

Prolate,  ellipsoid  of  revolution,   39, 
50. 

Propagation  of  disturbance  in  electro- 
magnetic field,  150. 


Reflexion  and  refraction  of  light,  165. 

from  crystalline  medium,  176. 

at  interior  surface  of  crystal,  184. 

in  isotropic  media,  172. 

quantities  to  be  determined  in, 
172. 

for  uniaxal  crystal,  180. 
Reflexion,  total,  191. 
Revolving  fluid,  10. 


Solenoids,  112. 
Solid  Harmonics,  1,  26. 
Spherical  harmonics,  2,  3,  18,  23,  -'4 
34,  38. 

applications  of,  7. 
Spheroid,  potential  of  homogeneous,  8. 

heterogeneous   8. 
Stokes,  13,  91. 
Surface  distribution,  potential  of,  7 

50,  56,  71. 
Sylvester,  29. 


Tesseral  harmonics,  20. 

Thomson,  J.  J.,  124,  125. 

Thomson    and    Dirichlet's    theorem, 

199. 
Total  reflexion,  191. 


Uniaxal  crystals,  178. 

Fresnel's  ellipsoid  for,  178. 
wave-surface  for,  178. 

reflexion  and  refraction  for, 
Uniradial  directions,  178. 


Vector,  potential,  of  magnetic  induc- 
tion, 90,  92. 
for  magnetic  particle,  95. 


Wave,  152. 

-front,  153. 
-length,  152. 
-plane,  153. 
-surface,  157. 

in  crystalline  medium,  l'>7. 

equation  of,  160,  178. 

singularities  of,  187. 


THE  END.